Order Pre/1633/2015, 23 July, Which Are Updated Twelve Vocational Professional Family Graphic Arts, Listed In The National Catalogue Of Professional Qualifications, Established By Royal Decree 295/2004, Of...

Original Language Title: Orden PRE/1633/2015, de 23 de julio, por la que se actualizan doce cualificaciones profesionales de la familia profesional Artes Gráficas, recogidas en el Catálogo Nacional de Cualificaciones Profesionales, establecidas por Real Decreto 295/2004, de...

Read the untranslated law here: http://www.boe.es/buscar/doc.php?id=BOE-A-2015-8771

Organic law 5/2002, of 19 June, qualifications and vocational training, aims in the management of an integrated system of vocational training, qualifications and accreditation, to respond with efficiency and transparency to the social and economic demands through training practices. To do so, creates the national system of qualifications and vocational training, defining it in article 2.1 as a set of instruments and actions necessary to promote and develop the integration of offers of training, through the national catalogue of professional qualifications, as well as the evaluation and accreditation of the corresponding professional skills, in such a way that it promotes professional and social development of the people and the needs of the production system are covered.

The national catalogue of professional qualifications, according to article 7.1, is created with the purpose of facilitating the integrated nature and the adequacy between vocational training and the labour market, as well as lifelong training, the mobility of workers and the labour market unit. This catalogue is constituted by the qualifications identified in the productive system and the training associated with them, which is organised in training modules.

Article 5.3 of the organic law 5/2002, of 19 June, attributed to the National Institute of qualifications, the responsibility to define, develop and keep updated the national catalogue of professional qualifications, in his capacity as technical support body to the Council General of vocational training, whose regulatory development contained in article 9(2) of the Royal Decree 1128 / 2003 , 5 September, which regulates the national catalogue of professional qualifications, establishing in its article 9.4, the obligation to keep it permanently updated through periodic review which, in any case, must be made within a period not exceeding five years from the date of inclusion of the qualification in the catalog.

This order is issued pursuant to the Royal Decree 817/2014, of 26 September, which lays down the specific aspects of professional qualifications for as amended, procedure of approval and effects is therefore implementation article 7.3 of the organic law 5/2002, of 19 June, qualifications and vocational training who in their processing obtained opinion of the Council of State number 618/2014, July 23, 2014.

Thus, in the present order is updated, by replacing complete its annexes, twelve professional qualifications of the professional family graphic arts featuring an antique in the national catalogue of professional qualifications more than five years, that are implementing Royal Decree 817/2014, of 26 September. In addition, modify partially certain professional skills, through the replacement of transversal competence units and training modules associated, included in up-to-date professional qualifications listed in the annexes of this order.

In the process of elaboration of this order the autonomous communities have been consulted and they have issued report the General Council for vocational training and the State School Board.

In his virtue, a joint proposal from the Minister of education, culture and sport and Minister of employment and Social Security, have: article 1. Object and scope of application.

This ministerial order aims to update twelve professional qualifications corresponding to the professional family graphic arts, leading to the replacement of the relevant annexes, and modify partially certain professional qualifications through the substitution of certain units of competence and training modules associated, in application of the Royal Decree 817/2014, of 26 September, which establishes the specific aspects of professional whose modification qualifications procedure of approval and effects of application article 7.3 of the organic law 5/2002, of 19 June, qualifications and vocational training.

Up-to-date professional qualifications and the partially modified by this procedure are valid and are applicable throughout the national territory, and do not constitute a regulation of professional practice.

Article 2. Update of certain professional qualifications of the professional family graphic arts, established by Royal Decree 295/2004, of 20 February, which establishes certain professional qualifications that are included in the national catalogue of professional qualifications, as well as its relevant training modules which are incorporated into the catalogue modular vocational training.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of Royal Decree 295/2004 of 20 February, we proceed to update professional skills, whose specifications are contained in annexes LXXII and LXXIII of the aforementioned Royal Decree: one. A new wording is given at Annex LXXII, professional qualification "Offset printing". Level 2. ARG072_2, which appears as annex I of this order.

Two. A new wording is given at Annex LXXIII, professional qualification «Publishing». Level 3. ARG073_3, which appears as annex II of the present order.

Article 3. Update of a qualification professional of it family professional arts graphic, established by Royal Decree 1087 / 2005, of 16 of September, by which is set new qualifications professional, that is include in the catalogue national of qualifications professional, as well as their corresponding modules training, that is incorporate to the catalogue modular of training professional, and is updated certain qualifications professional of them established by the Real Decree 295 / 2004 , 20 February.

According to it established in the available additional unique of the Real Decree 1087 / 2005, of 16 of September, is comes to the update of the qualification professional whose specifications are contained in the annex CLI of the cited real Decree: is gives a new drafting to the annex CLI, qualification professional «printing digital». Level 2. ARG151_2, which appears as annex III of the present order.

Article 4. Update of certain qualifications professional of it family professional arts graphic, established by Royal Decree 1228 / 2006, of 27 of October, by which is complements the catalog national of qualifications professional, through the establishment of certain qualifications professional, as well as their corresponding modules training that is incorporate to the catalogue modular of training professional.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of the Royal Decree 1228 / 2006, on 27 October, proceeds to update professional skills, whose specifications are contained in annexes CCXVI, CCXVII, CCXVIII and the Royal Decree CCXIX: one. A new wording is given at Annex CCXVI, professional qualification «Chalcographic and xylographic engraving». Level 2. ARG216_2, which appears as annex IV of this order.

Two. A new wording is given at Annex CCXVII, 'Guillotined and folded' professional qualification. Level 2. ARG217_2, which appears as annex V of the present order.

3. A new wording is given at Annex CCXVIII, professional qualification «Die». Level 2. ARG218_2, which appears as annex VI to the present order.

Four. A new wording is given at Annex CCXIX, professional qualification «Graphic design». Level 3. ARG219_3, which appears as annex VII of this order.

Article 5. Update of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1135 / 2007 of 31 August, whereby the national catalogue of professional qualifications, is complemented by the establishment of six professional qualifications of the professional family graphic arts.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of the Royal Decree 1135 / 2007, of August 31, proceeds to the updating of professional qualifications whose specifications are contained in annexes CCLXXXVIII, CCLXXXIX, CCXC, CCXCI and the Royal Decree CCXCIII: one. A new wording is given at Annex CCLXXXVIII, professional qualification «taxation and how to obtain printer». Level 2. ARG288_2, which appears as annex VIII of this order.

Two. A new wording is given at Annex CCLXXXIX, professional qualification "Lithography". Level 2. ARG289_2, which appears as annex IX of this order.

3. A new wording is given at Annex CCXC, professional qualification «Train of sewing operations». Level 2. ARG290_2, which appears as annex X of this order.

Four. A new wording is given at Annex CCXCI, professional qualification 'Treatment and graphic elements in prepress layout'. Level 2. ARG291_2, which appears as annex XI of this order.

5. A new wording is given at Annex CCXCIII, 'Development of multimedia publishing products' professional qualification. Level 3. ARG293_3, which appears as annex XII of this order.


Article 6. Partial modification of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1955 / 2009 of 18 December, whereby the national catalogue of professional qualifications, is complemented by the establishment of seven professional qualifications of the professional graphic arts family.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of Royal Decree 1955 / 2009, December 18, proceed to the update of professional qualifications whose specifications are contained in annexes CDXVI, CDXVII, CDXVIII, CDXIX and the Royal Decree CDXX: one. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXVI: complex manufacturing, packaging, packaging and paper and cardboard articles.» L2. ARG416_2» respectively, replacing the unit's competition «UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and associated training module «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes», by the competition unit «UC0200_2: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and associated training module «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» corresponding to annex I 'offset printing. Level 2. ARG072_2» of this order.

Two. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXVII: flexography» respectively, replacing units of competition «UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2: materials and products in print» competition «UC0200_2 units «: Operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules ' MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2: materials and products in print», corresponding to Annex I 'offset printing. Level 2. ARG072_2» of this order.

3. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXVIII: gravure printing» respectively, replacing units of competition «UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2: materials and products in print» competition «UC0200_2 units «: Operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules ' MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2: materials and products in print», corresponding to annex I "offset printing. Level 2. ARG072_2» of this order.

Four. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXIX: printing screen printing and pad printing» respectively, replacing units of competition «UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2 «: Materials and products in print» by units of competition «UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity» and «UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing», and associated training modules «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes» and «MF0201_2: materials and products in print», corresponding to annex I "offset printing. Level 2. «ARG072_2» of the present order.

5. «Is modifies the qualification professional established as «annex CDXX: operations in binding industrial in rustic and cover hard» replacing respectively, the unit of competition «UC0200_2: operate in the process graphic in conditions of safety, quality and productivity» and the module training associated «MF0200_2: processes in arts graphic»» by the unit of competition «UC0200_2: operate in the process graphic in conditions of security» «, quality and productivity» and associated training module «MF0200_2: graphic arts processes», corresponding to Appendix LXXII "Offset printing" of this order. Also, replacing respectively the unit of competition «UC0691_2: prepare them materials raw and them products auxiliary for the binding» and the module training associated «MF0691_2: materials and products for binding» by the «UC0691_2: prepare them materials raw and them products auxiliary for the binding», and the module formative associated «MF0691_2: materials and products for binding», corresponding to the annex X «operations in trains of sewn.» Level 2. «ARG290_2» of the present order.

Article 7. Partial modification of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1957 / 2009 of 18 December, whereby the national catalogue of professional qualifications, is complemented by the establishment of nine professional qualifications of the family professional image and sound.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of the 1957 / 2009, December 18, proceed to the update of professional qualifications whose specifications are contained in annexes CDXXXV and CDXLI of the aforementioned Royal Decree: one. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXXXV: laboratory of image production operations» respectively, replacing the unit's competition «UC0928_2: scan and imaging software applications treat» and associated training module «MF0928_2: Digital Imaging» by the competition unit «UC0928_2: scan and imaging software applications treat» and associated training module 'MF0928_2 «: Digital imaging» corresponding to annex XI 'treatment and layout of graphic elements in prepress. Level 2. ARG291_2» of this order.

Two. Professional qualifications amending established as «annex CDXLI: photographic production» respectively, replacing the unit's competition «UC0928_2: scan and imaging software applications treat» and associated training module «MF0928_2: digital imaging» competition unit «UC0928_2: scan and imaging software applications treat» and the associated training module 'MF0928_2 «: Treatment of images digital», corresponding to the annex XI ' treatment and layout of elements graphics in prepress.» Level 2. ARG291_2» of this order.

Article 8. Partial modification of a professional qualification of the professional family graphic arts, established by Royal Decree 889/2011, 24 June, whereby the national catalogue of professional qualifications, is complemented by the establishment of certain professional qualifications corresponding to the graphic arts professionals families, trade and Marketing.

Pursuant to the sole additional provision of Royal Decree 889/2011, 24 June, proceeds to update the professional qualification whose specifications are contained in annex DCXXX of the aforementioned Royal Decree: professional qualifications amending established as «annex DCXXX: artistic silkscreen» respectively, replacing the unit's competition «UC0687_2: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work» and the associated training module «MF0687_2 «: Techniques of expression for graphic work» by the competition unit «UC0687_2: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work» and associated training module «MF0687_2: techniques of expression for graphic work» corresponding to annex IV «chalcographic and xylographic engraving. Level 2. ARG216_2» of this order.

First final provision. Skill-related title.

This order is issued by virtue of the powers which attributes to the State the article 149.1.1. 2nd and 30th of the Constitution, on regulation of the basic conditions that guarantee the equality of all Spaniards in the exercise of rights and in the fulfilment of the constitutional duties, and for the regulation of the conditions of procurement, issuance and recognition of academic and professional qualifications.

Second final provision. Entry into force.

This ministerial order shall enter into force the day following its publication in the "Official Gazette".

Madrid, 23 July 2015.-the Vice-President of the Government and Minister of the Presidency, Soraya Sáenz de Santamaría Antón.

Annex I professional qualification: Family professional Offset printing: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG072_2 general competence make printing by the offset procedure, preparing and adjusting elements of the printing process and the raw materials needed, according to established productivity and quality, and intervening in the graphic process, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Units of competency




UC0200_2: Operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0201_2: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing UC0202_2: determine and adjust the printing process elements offset UC0203_2: make printing offset environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the area of offset printing in graphic companies both to spread printing as to printing to coil on all types of media irrespective of its legal form, and entities in public or private, small, medium and large nature usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. May have occasionally people to your cargo or be head of team. In the development of the activity Professional is apply the principles of accessibility universal in accordance with the regulations applicable.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and transformed from national or international scope that print publishing products for the offset system, advertising, labels, periodicals, containers and packaging, and others, and in any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs of work relevant them terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs of work is used with character generic and all-inclusive of women and men.

Operators of machine offset, in general: machine offset sheet and machine offset coil operators of machine offset of small format operators of machine printer offset Machinists of offset to two or more colors Machinists of offset to an only color Machinists of machines for print forms in paper continuous training associated (540 hours) modules training MF0200_2: processes in arts graphic (120 hours) MF0201_2 : Materials and products in printing (120 hours) MF0202_2: preparation of the printing offset (90 hours) MF0203_2: printing offset (210 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process graphic in conditions of safety, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: determine them features of them products graphics to establish the process of manufacturing suitable taking into account the items available and the applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 graphics products are identified from data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to stated technical specifications.

CR 1.2 the graphics to carry out product specifications are valued by identifying its typology and its communicative and functional characteristics - use of the product and applicable regulations.

CR 1.3 graphic to make product functional and technological relations are established according to its component elements: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

1.4 CR phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: prepress, printing bookbinding and finishing, are established from your specifications, by entering data in the workflow.

2 PR: Make the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphic product, in accordance with established specifications.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

2.3 CR parameters and elements of manufacture of the graphic product in different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 the environment productive in each an of the phases of the process graphic is determined starting from them specifications technical established.

CR 2.5 the follow-up of the process graphic is done through flows of work facilitating the planning, automation, them procedures and others factors that affect to the environment of the production.

CR 2.6 them incidents that arise in the process is recorded in the flow of work following the procedures established to take them measures corrective and preventive necessary.

RP 3: verify the parameters of quality in the process through equipment specific to get the product with them standards established.

CR 3.1 them features of quality more significant in each an of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and attributes established.

CR 3.2 the product graphic in process is checks, verifying that meets them concepts fundamental of quality in them different phases of its manufacture according to the rules and standards established.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Flow of work. Desk of light standard. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Technical specifications of equipment. Manual of maintenance. The company's quality control plans.



2 competition unit: Prepare the materials premiums and products intermediate for the print level: 2 code: UC0201_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the technical data on the raw materials of printing from production orders to start the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

CR 1.1 production orders are reviewed checking containing necessary technical information in relation to quality and productivity of raw materials that are to be used in the printing process.

1.2 CR data on media, inks, forms printer, additives and others, are identified in the production order, making sure that they are compatible and that they conform to the needs of production.

CR 1.3 technical information from raw materials contrasts with the quality specifications defined for the printing process by checking its compatibility.

CR 1.4 the consistency of raw materials in the production order is checked with the elements of the process: machine, materials and methods.

2 RP: Review how printer to ensure their quality in the transfer, according to the established quality criteria.

CR offset, hollow, screen printing, flexography or other printer form 2.1, is ensuring that it corresponds with the specifications of the relevant production order checked.

CR 2.2 elements of the form printer reviewed ensuring the adequacy of its surface in terms of positioning, paths and measures specified.

CR 2.3 the form elements printer external to the image, such as marginal brands and others, are eliminated through the application of Correctors specific, preventing their passage to the support.

CR 2.4 possible defects in form printer that can alter the surface transfer are inspected and corrected according to established work processes.

3 RP: Prepare and control support to print to feed printing machine so as to ensure the continuity of the Chuck.

CR 3.1 the quantity and quality of support to print are verified according to their conformity with the production order.

CR 3.2 print support is transported from the warehouse to the machine following the safety rules laid down.

CR 3.3 support to print is being manipulated and conditions applying established methods of work so as to ensure correct entry and passage through the machine.

3.4 CR relative humidity and temperature of the support to print are checked through the use of hygrometers and thermometers according to the established work methods to ensure your entry and passage through the machine.


4 RP: Prepare the inks and additives in tones of standard and special colors for tonality according to specifications, samples and stands that they will be printed.

CR 4.1 ink is chosen taking into account the printing process, the machine, the kind of support and finish.

CR 4.2 physicochemical properties (viscosity, throw, rigidity) printing inks are adapted to the needs of production, through appropriate operations (mixing, addition of reducers, varnishes or oils).

CR 4.3 required appropriate tones are obtained by mixing different inks manually (spatula) or mechanical (Blender) color specifications in the production order.

CR 4.4 them tones of the inks obtained is checked of form visual or through devices of control, comparing them with the guide ' pantone', tables of color established and samples of color authorized.



Professional context: means of production: computers, reader of plates, control panel of normalized light, densitometer, colorimeter, linen testers.



Products and results: prepared print media. Forms printers hollow, offset, flexo, screen printing or other revised. Inks and additives selected and prepared.



Used or generated information: work order. Technical documentation of equipment and printing machines. Color charts. Authorized color swatches. 'Pantone' Guide. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Quality standards for the process.



UNIT of competency 3: Determine and adjust the elements of process of printing OFFSET level: 2 code: UC0202_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: Regular mechanisms of implementation underway in printing machine offset, following the technical instructions of production.

1.1 CR elements and mechanisms of the power system are checked to ensure its correspondence with the support to print, according to the technical requirements and the user manual.

CR 1.2 the correct operation of the machine is checks reviewing their elements and put up, correcting the anomalies by processes established.

CR 1.3 them elements and mechanisms of the system of output is verified to ensure its correspondence with the support to print and the printed to get according to the specifications technical and the manual of user.

CR 1.4 elements of drying and wetting, coil printing systems, are adjusted in accordance with the needs of the process and brackets.

CR 1.5 them operations of adjustment is made fulfilling the standards applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

RP 2: adjust the pressures of the set printer of the machine of printing offset according to the specifications technical.

CR 2.1 the correct transmission of them pressures of the machine of printing offset is controls adjusting the diameter of the cylinders, according to them specifications technical and the manual of user.

CR 2.2 separation between cylinders occurs taking into account the thickness of the support to be printed, according to the technical specifications laid down in the process.

CR 2.3 diameter cylinders plancha-caucho - printer is checked using specific measurement instruments: micrometer, durometer, gauge, gauges and measuring the aros-guia of cylinders or other rules.

CR 2.4 hikes are selected according to the thickness of them obtaining optimal, by rules of measurement of cylinder diameter and pressure.

CR 2.5 pressure adjustment checking is performed in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Make the set and tensing of the iron in the offset printing machine according to the established work methods.

3.1 CR die-cutting and bending of the plate is done adjusting it on the cutting table for later hosting on the pins of the machine.

CR the way 3.2 printer is fixed and adapts to the cylinder porta-planchas carrying out tension, according to the established work methods.

CR 3.3 the form printer is fixed in the jaws respecting them margins on the support to print, according to the specifications technical.

CR 3.4 form printer tightens according to specifications to obtain the registration of different colors.

CR 3.5 fixed operations and tensing as the printer are performed in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

4 RP: Prepare fields and the ink group regulating it according to technical specifications and quality.

CR 4.1 the ink levels adapting ink zones printers, using mechanical or electronic devices of the machine keeping controlled ink flow, according to the technical specifications.

CR 4.2 the ink can be adjusted until the ink flow to respond to the transfer conditions.

CR 4.3 the physicochemical characteristics of the ink are checked in relation to the Chuck by viscometer or other needs.

CR 4.4 elements dampening devices are calibrated, adjusting the temperature and proper dosage of the solution of wet according to technical specifications.

CR 4.5 wet solution: pH, conductivity, surface tension, and temperature is controlled according to the support to print needs and their physical characteristics, through the different device drivers.

CR 4.6 wet flow is controlled, checking the contribution of water according to the specific needs of the work to be done and the technical specifications laid down in the process.

CR 4.7 preparation activities are developed in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

RP 5: Adjust finish depending on the requirements of printing devices to get a final print according to established specifications.

CR 5.1 finishing devices are selected according to the process stated in the instructions of production to achieve the specified treatments: varnishing, laminating, lacquered and others.

CR 5.2 mechanisms of finished devices are arranged, placing them in line with the printing units to get the treatments specified according to the user manual.

CR 5.3 finishing devices are regulated by adjusting them to achieve a uniform application of the product: varnish, shellac and others on the media to try.

CR 5.4 setting operations are carried out in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

6 RP: Perform maintenance operations-level user on the offset machine, applying the maintenance and security of the company plan.

CR 6.1 the safety devices on the machine are reviewed by checking its correct operation following the established procedures.

CR 6.2 periodic greasing of willing greasing points is done using specific materials, according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine and the media.

CR 6.3 operation of the circuits and filters from air and water is verified according to established procedures.

CR 6.4 the operations of maintenance is performed applying the standards applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.



Context professional: means of production: machines of printing offset in flat or in coil, desk of light standard, densitometer, colorimeter, linen testers. Instruments of measurement: micrometer, durometer, caliber, strain and rules of measurement of them aros-guia of the cylinders or others. Plates offset. Table die cutting of plates. Equipment for application of products of finish on the support.



Products and results: mechanisms of start up of the machine offset regulated. Groups of inking and of mashed prepared. Devices of finished set and ready. Printing machine preventive maintenance performed.



Used or generated information: work order. Technical documentation of equipment and printing machines. Manual of the user. Rules applicable for prevention of risks labor and environmental. Standards of quality for the process.



UNIT of competition 4: perform the printing OFFSET level: 2 code: UC0203_2 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: get them first samples printed, performing it put up of them groups of printing offset for the checking of them features specified in the order of work.

CR 1.1 them spreads is recorded to the entrance of the body printer coordinating it in two directions (heels and brackets) and synchronizing the marker with the Guide side and with them clips of introduction of the specification.

CR 1.2 the amount of ink for the correct inking of it form printer is balances in relation to the support printed, through teams of measuring specific.

CR 1.3 printing machine is put in motion by adjusting each one of the bodies with the speed of optimum production and the required parameters for the process and ongoing graphic product.

CR 1.4 first printed sheets are controlled in sufficient quantity checking setting the record, tones and presence of defects by means of specific measuring equipment.


CR 1.5 the control is done supervising them stands-specification, coil-according to samples, patterns, tables standard, samples authorized, profiles of colour established and specifications.

CR 1.6 the printed sequentially obtained are checked, contrasting the samples obtained with tests of contract, according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.7 them first leaves printed toned and registered is fold, in its case, by the lines of folded checking the coherence with the layout and quality of the booklet resulting.

RP 2: adjust them variables of the process modifying them features according to the results of the first leaves printed for get them results established.

CR 2.1 the deviations of the printing in the record Cross and circumferential is correct acting in them heels and ahead of or delaying the cylinder portaplanchas.

2.2 CR pressure between rubber and printer cylinder is corrected according to the thickness of the support.

CR 2.3 ink flow is adjusted by regulating it through the dispensers of the Inkwell getting that consumption is required.

CR 2.4 tonal correction is performed by modifying the physicochemical characteristics of the ink or tonal.

CR 2.5 adjusting of parameters activities carried out in accordance with standards of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.

3 RP: Obtain the printed graphic product supervising the printing by the self-control process to ensure productivity and quality in the work order.

CR 3.1. Data for the self-check are identified in the instructions of production and working method established by the company, determining both the features to control and how to perform it and its periodicity.

CR 3.2 the self-control is performs along it pulled through it takes of samples according to the frequency established, confirming them results of printing that is are obtaining and ensuring the continuity of the Chuck.

CR 3.3 print registration and intonation (water-ink balance) are maintained, controlling the margins of tolerance in the parameters.

CR 3.4 the supply of those materials is controls ensuring the continuity of it pulled, obtaining the amount and quality established.

CR 3.5 established printing parameters are controlled by measuring ranges of control through optical measuring instruments specific (densitometer, spectrophotometer, colorimeter).

RP 4: Fill in the parts of production for the confirmation of the work carried out with data from incidents, quality and productivity.

CR 4.1 results of self-control are arranged in sheets in this respect for analysis according to the established rules.

CR 4.2 possible incidences of self-control are arranged in sheets in this respect for analysis according to the established rules.

CR 4.3 the parts of production is completed checking the specified productivity coincides with that obtained, recorded incidents where appropriate.

CR 4.4 the printing process data that are of interest to the successive processes of post press register in the parts of production indicating its features such as input, heel side and number of copies.

5 RP: Cleaning of the machine according to technical specifications complying with the applicable standards on labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 5.1 elements of machines are cleaned, guaranteeing the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance.

CR 5.2 the inkwells and ink batteries cleaned eliminating the remains of made printing ink using established procedures.

CR 5.3 form printer is removed from machine, proceeding to the cleaning of the cylinder porta-plancha, by applying established procedures.

CR 5.4 cylinder printer cleaned by removing the remains of the image, applying the procedure laid down.

CR 5.5 excess ink from the ink is stored according to the applicable regulations for waste disposal.

CR 5.6 them waste produced in the since of work during the Chuck is removed by applying them procedures established.



Professional context: means of production: coil or sheet offset printing machines. Control Panel of normalized light, densitometer, colorimeter, linen testers.



Products and results: printed or finished stand. Start-up of the machine offset. Clean and ready for the next printing offset printing machine. Quality control in process. Cleaning the effected machine.



Used or generated information: work order. Part of work. Technical documentation of equipment and machines from coil or sheet offset printing. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Quality standards for the process. Potential production incidents recorded.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Hatched.

-Profile of the characters.

-Mark or highlighted on the stand.

-Defects in printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finishing, describing and linking its main phases with machinery, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the functional characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify the structural characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 from samples of graphics products:-recognize its physico-chemical composition and identify their functional capacity.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-To assess the differences in color and the possibility of playing in the graphics system.

-Measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating readings on a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.


CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and concepts fundamental of control of quality in manufacturing in the industries of Arts graphic.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in the control of quality: densitometers, colorimeters, strips of control and devices of control in line of production, identifying its application in the different phases of the process graphic.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the most significant quality characteristics of products:-binding and manipulated: subjective evaluation, cutting marks, footprints, registration, glue-down signals.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Resistance to the rub.

-Printing: density, ' trapping', gain of stamping, balance of color, pasting, sliding, register.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition should be completed in an environment real of work: C1 concerning CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 concerning CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Comply with the procedures and standards internal of the company.

Keep an attitude assertive, empathetic and conciliatory with the others showing cordiality and kindness in the try.

Recognize the process productive of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of product graphics.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Models of standardization and of communication. Workflows.

Systems of prepress. Original classes. Image latent, process of development. Adaptation to the environment of flow of work digital.

Peripheral of entry, peripheral of output, software and hardware specific, processing and systems of testing.

Layout and Assembly. Mount items. Specific software.

Printing systems. Equipment, benefits, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each printing system.

Binding and processed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and its measuring nature of the light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of the vision.

Chromatic space.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Color theory. Additive and subtractive color synthesis.

Systems of representation of the color: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3. rules of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in processes of Arts graphic plans and standards of safety.

Regulations in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.



4. quality in the processes of Arts graphic trials, instruments and measurements more features.

Quality in prepress: dot gain, balance of greys and density.

Variables of printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, gain of stamping, balance of color and of gray).

Areas of control in the printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of the quality.



5. control of quality in arts graphics the quality in the manufacturing.

The control of quality. Concepts that are involved.

Elements of control.

Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.

Standards and standards relating to the process chart.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1. domain of them knowledge and the technical related with them operations of production in the process graphic in conditions of security, quality and productivity, that is be credited through an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 2 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top), engineering technical, architecture technical, diploma or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. competition teaching accredited in accordance with that established the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 2: materials and products in print level: 2 code: MF0201_2 associated with UC: prepare raw materials and intermediate products for printing duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of the raw materials used in printing processes.

CE1.1 recognize and describe the type and structure of paper, cardboard, plastics, metals and other supports for printing.

CE1.2 recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of brackets, expressing them in their corresponding units.

CE1.3 recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of inks, pigments, dyes, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents, expressing them in their corresponding units.

CE1.4 recognize and describe the main physical-chemical characteristics of forms printers: offset forms, forms of gravure, flexographic forms and others.

CE1.5 characterize the main defects and disorders of the various media used for printing.

CE1.6 starting from different samples of media, inks and forms printer, identify the main materials used for printing by its trade name.

C2: Assess the behavior of the main materials (products, inks, varnishes, plates and brackets) used in the different system of printing, relating them with your application.

CE2.1 describe the major pigments, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents used in the preparation of inks.

CE2.2 describe the main materials and chemicals used in the preparation of forms printers.

CE2.3 from different impression materials establish the relationship with the printing system, binding or used in the graphics process indicating the incidence of the number of copies of the print run.

CE2.4 relate the properties of materials with behaviors in printing requirements.

C3: Determine the characteristics of the variables of quality of raw materials, using appropriate instruments.

CE3.1 related to durability and behavior of the various media used in printing with the alterations that suffer them because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber and the composition of the paste.

CE3.2 relate the durability and performance of inks and chemicals used in printing with the alterations that they suffer, because of the temperature, humidity, oxidation, exposure to light and its composition.

CE3.3 differentiate the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of the raw materials.

CE3.4 in a practical course of material testing characterised by different supports printing, measurements to obtain the values of:-humidity, pressure, density, dimension of media, materials and raw materials variations.

-Use tools and measuring instruments (hygrometer, thermometer, balance of accuracy, viscometer, microscope, IGT) required in each case.

-Express the results of measurements in their corresponding units.


CE3.5 determining appropriate materials for the production of printed products in relation to standards of quality type.

C4: analyze the process of storage of the materials used in the processes of printing.

CE4.1 explain the systems of storage characteristic of the companies of printing: Offset, gravure, flexo, silkscreen and others.

CE4.2 explain the characteristics of equipment and means of load, trasportes and download of materials used, related with their applications.

CE4.3 relate the materials used in the process of printing with the procedures and conditions that requires their storage.

C5: prepare materials raw for the printing, according to needs of the process, applying the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

CE5.1 starting from a sheet of work and of some materials raw given: paper, ink, varnishes and others, check that them materials raw to treat coincide with them indicated in the specifications of the order of work.

CE5.2 describe them components and dilutions that there is that used in the preparation of products chemical for the printing.

CE5.3 in a so-called practical of preparation of materials raw for printing, starting from different inks and stands:-perform the packaging of them stands, according to the parameters established.

-Make them mixtures of inks adjusting the color, the density, viscosity and others to the needs of production raised, fulfilling them standards of prevention of risks labor and environmental required.

-Check that the preparation of the materials are suited to them results expected.

CE5.4 relate them materials employees in the processes of printing, with the normative environmental, considering them substitutes of them products used traditionally.

CE5.5 identify them risks and level of endangerment that assumes the handling of different materials and products employees in those processes of printing.

C6: analyze plans of prevention of risks labor and environmental and the corresponding normative applicable for use correctly media and teams of security in the transport and handling of materials raw for the printing.

CE6.1 relate and describe the rules on symbols and physical location of signals and alarms, fighting fires, safety in the transport and handling of raw materials and equipment.

CE6.2 describe the properties and uses of clothes and personal protective equipment used in the printing companies for the transport and handling of raw materials.

CE6.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of the safety in the transport and handling of raw materials, from a number of plans on prevention of occupational and environmental risks of companies of the sector of printing:-identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe the factors and situations of risk to the health and safety in the plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe appropriate preventive measures and established methods of prevention to avoid accidents.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 regarding CE5.3; C6 with respect to CE6.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Act with speed in situations problematic and not limit it to wait.



Contents: 1. stands of printing structure physicochemical of the composition of papers, cardboard, carton. Materials plant, plastics, metals.

Classification, identification and names commercial, formats and applications.

Properties more important of them stands of printing as subject material.

Measurement of weight, surface roughness, humidity relative, stability dimensional, hardness and flexibility.

Kinds of pasta for the stucco of them stands paper: paper, cardboard, carton.

Identification of defects in the stands.

Printability of the various stands.

Conditioning.

Preparation and application.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



2. inks, varnishes and lacquers composition physicochemistry of the inks.

Types of inks. Properties.

Measuring colour, viscosity, density, rigidity, transparency, tolerance between inks and capacity of emulsification with the water.

Classification according to the mode of printing.

Mix of ink (pantone). Preparation and application.

Types of varnishes. Classification.

Types of lacquers. Classification.

Identification, applications and commercial denominations.

Identification of defects. Resistance mechanical and different agents (light, water, fats, acids, alkalis and soaps).

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



3. form printer structure microscopic. Kinds of emulsions.

Chemical products.

Classification, identification, application, formats and names commercial.

Processing of materials sensitive.

Properties more important of those forms used in printing: resistance to the Chuck, tension surface.

Different forms printers according to the mode of printing.

Preparation and mixing of products for processing.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



4. transport, packaging, storage, transportation of materials from the factory to the printer.

Problems of transportation and packing the stands.

Storage conditions. Temperature, humidity.

Influence of storage in the Chuck.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



5. control of quality of raw materials control process: materials (media and inks), viscosity control, times of drying, resistant to rubbing and scratching of varnishes and lacquers.

Quality regulations. Commercial grades.

Equipment and instruments.

Inspection and reception procedures.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and intermediate products for printing, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: preparation of the printing OFFSET level: 2 code: MF0202_2 associated with UC: determine and adjust the printing process elements offset duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: identify and regulate offset mechanisms of maneuver and service machines for printing in terms of quality, productivity and safety.

CE1.1 identify the handles that allow you to calibrate the elements that form the teams (transmission, pressure) in offset printing machines.

Offset value adjustments required to adjust machine CE1.2 recognize mechanisms of manoeuvre on the offset printing conditions.

CE1.3 in a so-called practical preparation of operation mechanisms, characterized by a type printing machine and work instructions given:-perform functional maneuvers in correspondence to the type and format of the support to print correcting possible defects.

-Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the system of power and marker in function with the size and type of support.

-Adapt function mode of elements and mechanisms for exit and welcome to the support system of the Chuck.

CE1.4 perform all the operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C2: Determine the pressures between the cylinders of plancha-caucho - printer according to needs of the process.

CE2.1 identify the elements of the machine offset that Act on the pressure plancha-caucho.

CE2.2 determine the relationship between the brackets used in printing: paper, cardboard, plastic, metal, and other pressures on cylinders caucho-impresor.

CE2.3 in a practical course from a given material and preparation of cylinders:-check the diameter of the cylinders plancha-caucho - printer using specific measurement instruments: micrometer, durometer, gauge, gauges and measuring the aros-guia of cylinders or other rules.

-Adapt the increases necessary to adjust the diameter and pressure optimal between cylinders.


-Adjust pressure and light between cylinders, rubber and in relation to the type of support printer to print.

-Perform all operations in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C3: Carry out the operations necessary for the fixing of the form printer in offset printing machines.

CE3.1 describe the work sequences that characterize operations of mounting and fixing of the form printer in offset printing machines.

CE3.2 identify plates corresponding to each color in print to process jobs.

CE3.3 in a practical course of printing characterized by different plates to mount to a machine offset from a template:-make the necessary adjustments for the punching and bending of the iron for your accommodation in cloves as template.

-Place the iron in cylinder set and tension with adjustments to pre-registration.

-Perform all operations in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C4: regulate the balance ink with control of them teams of wet and inked according to needs of the Chuck.

CE4.1 recognize those elements of wet and inked in the machines of printing offset.

CE4.2 identify elements of regulation of water-ink in wet teams and machines offset ink.

CE4.3 determine the parameters of control of the solution of wet: pH, conductivity, tension surface and temperature, valuing its incidence in the regulation of the balance ink.

CE4.4 in a so-called practical of regulation of equipment of wet and of inked for a work type:-leveling them inkwells adapting them to the needs of the area image.

-Regulate the flow of ink in balance with the consumption and need color.

-Check the wet solution: pH, conductivity, surface tension and temperature.

-Regulate the flow of wet according to technical requirements.

C5: Determine surface finishes in brackets by the specific equipment in printing offset according to technical requirements.

CE5.1 describe the most common finishes applied to the printed media in the printing industry: varnished, lacquered and others.

CE5.2 prepare and position devices and mechanisms of finishing in offset from a defined technical specifications printing equipment.

CE5.3 in a practical course of application of finishes on various media including and starting with a few instructions:-Regular application of finished devices adjusting them to the needs of the original.

-Select teams finish according to requirements: varnished, lacquered or others.

-Regular mechanisms of finish for the treatments specified devices.

-Perform all operations in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C6: analyze plans of prevention of risks labor and environmental the corresponding regulations applicable for use correctly media and teams of security in it preparation and adjustment of them elements of the process of printing.

CE6.1 relate and describe the rules governing the operations of preparation and adjustment of the elements involved in printing.

CE6.2 describe the properties and uses of clothes and personal protective equipment used in the printing industry for the preparation of the printing process.

CE6.3 in a practical course of the safety assessment in the preparation of printing equipment, from a number of industry labor and environmental risk prevention plans:-identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe the factors and situations of risk to the health and safety in the plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe appropriate preventive measures and established methods of prevention to avoid accidents.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 on CE3.3; C4 on CE4.4; C5 regarding CE5.3; C6 with respect to CE6.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Convey information with clarity, in an orderly manner, structured, clear and precise respecting the channels established in the organization.

Get used to the pace of work of the organization.



Contents: 1. printing printing process. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Printing machines. Types.

Specification machines. Features.

Winding machines. Features.

Other machines.

Main parts. Features. Structures. Types.

Security equipments.

Organization and scheduling.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2. preparation of equipment for feeder unit printing.

Marker device, transport and spreads or coil output.

Parts. Mechanisms. Regulation.

Measuring devices.

The regulation of machine problems. Solutions.

Control panel. Parts. Regulation.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. adjust printer ink bodies and wet body. Cylinders. Finishes. Developments. Pressures. Correction of registration.

Ink group. Kinds of ink. Rolls battery. Regulation. Ink control. Pressures. Cleaning.

Group humidifier. Wet solution. Wet systems. Rolls battery. Control. Regulation. Ink/water balance. Cleaning.

Form printer. Preparation. Fixing. Regulation. Treatment and conservation.

Mantilla of rubber. Manufacturing. Mounting. Treatment and conservation.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the determination and adjustment of the elements of process of offset printing, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 4: printing OFFSET level: 2 code: MF0203_2 associated with UC: make printing offset duration: 210 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: perform the operations for setting up main machines and offset printing equipment.

CE1.1 describe the mechanisms for registration of the statement at the entrance of the body print in offset printing machines.

CE1.2 describe and relate the mechanisms of power, support, transport, and output in a printing machine offset specifications.

CE1.3 analyze the operations of regulation necessary to offset Chuck:-pressure between cylinders.

-Inking roller pressure / wetters.

-Parallelism of the inking rollers / wetters.

-Proper loading of inking / wet depending on the type of paper, used machines and the work that needs to be printed.

CE1.4 identify the main methods of verification of the regulations:-focused as the printer.

-Circumferential register / axial.

-Marking of the support (leaf).

-Inked, wet batteries, mechanisms of pressure and coating cylinders according to the manufacturer's specifications.

CE1.5 in a so-called practical of home of the printing and starting from an order of work conveniently characterized check them mechanisms of:-die-cut, folded, placement, registration and tension of the form printer.

-Device marker (head of power, elements of the table of mark, heels of height and side).

-System of transport and exit (pliers and square).

-Battery of inking conventional and automatic, pipeline mechanical, InkWell to control remote, system of wet conventional and alcohol.

-Pressure of the cylinders (iron, rubber, printer) and their coatings.

C2: operate with them main machines of printing offset, to perform the Chuck and get the quality required.

CE2.1 identify the correct placement of the materials in the machines of printing offset, in order get them results and times optimal.

CE2.2 describe them defects themselves of the system of printing and those relating to the registration, color and intonation.


CE2.3 in a so-called practical characterized by a process of printing offset type and starting from ones profiles of color established and of an original for its printing:-relate them causes and them effects of the reset of them parameters of the printed, by pressing (of form manual or through equipment computerized) on them elements mechanical of the record, the ink, the water, them pressures and regulations in the apparatus marked.

-Relate the print order of colors appropriate to the type of work.

-Compare a printed sign with the original and prepress (digital, chemical) tests, resetting the print parameters (pressure, intonation, register) to bring the results to tests.

-Obtain the final form with the required quality.

CE2.4 in a practical course of printing a graphic product, from different raw materials:-determine the correspondence between printing equipments and raw materials proposed.

-Set the speed optimum printing for Chuck, according to the parameters of the printed (ink density, trapping, gain of stamping print contrast).

-Identify the characteristic defects that are affected by the transport of the printed (repainting, resistance to rubbing and the scratched, and stiffness).

C3: Relate measurement of the quality of the process variables and printing products, using appropriate instruments.

CE3.1 describe the method and frequency of obtaining of samples printed over a pulled specified.

CE3.2 differentiate and describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for quality control.

CE3.3 in a so-called practical of control of quality of the printed and starting from different samples, perform the measurement of various parameters:-density, gain of stamping, contrast of printing, trapping, error of tone, content of gray, resistance to the rub, resistance to the light, printability of the support, displacement of the image.

-Additive of wet, temperature and percentage of alcohol, conductivity, and pH.

-Use suitable instruments in measuring and expressing the result of measurement in units and properly.

CE3.4 describe the influence of the illumination conditions (color temperature, lighting angle) of the colors of adjacent surfaces, of the characteristics of the surface of support (opacity, brightness, degree of smoothness, pressure and porosity) penetration and drying for the measurement of the color.

CE3.5 in a practical case of a process control of printing, from specific computers:-relate the different elements involved in a control strip with deviating from the required quality parameters.

-Identify and describe and, where appropriate, represent defects that need to be controlled during the print run.

-Use measurements required according to the parameters to control equipment.

-Relate the resulting charts of measurements (density, stamping gain, contrast print, trapping, error tone, grey content, displacement of the image, the degree of slip, rub resistance, resistance to light, printability of stand, pH, conductivity) with the parameters established in the so-called.

C4: Carry out maintenance in offset machines according to established procedures.

CE4.1 identify elements of the machine offset that should be kept.

CE4.2 differentiate and relate products and methods for cleaning of residual ink after each phase of the Chuck in the form printer, battery wet, inking, cylinder printer and rubber blanket.

CE4.3 in a practical course of maintenance of printing machines offset and starting from the given work tab:-perform the operations of first level (oiled, cleaning of dry grease, cleaning of dust from paper, anti set off dust, cleaning of the water tank), methodically following the manufacturer's instructions and observe the safety rules.

-Make methodically cleaning machine, observing the rules of protection of the environment and risk prevention.

-Relate products of cleaning machine with the relevant environmental regulations, whereas substitutes traditionally used products that adapt to this norm.

C5: Analyze labor and environmental risk prevention plans with the corresponding rules applicable to properly use safety equipment in the realization of offset printing and media.

CE5.1 relate and describe the rules concerning the cleanliness and order of the work environment.

CE5.2 describe the properties and uses of clothes and personal protective equipment used in the printing industry for the realization of printing.

CE5.3 identify and describe the rules to stop and the manipulation of offset printing machines and systems.

CE5.4 in a practical course for the evaluation of the safety in offset printing, starting from a certain number of plans of safety, security and environment of companies in the sector:-identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe the factors and situations of risk to the health and safety in the plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe appropriate preventive measures and established methods of prevention to avoid accidents.

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 on CE3.3 and CE3.5; C4 on CE4.3; C5 regarding CE5.4.

Other skills: responsibility is of the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Convey information with clarity, in an orderly manner, structured, clear and precise respecting the channels established in the organization.

Get used to the pace of work of the organization.



Contents: 1. implementation of machine operations offset setting up feed, registration support, transportation, and output.

Adjustments in the implementation.

Adjustment operations. Pressure between cylinders.

Inking roller pressure / wetters.

Parallelism of inking rollers / wetters.

Placement of the form printer. Perforations. Adjustment mechanisms.



2. the circulation of printed offset reset manual or electronic of mechanical elements of dosage (inked, wet, the ink transfer, image support registration).

Revision of the form. Resetting the parameters of the form.

Speed of the machine. Raw materials ratio and speed.

Defects in offset printing. Cause correction.



3. colour printing offset intonation and the printed color.

Print sequence.

Color mixing.

Verification of color in printed in relation to evidence of prepress.

Color measurement equipment.

Color profiles.



4. control of quality during Chuck programs and computer equipment for the monitoring of the quality of the printed. Applications.

Equipment for the control of the form. Structure. Features. Measurements.

Elements for control (control, side control, patch strips).

Criteria for the quality control of printed offset.

Conditions of measurement in process control: the color temperature. Lighting. Observation angle.

Process control on the form: register, density of mass, tonal value, gain of stamping, contrast print, trapping, error of tone, content in grey.

Control of the finished printed: behavior of ink over the bracket. Terms of printability of the support.

Guidelines for the inspection of the printed. Sampling. Reliability. Measurement.

Standards of quality of the printed in offset.



5. maintenance and cleaning of the machine offset operations of maintenance of first level.

Sequence of cleaning.

Chips of maintenance.

Lubricants (oils, fats).

Solvents (organic and inorganic).



6. Prevention of risks labor and environmental in printing offset factors and situations of risk.

Measures of protection.

Standards of security for the machines, facilities and materials.

Systems of prevention and protection of the environment.

Plans of prevention of risks labor and environmental in companies of printing offset.

Systems of emergency. Media and equipment of protection personal.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the offset printing, which will be using one of the following ways:


-Academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex II professional qualification: publishing professional family: graphic arts level: 3 code: ARG073_3 general competence do the planning and monitoring of the editorial production, managing and controlling the manufacture and quality of the product, taking into account the factors of cost and times from stated editorial specifications.



Competition UC0204_3 units: planning production starting from the analysis of the specifications of the original UC0205_3: control the quality of the product, from the editorial specifications UC0206_3: manage the graphic product environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the area of publication of editorial products: books, magazines and booklets, and others in print or digital editorial and graphic nature public or large private companies, medium or small, both by account or self-employed, irrespective of its legal form. You may have staff occasionally, seasonally or stable. In the development of the activity Professional is apply the principles of accessibility universal in accordance with the regulations applicable.



Sectors production is located in the sector productive publishing, industries graphic, and advertising that develop and edit products graphics and editorial in support paper and/or digital: books, advertising, magazines, material school and others and in any other sector that count with any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Technical in production publishing technical in control of quality responsible of the area of publications responsible of provisioning and contracting of services graphics training associated (540 hours) modules training MF0204_3: planning of the production publishing (210 hours) MF0205_3: management and control of the quality (180 hours) MF0206_3: management of the manufacturing of the product graphic (150 hours) unit of competition 1 : Plan the production starting from the analysis of them specifications of them original level: 3 code: UC0204_3 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: intervene in the definition of them products to perform, taking in has them plans publishing, them parts of the book and/or product publishing, determining them features technical, aesthetic and legal, and proposing improvements to facilitate the production.

CR 1.1 them proposed technical for the manufacturing of the product publishing: systems of printing, number of colors, type of document, number of pages and others, is made looking for the balance between quality and cost.

CR 1.2 works formats are proposed based on the collections criteria or criteria established by the client, taking into account the standard sizes, according to regulations of applicable quality paper and printing machines.

CR 1.3 parts of the book or publishing product are established according to aesthetic criteria more appropriate to the nature of the work: fonts, images, boxes, and others.

CR 1.4 the legal aspects of the issue: ISBN, Copyright, legal deposit, loans and others are recorded in the corresponding pages according to standards of the Publisher.

CR 1.5 technical characteristics of the product are set out looking for the optimization of raw materials, describing them accurately in terms of measurements, weight, finishes and resistances.

CR 1.6 characteristics of the texts of the publishing work: styles, families, and others intend to conform to the established design and content of the publication.

CR 1.7 features images of the publishing work: correct techniques, definition, resolution, file format, availability and measures are proposed, according to the needs of reproduction.

1.8 CR phases and postpress operations: peliculados, manipulated and binding of books or magazines are established in accordance with the requirements of the product and editorial needs.

2 RP: Request offers from materials and services linked with the manufacture of the editorial product in accordance with the required technical specifications, achieving the best relation quality / price.

CR 2.1 market prospecting is carried out taking into account the evolution, certification, and compliance with necessary technical specifications of realization by providers of products and services of prepress, printing and postpress.

CR 2.2 them offers received for the purchase of materials or contracting of services is in accordance to them features technical chosen and to them deadlines of delivery required.

CR 2.3 technical information received is checked with that offer manufacturers of machinery and products, technical journals and specialized fairs.

CR 2.4 suppliers are selected according to economic criteria and quality.

3 RP: The budget of the editorial product, marking the various phases of production to control costs, using computer applications.

CR 3.1 phases and variables of production involved in the budget are recorded by facilitating the monitoring and control of data.

CR 3.2 technical information materials and production phases is identified by considering the technical characteristics of the product and required deadlines.

CR 3.3 prepress costs are valued according to the terms of delivery, size, number of images and color, type of testing and delivery formats.

CR 3.4 printing costs are valued according to deadlines, size of print, number of copies, number of inks, plates changes (or other printer) and amount of reams.

CR 3.5 post printing costs are valued according to the terms of delivery, number of sheets, binding type, manipulated, peliculados and packaging.

CR 3.6 the cost of raw materials is determined by calculating the used paper, waste or storage, among others, and from consultations or using rates agreed upon with suppliers.

CR 3.7 variable and fixed costs of different production processes are determined by assessing the various items that make it up.

3.8 CR calculations and the presentation of the budget are made using the specific software.

RP 4: Schedule and plan obtaining the publishing product, in accordance with the requirements to meet deadlines and using computer applications.

CR 4.1 presentation of the programming of the work is performed by using the most suitable diagrams.

CR 4.2 any incidents that may arise in the production process are considered in programming, considering their impact on the development of the issue.

CR 4.3 programming and planning of the reproduction of the editorial product is made to conform to the characteristics and nature of the same.

CR 4.4 productive phases of pre-press, printing and postpress are determined with a calculation of the necessary time for its realization with expected costs.

CR 4.5 programming control is done by obtaining intermediate tests between the phases.

CR 4.6 the critical points of the process of reproduction of the editorial product are determined, assessing the margins of receipt of materials, terms of delivery, complexity of the process and others.

CR 4.7 the number of units to re-edit and reprint is evaluated starting from the management and the follow-up of the product stored in stock.



Context professional: means of production: equipment of measurement: testers, densitometer. Computer equipment. Software: treatment of texts, images and layout. Specific programming software. Software of budgets. Software specific for evaluation of exemplary and of replacement intelligent of material in stock. Testing digital. Samples of the materials raw.



Products and results: programming and planning of the product publishing made. Incidents and data of quality estimates. Characteristics of products publishers such as books, newspapers, magazines, brochures, 'displays', drop-down, envelopes, inserts, 'flyers' and others, established. Multimedia devices. Offers materials and services requested and valued. Budget.



Used or generated information: information provided by the customer and the supplier. Applicable quality standards. Technical data sheets. Certification of suppliers. Publishing plans. Study of offers. Rules on copyright, legal deposit and others. Rates. Manufacturing orders. Production sheets. Specifications for quality control. Prepress proofs. Samples of the printed product. Models. Outline of the work to play. Book of style. Corporate identity manual. Catalogue of types. With applicable rules of prevention of occupational hazards and the environment.




Unit 2 competition: Control the quality of the product, starting from the specifications editorial level: 3 code: UC0205_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: marking criteria for the fonts to be used in the composition of the texts in order to achieve the required quality.

CR 1.1 the text of the editorial work styles are specified by looking for consistency with the work according to the criteria of the book's editorial style.

CR 1.2 paragraphs, line spacing, partitions, streets, widowed lines or orphan control, applying the book's editorial style and harmonizing the composition.

CR 1.3 Edition macro-tipograficos and micro-typographic elements are defined to valuing to maintain harmony in the composition with respect to each of the elements that compose the editorial product.

CR 1.4 publishing data on format of the work, text, images and other parameters are recorded according to the guidelines of the company's quality manual.

2 RP: Set the parameters required for the creation of files, color proofing and characteristics of images, according to the system of printing to use.

CR 2.1 product quality parameters are set according to the characteristics of the printing system used in the reproduction.

CR 2.2 resolution, size and format of the images are reviewed by checking that they are suited for the editing system to use.

CR 2.3 the system of obtaining and capture of images (cameras, scanners and image banks) are selected according to the quality of the work to edit.

CR 2.4 retouching of images is set indicating if it is photomontage, removal of objects, color adjustments, and other treatments, making sure to keep aesthetic harmony with the original and respecting his authorship.

CR 2.5 parameters frequency and angulatura of the images are checked by watching them on screen in all colors, in order to avoid defects in printing.

CR 2.6 color tests are controlled by checking with equipment and materials that ensure consistency and reliability which are made from the delivered files.

CR 2.7 delivered files formats are checked by appreciating that they correspond to the requested, are compatible and are recorded in the specified computer storage media.

3 RP: Control parameters of collating, assessing the technical and aesthetic aspects for the adaptation to work and their subsequent use.

CR 3.1 the work pages are checked by appreciating that they are balanced in the aesthetics and style and that they follow the line indicated on the book of style checking that they maintain a correct harmony of the elements that shape them.

CR 3.2 the architecture of the page (boxes, white) is reviewed by checking that it maintains the same style as the other elements that make up the work.

CR 3.3 the colors defined in the work is checked by valuing that they remain homogeneous for all members and linked files.

CR 3.4 collating is evaluated by checking the diazo paper, plotter or other tests.

4 RP: Establish and check the characteristics of the paper or other raw materials, searching their suitability with the editorial product to perform.

CR 4.1 them features of the materials raw is set depending on the specifications technical of the product publishing and of the evolution and certification of them suppliers.

CR 4.2 the weight, the caliber, the surface, the bleaching and the wettability of the paper is checked using them equipment specific and following them protocols of control of quality established.

CR 4.3 surface finish (Matt coated, glossy, smooth, embossed coated) paper checks in comparison with samples proposed for editing.

CR 4.4 the control of quality of the inks and solvents is performs applying them tests of essay physico-chemical established in them standards of quality and fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

CR 4.5 them materials raw of them manipulated and stands different is check verifying that respond to them features preset, fulfilling the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

RP 5: mark and control them points key of it printing, through the assessment of tests for the detection of defects and ensure the quality in the reproduction.

CR 5.1 the supervision of Chuck is done verifying the adequacy of the inks and used support following the procedures set forth in the applicable quality standards.

CR 5.2 the systematic taking of samples is done visually appreciating certain printing errors such as repainting, gain point or registry errors and others.

CR 5.3 printing errors (repainting, dot gain or registry errors and others) are checked visually, with spectrophotometer or linen according to the system of quality control of the company.

CR 5.4 printed sampling is performed in the manner and frequency required by the established procedure of quality.

CR 5.5 the density of the control strips are checked precisely using specific measuring equipment: densitometers, spectrophotometers, testers and others.

6 RP: Mark and control the key points of the operations of postpress, through the evaluation of tests for the detection of defects and ensure quality in the finish.

CR 6.1 monitoring of processes of binding is done checking on samples agreed with the company that the operations of guillotined, bend, lift, embuchado, stapling, stitching or milling is carried out in accordance with established quality manual and carried out instructions.

CR 6.2 the embossed, peliculado and others finishes of the product publishing is checks considering them features of gloss or Matt, smoothness or embossed of the product publishing and the absence of tensions deformadoras, wrinkles or bags of air or any another imperfection.

6.3 CR operations creasing, die cutting and clearing made in the editorial product is checked to appreciating that they are sharp and accurate and that they comply with the requirements.

CR 6.4 the handling, preparation of complexes, corrugated cardboard, extruded, or any other treatment that requires the work are reviewed from checking for the correct compliance with the pre-established specifications.

CR 6.5 the systematic taking of samples is performed in the manner and frequency set in the procedure of quality applicable to observe the quality of the finished product parameters.



Professional context: means of production: measuring equipment: hygrometer, pH meter, scale, and others. Viewers. Light tables. Plotter. Quality control programs. Computer equipment. Software: treatment of texts, images and layout, image banks. Photosensitive paper. Forms printers: plates, cylinders, screens and cliches. Inks and solvents. Print media: paper and non-paper. Cardboards, glue, varnish, solvent.



Products and results: criteria for fonts marked. Set parameters for the creation of files, color proofing and features of the images. Controlled layout parameters. Characteristics of controlled commodities. Applicable quality standards.



Used or generated information: information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Technical data sheets. Specifications for quality control. Samples of the printed product. Book of style. Quality testing. Specifications of the printing system. Catalogue of types. Documentation technique. «Pantone» and color to process color charts. Quality of the company or manual procedure manual. Standards for suppliers. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 3 competition: Manage the manufacture of the product graph level: 3 code: UC0206_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: hire and supervise processes of prepress, in accordance with the publishing plans, in order to achieve the levels of production and quality.

CR 1.1 prepress companies hiring is done according to the criteria of quality, cost and schedule planning compliance.

1.2 CR images, texts to be reproduced and the layout of the work are established with the prepress company establishing the quality, cost and completion schedules, according the type of intermediate control.

CR 1.3 plates for offset, or other printers are reviewed in the company checking that they comply with the quality, costs and schedules established, checking its quality in comparison with tests conducted from the supplied digital files.

CR 1.4 incidents produced, in his case, during the prepress process are corrected and are recorded allowing adequate compliance with the parameters provided for in the planning.

2 RP: Hire and supervise printing processes in order to achieve the levels of production and quality.

CR 2.1 it recruitment of them companies of printing is performed according to them criteria of quality, costs and compliance of calendar planned in the planning.


CR 2.2 incidents produced, in his case, during the printing process are corrected and are recorded allowing the proper fulfillment of quality, deadlines and costs provided for in the planning.

CR 2.3 compliance with the specifications by the companies select is checked, supervising signed print tests.

CR 2.4 schedules by company checks to operate respecting the times recommended in the proper use for the drying of inks and varnishes.

3 RP: Hire and supervise the processes of postpress, according to needs of the editorial product, in order to achieve the levels of production and quality.

CR 3.1 hiring companies or equipment for the postpress production is done, selecting those that meet the requirements required to guarantee the levels of quality, costs and schedules planning.

CR 3.2 stowage, sorting and transport of bound or manipulated work processes are reviewed by checking that they are following the requirements for receipt of materials set forth in the contract.

CR 3.3 incidents produced, in his case, during the process of postpress, are corrected and recorded allowing adequate compliance with the parameters provided for in the planning.

CR 3.4 collection of materials is monitored by checking is done according to established schedules, and needs to optimize its use.

4 RP: Hire and supervise commodity, according to requirements of the editorial product in order to achieve the levels of production and quality.

CR 4.1 recruitment of the providers of raw materials is done, selecting those that meet the requirements required to guarantee the levels of quality, costs and schedules planning.

CR 4.2 them processes of stowage, classification and transport of the materials raw is reviewed checking that is performed following the prescriptions of reception of materials established in the contract.

CR 4.3 characteristics of the role in the aspects of weight, gauge, wettability and superficiality, or others are reviewed by checking that they comply with those laid down for the product in the supply contract.

CR 4.4 materials collection is monitored by checking is done according to established schedules, and needs to optimize its use and that it is accompanied by the established quality specifications.



Context professional: means of production: equipment of measurement: calibers, hygrometer, pH meter, scale, and others. Viewers. Tables bright. Computer equipment. Processing of texts, images and layout software. Specific evaluation software copies and intelligent replacement of material in stock. Stands of printing: paper, cardboard, cardboard and plastic. Samples for the approval of the first sheet printed and control during the Chuck.



Products and results: recruitment of companies in prepress, printing and postpress made. Supervision of the process of elaboration of the editorial product in all processes. Contracting of suppliers of raw materials and the quality of the supervision. Leaves of incidents and quality data. Supervision of intermediate printing tests.



Used or generated information: information provided by the customer. Publishing plans. Study of offers. Manufacturing orders. Specifications for quality control. Samples of the printed product. Catalogue of types. Technical documentation. 'Pantone' and color to process color charts. Production software. Standards of quality. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



TRAINING module 1: planning the EDITORIAL level production: 3 code: MF0204_3 associated with UC: schedule production based on an analysis of the specifications of the original duration: 210 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the processes and methods used in procurement and purchasing raw materials operations.

CE1.1 determine the most common processes of procurement and purchasing raw materials in graphics and publishing processes.

CE1.2 analysis of a contract of purchase of raw materials type with respect to the content and the form.

CE1.3 in a practical course of procurement of materials, from supply of raw material data:-identify and graphically represent the minimum, maximum, and optimal stocks.

-Identify the sources of information available for the pursuit of the market of suppliers, products or raw materials that the company needs.

-Carry out a report on the method used for the request and evaluation of tenders.

C2: Analyze and specify the needs of a graphics product in terms of materials, texts, images, printing processes, finishing and binding.

CE2.1 analyze the design of books, newspapers, brochures, packaging and indicate the characteristics that determine its functional, communication and commercial values.

CE2.2 relate different types of graphics products with materials and processes to be used in its manufacture, especially according to the value for money.

CE2.3 noted the factors that are critical in defining each of them in different types of graphics products.

CE2.4 identify the type of standard of quality national or international to which to refer when specifying materials, processes, formats or tests.

CE2.5 verify and/or modify the technical characteristics of a graphic product, enabling the optimization of raw materials.

CE2.6 verify the integrity of the original received from the client or sent to supplier and that the technical features of texts, images, materials, method of printing and finishing are correct.

CE2.7 in a practical course of estimation of needs for the elaboration of a graphic product, from specifications and given samples:-determine the type of appropriate criteria for money Paper.

-Inspect the sample for the paper type.

-Determine the printing system suitable depending on the stand, volume of production, quality and price.

-Determine the necessary manufacturing operations.

-Detect critical points in the manufacturing process that usually tend to cause problems.

-Identify the most common fonts and determine which files of characters necessary evaluating the associated problems.

-Determine most suitable image format and quality.

-To assess the possibility of changes in the specification of the product that can improve the value for money.

C3: Rating graphics service offerings by referring to national or international standards in graphic arts and taking into account the legal and technical limitations of processes and businesses.

CE3.1 select suppliers for the request of offers based on information from manufacturers, machinery and products known by means of specialized publications.

CE3.2 use appropriate vocabulary to describe in writing features and formal elements of graphics products.

CE3.3 describe with the rules, procedures and documentation relating to intellectual property and editing:-copyright.

-Translations.

-Legal deposit and ISBN.

-Co-publication.

CE3.4 identify the standards or quality standards applicable to service contracts more relevant graphic arts.

CE3.5 in a practical course in which a Publisher intends to develop a complex book, from a few parameters:-indicate the originals to be delivered.

-Determine how your treatment must be marked.

-Present the report to their custom.

-Indicate how it would be established and formalizarían working relationships with various external suppliers in the entire process, from conception to sale.

C4: The budget of a graphic product from service offerings or prices of databases and own calculations.

CE4.1 identify concepts that should be taken into account to develop an estimated budget and select and apply appropriate type prices and indices.

CE4.2 consult catalogues and databases appropriate to obtain prices for materials and services.

CE4.3 broken into units of work making a graphic product for your measurement and valuation.

CE4.4 develop requests for supply of materials and other graphic services.

CE4.5 rating printing costs depending on terms of delivery, print size, number of inks, plates changes or other form printer and reams amount.

CE4.6 in a practical course of cost estimate of a graphic product, from the technical characteristics of the product:-ask for details and prices that are needed.

-Indicate all the originals to be delivered.

-Set printing system best suited to the type of product.

-Draw up a detailed budget.

-To determine the critical points in the editing process that may affect the cost.

C5: Develop schedules for the implementation of editorial projects, whereas the planning of the Edition.

CE5.1 identify the most common diagrams used in the programming of projects type.

CE5.2 in a practical course of planning a publishing project, from estimated dates:


-Determine the critical activities to complete the project on schedule, requesting to do so, if necessary, intermediate tests.

-Assign resources and costs to activities to plan outlays.

-Generate documentation for the monitoring of deadlines, costs and quality.

CE5.3 in a practical course of development of a graphic product necessary for a certain event in which are fixed content and product features and resources of all kinds for its development and manufacture:-make a bar chart, setting all the necessary work.

-Describe the critical points of the process for the purpose of programming.

-Indicate the activities that may be abbreviated, using alternative resources or increasing the set.

-Indicate the most common contingencies that may present and point out actions to correct them.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 regarding CE2.7; C3 on CE3.5; C4 on CE4.6; C5 respect to CE5.2 and CE5.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the fulfilment of the objectives and the work that develops.

Demonstrate a good make professional.

Complete the work according to criteria of fitness, speed, economy and efficiency.

Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Address to the customer with courtesy, respect and discretion.

Adapt to the Organization, its organisational and technological changes as well as new contexts or situations.



Contents: 1. the sector publishing on the environment next characterization of the sector and structure of the companies.

Structure and organizational forms according to size.

Macroeconomic indicators.

Range of products and services in the immediate surroundings.

Criteria of quality and cost for the selection of companies.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2 other books print and digital products.

Web publications.

Magazines and newspapers: weekly, monthly and other.

Books of style.

Aspects legal of the Edition: Depot legal, ISBN and others.



3. graphic processes basic transfer systems.

Continuous and cord fabric images.

Patterns, frequencies, resolution and levels of gray.

Analog and digital technologies.

Phases of the process: design, prepress, printing and postpress.

Machinery: types, sizes, capacities, prices and other specifications.

Comparative technical-economic.

Characterization of systems by the printed image.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Factors to consider in the composition of texts.

Major problems related to the layout and selection of types. Architecture of the page.



4 materials raw and graphic services paper and other media.

Formats.

Inks: types, properties.

Fields of application.

Specifications of use.

Applicable quality standards.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



5. elaboration of budgets introduction to the study of costs.

Costs according to their nature.

Cost of materials.

Cost of processes: pre-press, printing and postpress.

Fixed costs and variable costs.

Specific hardware and software.

Measurement of materials and estimate of time.

Forms of budgeting.

Application to different processes.

Orders of magnitude and index numbers.



6 request and selection of offers national and international standards of products, processes and quality in graphic arts.

Specification of materials, colors, finishes, tests, models and other processes.

Checking of «prefligt» originals.

Evidence of contract. Standards and criteria for implementation.

Legal aspects of procurement. Contract types and modalities for the award.

Intellectual property: texts and image rights.



7 planning and publishing projects introduction to planning and project management tools.

Planning of activities.

Resource planning.

Planning costs.

Planning according to quality and risks.

Identification of critical points.

Instruments of communication and tracking.

Optimization of the project for achievement of objectives.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to planning of production based on an analysis of the specifications of the original, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: management and CONTROL of the quality level: 3 code: MF0205_3 associated with UC: control the quality of the product, from the editorial specifications duration: 180 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: defining criteria for composition of texts and layout of the edition of an editorial product.

CE1.1 identify quality parameters in the preparation of texts such as line spacing, family, body, and others.

CE1.2 analyze the proper application of letter styles in a few printed type taking into account the editorial product and companies style manuals.

CE1.3 in a practical course of assessment of the composition of texts in an editorial product, starting from a given test: - assess the correct layout of texts - analyse paragraphs or leadings.

-Correct widows, orphans and others.

-Check the layout conforms to the characteristics of the product, the formats and further use.

C2: Analyze parameters relating to the creation and transfer of images during the capture, editing, filming of movie, plates or test generation.

CE2.1 determine whether the settings of capture devices based on the characteristics of the original and the system are correct destination.

CE2.2 check that some testing equipment have been properly calibrated and characterized, with corresponding color profiles, according to the recommendations of the manufacturer or of a national or international standard.

CE2.3 in a practical course of analysis of graphic elements, from an editing project and given tests:-control or set the correct resolution of the images based on the playback system.

-Check in the test the contrast in lights, shadows and midtones, gray balance and color balance.

-Check the correct color rendering of process colors, spot colors, memory or any other referenced in the sample in the test.

-Verify the absence of defects due to the retouching of images.

-Check the minimum density mass in film and the correct generation of point with transmission densitometer.

-Verify frequencies and angles of plot for each of the separations.

-Check the control of microlineas. Check geometry, edges and the tuning of the point.

-Check the compatibility of formats in the digital files.

C3: Analyze the characteristics of the raw materials used to obtain the products, using the required equipment.

CE3.1 assessing the quality of the raw materials through the data recorded in different quality with supplier companies contracts.

CE3.2 identify and value the labor and environmental risk prevention legislation concerning raw materials and waste in the process of publishing products reproducing.

CE3.3 in a case study for the evaluation of raw materials and from different media and measurement equipment:-recognize and characterize the structure of paper, cartons, cardboard, cardboard and other print media.

-Correctly handle tools or measuring instruments: balance of accuracy, microscope, hygrometer and others.

-Check the main characteristics and physical and chemical properties of media: hardness, roughness, grammage, moisture, whiteness, colour components and others, using the most appropriate measuring equipment in each case.

CE3.4 in a practical course of material testing from different media, inks, pigments and others:-prepare and manipulate with ability and skill equipment, instruments and test kits.

-To analyze the main characteristics and properties physicochemical inks, coatings, pigments, dyes, oils, solvents (shooting, viscosity, pH, transparency, drying, clarity, brightness, color, and others).


-Testing of physicochemical test complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C4: analyze the features of them processes of print making measurements on test standard.

CE4.1 check or specify the elements of control that allow ensuring the quality of the product.

CE4.2 determine the elements of control that should carry them tests to facilitate them measurements of control.

CE4.3 on a hard proof, measure or check printing standards:-contrast print visually and with densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer.

-Balance of gray visually or quantitatively.

-Color balance visually or quantitatively.

-Values colorimetric masses of primary, secondary and reference with spectrophotometer.

-Spectrophotometer or densitometer dot gain.

-Limits of tonal reproduction visually or with a densitometer.

-Absence of repainting, booted, spots, whiteheads or blackheads with linen.

-Registration with linen.

C5: Analyze the quality in the postpress process parameters: binding, peliculados, manipulated, and others, through the assessment of evidence.

CE5.1 identify them parameters that define the quality in the processes of binding: splitting, folded, elevation and others.

CE5.2 recognize the key checkpoints in manipulated such as embossing, cleft and other operations.

CE5.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of the quality of a process of postpress, starting from a given product:-identify product binding operations.

-Identify processing operations that has gone through in its production.

-Check the quality of each of the phases.

C6: Rating the implementation of a quality system to the manufacture of the editorial product, in relation to the applicable standards.

CE6.1 interpret a quality manual and procedure (inspection and testing) of a company type manual.

CE6.2 use different methods, equipment and instruments for manual or automatic sampling in the production process.

CE6.3 analyze the statistical control charts used to determine the quality of the process, interpreting trends and the stability of the process.

CE6.4 recognize the procedures of evaluation of the quality of supplies for the acceptance of lots, the agreed level of quality-related material.

CE6.5 recognize leading standards or standards of quality control of materials and processes.

CE6.6 determine or verify the degree of adjustment to European, national or international standards of materials, processes and procedures type.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 on CE3.3 and CE3.4; C4 on CE4.3; C5 regarding CE5.3.

Other capabilities suggest alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Use of time and effort in expanding knowledge and information for use in their work.

Sharing information with the team's work.

Adapt to the Organization, its organisational and technological changes as well as new contexts or situations.



Contents: 1. viewing nature of light.

Color spaces.

Color coordinates.

Standard observer.

Uniform color models.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Measurement of color. Densitometers, colorimeters, spectrophotometers.

Models of perception of the color.

Color difference measurement models.



2. control of the quality Control of raw materials. Films, plates, ink, stands.

Pictures of control.

Densitometry, Colorimetry and spectrophotometry.

The picture quality in the film. Standards and observations. Gain point, tune-up and contrast.

Behavior of the ink. Transfer. Monochromatic deviation. Error tone. Grayness. Adicionabilidad.



3 taxation testing Control test and printed. Print contrast. Limits of tonal reproduction. Gray balance. Color balance. Dot gain. Print contrast. Defects: registration, booted, repainting, staining, points or marks.

Applicable quality standards.

Quality finishes, manipulated and binding.

Estimate of the cost of quality.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



4. quality and productivity management. With rules.

Elements of quality assurance systems.

Functions and processes.

The factors that affect the quality. Causal diagrams.

Relationship with the quality control.

The company's quality manual.

Statistical and graphical techniques.



5. the problem of the color reproduction color management.

Components of management systems: profiles and color (cmm) management module.

Commercial management systems.

The problem of settings and workflows.

Phases of the implementation of a system of color management: calibration, characterization, profiles, use and verification.

Criteria for evaluating the performance of a color management system.

Rules on recommendations for the use of profiles in the color management systems.



6. original digital recommendations to the original creator.

Recommendations for the capture and image processing.

Recommendations for delivery, transmission and verification of files.

Verification of files ("preflight") software.

Recommendations for prepress.

Applicable quality standards.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the control of the quality of the product, from the publishing specifications, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: management of the manufacture of the product graph level: 3 code: MF0206_3 associated with UC: manage the graphic product duration: 150 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: identify the graphic process followed for the manufacture of an editorial product, as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing and postpress.

CE1.1 differentiate the different graphical industries according to the type of process, product and magnitude, related to economic factors, productivity and competitiveness taking into account technological evolution.

CE1.2 explain the main features of the processes and systems of prepress, printing and postpress, phases and operations with the type of machines, input/output products and materials.

CE1.3 check from the point of view of the design, the features of an editorial product type:-measures and formats.

-Fonts.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

CE1.4 indicate the originals to be delivered, for the production of an illustrated book type, how its treatment should be marked and write specifications for Commission work.

C2: analyze the structure organisational, functional and productive of them industries graphics.

CE2.1 relate and sequence them different phases of prepress, printing and postpress that have intervened in the manufacturing of a product graphic type and them functions linked to the processes of development.

CE2.2 starting from the documentation technical collected from of visits to companies, fairs, catalogs or magazines techniques, develop a report where is synthesize them aspects technical and of organization more relevant for the production.

CE2.3 in a so-called practical of development of different products graphic, starting from them specifications of the products given:-identify the type of company more appropriate for its reproduction.

-Describe the stages fundamental of a process of purchase of materials.

-Apply techniques of purchase.

-Verify the documentation associated to those orders.

C3: Determine the technical documentation required for launching and monitoring of an editorial product.

CE3.1 check graphics and diagrams employees in the study of methods, planning and programming (movements, tasks and times).

CE3.2 in a so-called of production graphics from some instructions given determine:-the sequence of work of the production.

-The materials needed and those products intermediate used.


-Equipment, machines and computer software.

-Human resources.

-Full and partial production times.

CE3.3 in a practical course of prepress from publishing to reproduce, verify product:-System of prepress which should be used.

-Type of photosensitive material.

-Dimensions of page margins, columns, typographic features.

– Modifications to the image.

-Filming and quality parameters.

-Test system.

-Completion times.

CE3.4 in a so-called practical of printing from the product publishing to play check:-System of printing that is going to use.

-Format of machine.

-Forms printers.

-Class (type, inside or cover, format, weight) and amount of support that there is that print (number of copies).

-Number of pages.

-Kind and amount of ink.

-Printing script.

-Quality parameters.

-The mass density.

-Print contrast.

-Trapping.

-Gain of stamping.

-Completion times.

CE3.5 in a so-called practical of postpress completed an order of work with those signs, abbreviations and codes used in postpress, by setting:-System of bound or manipulated.

-Method of consolidation.

-Number of copies.

-Materials to be used (cardboard, cardboard, polyethylene, among others).

-Completion times.

C4: Make the budgetary control and calculation of the deviations in manufacturing other products.

CE4.1 identify common causes that can cause the offset calculations budgeted in the reproduction of products publishing, due to materials, processes or others.

CE4.2 starting from a completely finished publishing product (magazine, books, brochures, labels, packaging) calculate quantities of materials that have been used in the production, taking into account:-amount of paper depending on the number of copies.

-Number of different inks and amount thereof.

-Type of bound and manipulated.

-Type of image processing.

-Type of tests performed.

CE4.3 in a practical course of setting a budget for a publishing work, from an estimated budget and some simulated data:-calculate the deviations.

-To analyze the causes of its appearance and the effects produced.

-Propose alternative solutions.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 CE3.2, CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 CE4.2 and CE4.3.

Other capabilities: demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to its activity.

Propose initiatives to improve results.

Communicate effectively with the right people at any given time, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Learn new concepts or procedures and use effectively the training using the knowledge acquired.

Use of time and effort in expanding knowledge and information for use in their work.

Sharing information with the team.



Contents: 1. management of the printing industry the company, models of societies. Historical evolution. Problems control programs.

The tax and labor systems.

Organization.

Evolution of the graphic sector.

It supply and demand.

Outsourcing of services.

The accounting of costs and budget control.

Classification of products of the printing industry.



2. basic stages in the graphics processing process information: prepress, printing and postpress.

Machines and production facilities: features, performance, typical provisions.

Flow of materials and products.

Evaluation of the times.

Maintenance: plans, organization, economic aspects.

Human resources.



3. control and monitoring of production planning and tracking.

Graphics production control.

Optimization techniques.

Control computer tools.



4. technical documentation generated in the manufacture of graphics and diagrams for planning and programming.

Workstreams.

Total and partial production times.

Registration of working parameters.

Registration of quality parameters.

Phases. Tasks. Sequences.



5 techniques and management of shopping shopping techniques. Types. Features.

Market prospecting.

Contracts with suppliers in accordance with the applicable quality standards.

Documentation associated with the management of shopping.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the management of the graphic product, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex III professional qualification: Ιmpresion digital professional family: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG151_2 general competence to interpret and manage digital information for its graphics processing and perform printing through digital technologies preparing and adjusting the elements of the process and the raw materials needed by intervening in the graphics processing in conditions of safety, quality and productivity established.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0482_2: interpret and manage digital information for the printing of digital product UC0483_2: prepare teams, set the parameters and perform digital printing environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the area of digital printing on all types of media in graphic enterprises communication and design, in States of nature, public or private, small, medium and large size and irrespective of their legal form, usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. You may have staff occasionally, seasonally or stable. In the development of the activity Professional is apply the principles of accessibility universal in accordance with the regulations applicable.



Sectors productive is located in the sector productive of industries graphics, manipulated and processed of field national or international that printed by the system digital products publishing, advertising, packaging and packaging and others, and in any other sector that count with any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs of work relevant them terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs of work is used with character generic and all-inclusive of women and men.

Preparers of premedia printers digital operators of systems digital technical of printing digital training associated (510 hours) modules training MF0200_2: processes in arts graphic (120 hours) MF0482_2: preparation of files for printing digital (120 hours) MF0483_2: printing with devices digital (270 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process graphic in conditions of safety, quality and productivity level : 2 code: UC0200_2 professional accomplishments and performance criteria: RP 1: determine the characteristics of the graphics products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the items available and the applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 them products graphics is identified starting from the data provided by them original, sketches and mock-ups, responding to them specifications technical established.

CR 1.2 the specifications on the product graphic to make is value identifying its typology and its features functional and communicative-use of the product, normative applicable and others-.

CR 1.3 them relations functional and technological of the product graphic to perform is established according to their elements components: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 the phases required for the reproduction of the product graphic: prepress, printing binding and finished, is set starting from their specifications, introducing them data in the flow of work.

RP 2: make the standardization of them parameters of production in them flows of work for each phase of the product graphic, in accordance with the specifications established.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.


CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

2.3 CR parameters and elements of manufacture of the graphic product in different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 the environment productive in each an of the phases of the process graphic is determined starting from them specifications technical established.

CR 2.5 the follow-up of the process graphic is done through flows of work facilitating the planning, automation, them procedures and others factors that affect to the environment of the production.

CR 2.6 them incidents that arise in the process is recorded in the flow of work following the procedures established to take them measures corrective and preventive necessary.

RP 3: verify the parameters of quality in the process through equipment specific to get the product with them standards established.

CR 3.1 them features of quality more significant in each an of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and attributes established.

CR 3.2 the product graphic in process is checks, verifying that meets them concepts fundamental of quality in them different phases of its manufacture according to the rules and standards established.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Flow of work. Desk of light standard. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Technical specifications of equipment. Manual of maintenance. The company's quality control plans.



Unit 2 competition: Interpret and manage the information DIGITAL required for the print of the product DIGITAL level: 2 code: UC0482_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: receive and check the digital information and technical specifications of the graphic product for their further processing, using appropriate software applications.

CR 1.1 digital files containing the information to be printed will receive, applying the rules laid down for the process.

CR 1.2 digital files containing the information to be printed are protected by making a backup copy of the file according to established procedures.

Received the contents of digital information and technical specifications 1.3 CR: posters, leaflets, boxes, and others checked by checking that they correspond to the work to perform.

CR 1.4 them files digital is treated, avoiding alter coincidentally their content.

1.5 CR digital information: fonts, images, and others, are checked by checking that it corresponds to the technical specifications of the work order.

1.6 CR data concerning dimensional specifications, tonal changes and characteristics of the image - resolution, frame, screen frequency and others - output formats suitable - TIFF, EPS, PDF, and others - are obtained from the production order by setting the parameters in relation to the characteristics of the process.

RP 2: Perform the treatment and correction of digital information for validation, using appropriate software applications.

CR 2.1 digital files are opened using specific software applications.

CR 2.2 computer format and image color model are selected according to the program of treatment to be used with technical specifications.

2.3 CR fonts and activation are valued, checking them by visual observation on screen.

CR 2.4 the location and characteristics of digital images: resolution, file format and color modes, are verified by visual observation methods or by contrast with hard proof, correcting them where appropriate according to the established specifications.

CR 2.5 database is nested in the document to print by using the right software depending on the printing of variable data specified by the customer.

CR 2.6 the imposition of work that require it are performed with digital documents specific to ensuring the married of the document to print face and back 'duplex' and the application of all specifications in terms of perforations, cutting lines and others.

CR 2.7 corrected digital files are saved by using specific software applications.

3 RP: Adjust all the elements involved in the process through specific software programmes to keep working within the established plans of quality parameters.

CR 3.1 teams capture and scanning parameters are introduced, adjust and regulate by means of specific software.

CR 3.2 the compatibility between programs computer is checked by a pre-chequeo, verifying that them files digital validated are compatible with the software of control and management of the device of printing.

CR 3.3 the system of catchment and digitization of images is calibrated, in accordance with the guidelines and patterns established.

CR 3.4 operating condition of the equipment, utensils, instruments and materials is maintained by the plan of established.

CR 3.5 them documents of process, control and maintenance employees are formalized according to the correct use of the terminology and lexicon specific.

RP 4: send the information digital to them devices of printing to start the printing, through the applications computer appropriate.

CR 4.1 final digital information is checked, opening the digital files validated, sending them to the tails of digital files to be printed, taking into account the software of control and management of the machine.

4.2 CR parameters and technical characteristics of the printed are entered into the system, according to the type of available printing technology.

CR 4.3 digital files are sent to the Rip of the printing device according to the requirements of the graphic product, using specific software applications.

CR 4.4 files digital print queues are controlled by the software of control and management of the output device ensuring a flow of work required.

RP 5: Control the digital system for optimal use, according to the established procedures.

CR 5.1 work in printing equipment activities are organized with criteria of effectiveness from the production order.

CR 5.2 data for calibration of the digital system are introduced using the required software.

CR 5.3 correction of digital system parameters are performed on specific programmes.

CR 5.4 the State and quality of operation of the system digital is checked by test, according to the plan of maintenance of the company.



Professional context: means of production: computers, capture and scanning equipment. Software text treatments. Image processing software. Layout software. Printers and test systems. Control strips. Plotter. Drives. Print servers.



Products and results: files received, optimized for your treatment or reproduction in digital printing. Digital information is treated. Documentation control and maintenance.



Used or generated information: technical documentation of equipment, manuals management of files, color management, customer's style book. User manuals. Work order. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 3 competition: Preparing teams, adjust the parameters and make the printing DIGITAL level: 2 code: UC0483_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare support print to feed the digital printing machine, in a way that it guarantees the continuity in the Chuck.


CR 1.1 cellulosic and not cellulosic brackets used in digital printing, are checked by verifying its physico-chemical structure and its characteristics in relation to the production order.

CR-1.2 the surface finish (matte, gloss, offset, and others) and the color of print support is checked, appreciating that they correspond to the specifications of the work.

1.3 CR the quantity and quality of support to print are verified by checking that it corresponds with the production order.

CR 1.4 the support to print is transports from the warehouse to the machine, following the protocols of the company and them standards of security established.

CR 1.5 to print support is handled and treated according to the established work methods, which ensure its entry and passage through the machine.

Stack 1.6 CR and conditions of stored stand are controlled regularly by applying the established control plan and checking its good condition according to the plans of the company's quality.

CR 1.7 print support is identified using appropriate signage, keeping their traceability through the process.

RP 2: Preparing the elements visualizantes: inks, toners and additives, to get ringtones and other physico-chemical characteristics according to the specifications, samples and stands that they will be printed.

CR 2.1 visualizantes elements - inks, toners and others - are chosen according to needs of the work, taking into account compatibility with the available technology, machine, the type of support and the finish.

CR 2.2 the physico-chemical properties of the elements visualizantes: density, conductivity and temperature, and others, are adapted to the needs of production, using the established methods and appropriate operations.

CR 2.3 the required colours are obtained by controlling responses densitometric and colorimetric images and strips of control, in accordance with established standards.

CR 2.4 visualizantes and additive elements are stored in a dry place and with the humidity-controlled, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Prepare equipment and regular implementation mechanisms in place for digital printing, according to technical orders, the work to be performed and the materials to be used.

3.1 device power system CR: brackets, rear bumper and transport elements are prepared manually adjusting them to support format to print.

CR 3.2 manual registration of the device elements are prepared by adjusting the material used according to the needs.

CR 3.3 the paper feed, the output and the elements of pressure are regulated by specific handlers adjusting them according to the characteristics of the work.

CR 3.4 them mechanisms of cutting of the material blades and pressure is adjusted, adapting them to the needs of the support to use.

CR 3.5 them deposits with elements visualizantes and additives are control, checking your level of form visual or through the software of management of the print, according to the plan of control established.

3.6 CR anomalies that arise during the starting up of the printing device: movements in bracket, mismatches in the amount of Ink/toner, and others, are corrected until reaching the required printing parameters.

CR 3.7 adjustments are made in accordance with applicable standards of prevention of occupational hazards and environments.

RP 4: obtain the product printed making it print digital according to the specifications established.

CR 4.1 the first leaves printed is reviewed checking: type of support, size, colors, and others, according to the characteristics specified in the order of production.

CR 4.2 the tones of the first printed sheets are controlled, checking the tones and the absence of defects.

CR 4.3 the process control is carried out observing defects in printing according to samples, patterns, standard tables and technical specifications.

CR 4.4 the process variables are changed, according to the assessment and the results of the first printed sheets.

CR 4.5 correction and adjustment are carried out acting on the elements and mechanisms of power, formation of image and colour correction of machine.

CR 4.6 correction and adjustment of materials is carried out, changing physicochemical characteristics of displays elements and manipulations of the support.

CR 4.7 modification of the chromatic values is done by choosing parameters preset in the software of the machine or acting on the color management system.

4.8 CR loss of intensity of the determining elements of the formation of images are controlled, making its change where appropriate.

RP 5: Control the quality in the process of using digital printing taking printed samples, by applying established methods.

CR 5.1 printed graphic product sampling is carried out periodically by applying the company's quality procedures.

CR 5.2 process quality control is carried out according to the method of work established, both in regard to features to control as the way of doing and its periodicity.

CR 5.3 display of samples is carried out under standard lighting conditions.

CR 5.4 control of quality of form parameters: intonation, adjust, and others, is carried out by visual observation in the control panel of normalized light and/or specific under standard lighting equipment.

CR 5.5 materials supply is controlled according to the established procedure ensuring one sufficient amount, to avoid unwanted mixtures and get a quality uniform during the print run.

CR 5.6 parameters of printing such as: hue, image adjustment, and others remain constant according to stated specifications using standard light mixer, the spectrophotometer and the testers.

6 RP: Make, where appropriate, simple manipulated online on compact digital printing equipment for the graphic product, according to the established specifications.

6.1 CR production data relating to the manipulated online on compact digital printing machine: folding, stapling, and others, are introduced into the control panels by adjusting the parameters according to the work instructions.

CR 6.2 process of married online printed pages is reviewed by checking that it conforms to the characteristics specified in the order of production.

CR 6.3 the folding line of printed pages process is reviewed by checking that it conforms to the characteristics specified in the order of production.

CR 6.4 the elevation of the document printed in compact digital printing equipment is controlled, checking the correct order of the pages, in relation to the foliation of the original and/or model.

CR 6.5 graphic document stapled binding is performed according to the specifications of the work.

CR 6.6 manipulated online process variables are modified according to the assessment and the results of the first printed copy to meet the specifications.

7 RP: Fill in the parts of production for the confirmation of the work carried out with data from incidents, quality and productivity.

CR 7.1 results of self-control are arranged in sheets of control in this regard stating the incident for its analysis.

CR 7.2 the parts of production is completed to verify the concordance between the specified productivity and obtained.

CR 7.3 the parts of production data is computationally, logged according to further analysis to perform.

8 RP: Perform cleaning and maintenance of first level checking security systems to keep digital printing machine to point according to established procedures.

CR 8.1 digital printing machine safety devices are reviewed by checking its correct operation, following established procedures.

CR 8.2 the periodic lubrication of the grease in the machine points is carried out following the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine and established procedures.

CR 8.3 operation of the circuits and filters is verified by carrying out specific checks, according to maintenance standards.

8.4 CR elements of machines must have the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance.

CR 8.5 accommodation of the contents of the visualizantes elements - inks, toners and others - are cleaned according to established procedures.

8.6 CR inks and surplus toners are stored according to the applicable regulations for waste disposal.



Professional context: means of production: digital printing, standard light mixer machine. Densitometer, colorimeter, pH, spectrophotometer, conductivity meter, readers of specifications.



Products and results: printed media: stationery, posters, jewellery boxes, advertising, ornamentation, books and editing in general. First maintenance level.



Used or generated information: order production, authorized samples, technical documentation of equipment and applicable labor and environmental risk prevention policy, digital printing machines. Standards and quality standards. Plan of maintenance preventive. Plan of control. Color charts.



MODULE training 1: processes in arts graphic level: 2 code: MF0200_2






Associated with UC: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Hatched.

-Profile of the characters.

-Mark or highlighted on the stand.

-Defects in printing.

-Number of past in machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finished, describing and relating their main phases with the machines, equipment, materials raw and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the features functional of them different products graphics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify those features structural of the different products graphics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 starting from some samples of products graphics:-recognize your composition physico-chemical and identify their capacity functional.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate the differences of color and its possibility of reproduction in the system graphic.

-Measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating readings on a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometers, colorimeters, strips from control and control on production line equipment, identifying its application in different phases of the graphic process.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the most significant quality characteristics of products:-binding and manipulated: subjective evaluation, cutting marks, footprints, registration, glue-down signals.

-Resistance to bending.

-Rub resistance.

-Print: density, 'trapping', stamping, color, with balance, gain, sliding.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: responsibility is of the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Maintaining an assertive attitude, empathic and conciliatory with others showing cordiality and kindness in the deal.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of graphics products.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Flow of work.

Prepress systems. Original classes. Latent image, development process. Adaptation to the environment of digital workflow.

Input devices, peripheral output, specific hardware, processors, software and test systems.

Layout and Assembly. Mount items. Specific software.

Printing systems. Equipment, benefits, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each printing system.

Binding and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and nature of light measurement.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic space.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Color theory. Additive and subtractive color synthesis.

Colour representation systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3 prevention regulations applicable labor and environmental risks in processes of graphics arts plans and safety standards.

Regulations in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.



4. quality in the processes of graphic arts trials, instruments and most characteristic measurements.

Quality in prepress: dot gain, balance of greys and density.

Variable printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain balance of color and grayscale).

Areas of control in printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of quality.



5 quality control in graphic arts quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control phases: reception of materials, processes and products.

Norms and standards related to the graphic process.



The training context parameters:






Spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: preparation of files for printing DIGITAL level: 2 code: MF0482_2 associated with UC: interpret and manage digital information necessary for printing of digital product duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: apply the required methods of reception of digital information, determining the right software for checking the content and technical specifications.

CE1.1 interpret the methods and standards used in digital printing original reception.

CE1.2 interpret methods and standards established for the protection of the information digital.

CE1.3 in a so-called practical of reception of files for your printing and starting from different sources typographic e images control:-the sources typographic, checking that are all and that not has no repeated.

-Image files: file names the same, avoid duplicate files, appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF and other, resolution, frame, frequency, mode and profiles color, no alpha channel, grayscale, line, bitonos.

-Them stands of storage of the information: CDs, DVDs, unit Zip, disk magneto-optical, floppy disks, disks hard external, between others.

CE1.4 Verify that the content of the files digital is corresponds with the specifications technical of the product graphic:-sources typographic and texts.

-Files of images: formats of file appropriate: TIFF, EPS, PDF and others, resolution, plot, frequency, mode and profiles of color, in scales of grey, of line, bitonos.

CE1.5 in a practical course of verification of digital originals, from a given technical specifications:-treat digital files using methods that do not affect its content.

-Compare visually the contents of digital files with technical specifications.

-Adapt the different characteristics of the images to the interpretation of the order of manufacture (appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF and other, resolution, frame, frequency, mode and profiles color in grayscale, line, bitonos).

C2: Determine digital data processing methods, using the software suitable to the needs of the process.

CE2.1 identify the equipment and specific software required to treat digital information graphic.

CE2.2 interpret the performance and characteristics of the equipment and computer programs from the interpretation of the technical documentation and user manuals.

CE2.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of software for displaying digital graphics files, starting a given technical specifications, choose the appropriate software that will allow us to assess, by contrast with the specs, fonts, correct location of images and its digital properties, for treatment and choice of corrective measures, if required:-Software for visualization of texts.

-Software for image viewing.

-Software for the visualization of the pages enhances.

-Software for the management of flows of work: pre-chequeo, RIPs, testing digital.

CE2.4 determine the causes that motivate deviations from the characteristics of digital images, in relation to the process followed, to take appropriate corrective measures that will allow us to obtain the quality specified in a given work order.

CE2.5 in a practical course of image processing for adjustment to the digital process, from different files:-identify the computer format and characteristics of color images to adapt to technical specifications, using the appropriate software.

-Establish appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF and others.

-Optimize the parameters of the image in relation to the needs of digital printing: resolution, frame, frequency, mode and color profiles, grayscale, line.

-Store the digital files optimized, using suitable software available which guarantees the inalterability of the contents.

C3: Rating software applications associated with various digital printing systems to send to print digital files, depending on the process requirements.

CE3.1 recognize the most appropriate software to the content of the digital archive for shipment to the digital printing machine.

CE3.2 in a practical simulation of preparing files to send to print to digital machine, from texts and images files:-select the appropriate software that will allow the opening of the digital files validated for the introduction of parameters and specifications in the digital printing system: software for word-processing software for image processing , software for layout, software to determine parameters of printing.

CE3.3 in a case study of the spooling of print, from a graphic to obtain product:-assess the constraints of the graphic to get product and workflow suitable according to the work to be carried out.

-Carry out the management of workflow control: PDF files, color management via ICC profiles, previous revision, standardisation, RIPs, digital proofing, output to digital printing machine.

-Use the software required in each case.

C4: Rating the various direct and indirect digital printing systems to optimize their use, in relation to the type of support to print and graphics to achieve, according to technical specifications product.

CE4.1 recognize and the operation of the digital printing systems according to the image transfer mode:-direct.

-Indirect.

-With impact.

-No impact.

CE4.2 relate current digital printing systems with different print support, and graphical products type.

CE4.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of different systems of digital printing, from given supports: - set the calibration of the digital system for brackets - relate the quality of printing of support them in different digital printing systems.

-Compare the relationship between visualizantes elements / types of support and determine the most suitable.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.5; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.5; C3 on CE3.3; C4 on CE4.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Get used to the pace of work of the company.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Adapt to the Organization, its organisational and technological changes as well as new contexts or situations.

Communicate is effectively with them people right in each moment, respecting them channels established in the organization.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.



Contents: 1. receiving files methods. Standards. Protection.

Image files: graphics formats in computer support, video compression, resolution, frames, frequency and color profiles.

Graphical tools.

Text files: fonts, formats of texts. Tools.

Of the information media.



2. treatment of information equipment: classes, types, features and performance.

Viewing files.

Software for image processing.

Software for word processing.

Software of taxation for the display of the layout.

Color management software.

Software for the management of flows of work.

Pre-chequeo, RIPs and testing digital. Types.

Queue for printing.



3. processes of printing digital classification. Operation.

Transfer of the image.

Elements visualizantes: inks, toners.

Stands: classes, nature and behavior.

Types of product graphics.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.




Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the interpretation and management of digital information for the printing of the digital product, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: printing with digital devices level: 2 code: MF0483_2 associated with UC: prepare teams, set the parameters and digital printing duration: 270 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of raw materials and auxiliary products in different laboratory practices, using appropriate instruments.

CE1.1 recognize and describe the characteristics of the structure of paper and non-paper media: paper, paperboard, cardboard, textile, metal, wood, glass, synthetic, acrylic, vinyl and other media.

CE1.2 recognize and describe the main characteristics and properties physical and chemical of the stands, expressing it in their units corresponding.

CE1.3 characterize the main defects and alterations of the various stands used in printing digital.

CE1.4 describe the major pigments, oils, solvents and varnishes related inks and toners.

CE1.5 relate the different elements visualizantes in relation to the support, systems of printing digital and processes of postpress.

CE1.6 relate the properties of those materials with the requirements of behaviors in them different processes.

CE1.7 perform trials in the laboratory of mixtures and conditioning of them materials raw, according to them parameters established respect to them normative force of security and environment, checking that the result is the planned through them instruments appropriate.

CE1.8 identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of the various materials and products used in digital printing.

C2: Rating, using appropriate measuring instruments, the variables of quality of raw materials - brackets and visualizantes elements - used in digital printing.

CE2.1 identify the physico-chemical properties of the different visualizantes elements used in digital printing.

CE2.2 relate the durability and performance of different products - stands and visualizantes elements - digital printing with the alterations that they suffer, because of: humidity, temperature, composition, oxidation, exposure to light and mechanical stress.

CE2.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of the quality of raw materials, from different measuring equipment:-measurements of support them with the appropriate instruments (hygrometer, balance of accuracy, densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer and others).

-Check visualizantes elements by viscometer, densitometer, thermometers, and other features.

-Assessing the quality of raw materials and express correctly the results of the measures.

-Determine the optimal conditions of storage for raw materials.

C3: Perform operations to start to point of major machines and digital printing equipment.

CE3.1 describe the different systems of printing digital direct and indirect that is used today.

CE3.2 describe different mechanisms for the formation of the image according to the machine type of digital printing.

CE3.3 describe and relate the mechanisms of power, support, transport, and output in different digital printing machines.

CE3.4 analyze the necessary adjustment operations to Chuck in digital printing, depending on the type of machine: electrostatic charge, sources of light, temperature, conductivity, and others.

CE3.5 recognize and define the structure and composition of the image drum and the different heads of different digital printing machines injection.

CE3.6 explain the different methods of checking and adjustment in digital printing machines, of:-light sources.

-Conductivity.

-Ink systems.

-Atmospheres of pressure.

-Erase unit.

-Cleaning unit.

-Temperature and pressure of the fastening systems.

CE3.7 in a practical setting of a so-called machine digital, from a work order characterized conveniently, regular mechanisms of:-device marker (head of power, elements of the mark table, heel height and side).

-System feedback, transport and reception.

-Ability to inking.

-Pressure cylinders and temperature for the set.

CE3.8 in a practical course of maintenance of digital machines, from the maintenance of the machine card:-identify the elements that should be kept.

-Define the maintenance plan first level appropriate for digital printing machine.

-Perform methodically maintenance: oiling, cleaning of dry grease, cleaning of dust from paper, toners, ink and oil tank cleaning powder, following the manufacturer's instructions.

-Make methodically cleaning the machine complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

-Relate products of cleaning machine with the relevant environmental regulations, whereas substitutes traditionally used products that adapt to this norm.

C4: Operate with leading digital printing machines to make Chuck and get the required quality.

CE4.1 identify how appropriate machines to provide the materials, in order to obtain results and optimal times.

CE4.2 describe own printing system defects and those relating to registration, color and intonation.

CE4.3 relate the characteristic defects that are affected by the transport of the form during a process of printing digital type: repaint, rub and scratch resistance.

CE4.4 in a so-called practical of adjustment of elements of machines of printing digital, starting from a work type to print:-relate the causes and them effects of the reset of the parameters of the printed.

-Operate manually or by means of computerized equipment, on the mechanical elements of the registry, inking, pressures and regulation of the feeding apparatus, adjusting them to the needs.

-Identify the print order of colors appropriate to the type of work.

CE4.5 in a practical course of digital printing, based on an original and pre-press tests:-get printed with the quality required in relation to the original.

-Compare the printed with prepress, digital or chemical tests, resetting the print parameters: pressure, intonation, register, to bring results to the tests.

-Related machines and raw materials used with the printing speed of Chuck, according to the parameters of the form: ink density, contrast print, trapping, gain of stamping.

C5: Related to the measurement of the quality of the process and products of digital printing variables using appropriate instruments.

CE5.1 describe the method and frequency of obtaining printed samples during a print run of digital printing type.

CE5.2 differentiate and describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for quality control in digital printing.

CE5.3 the measurement on sheets printed for various parameters such as density, gain of stamping, contrast print, trapping, error tone, content of gray, resistance to rubbing, resistance to light, printability of support, image, temperature and conductivity, using instruments appropriate and expressing the result of measurement units and appropriate way.

CE5.4 describe the influence of lighting (color temperature, lighting angle) conditions of the colors of adjacent surfaces, of the characteristics of the surface (opacity, brightness, smoothness and porosity level) support of the penetration and drying for the measurement of the color.

CE5.5 in a practical course of a process of measuring the variables of quality in digital printing, from a printed test:-relate the different elements involved in a control strip with deviating from the required quality parameters.

-Identify, describe and, where appropriate, represent defects that need to be controlled during the print run.

-Relate the resulting measurements graphics: density, gain of stamping, contrast print, trapping, error of tone, grey, displacement of the image content, grade slip, rub resistance, light resistance, printability of the bracket, pH, conductivity with the parameters established in the so-called.

-Identify the control devices must be used.


CE5.6 identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of the materials, products and equipment used in digital printing.

CE5.7 relate the products and materials used in printing with environmental regulations, whereas substitutes traditionally used products that adapt to this norm.

CE5.8 in a practical course of digital printing characterized by operations to be performed:-identify and describe the mechanisms of security printing machines: buttons stop, protections, housings, racks, as well as the means of protection and clothing that must be employed.

-Describe the conditions of safety in the operations of preparation and maintenance of machines use.

-Establish measures of safety and caution that must be taken, according to the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks and the specific instructions applicable to the various operations teams.

C6: Operate in the bodies of manipulated online on compact digital printing machines, checking the quality of the product.

CE6.1 identify the manipulated online that can complete a compact digital printing machine: folding, lump sum and others.

CE6.2 recognized through different catalogs of digital printing machines compact, manipulated benefits that currently comprise the compact machine groups.

CE6.3 in a practical course of manipulated online, from a compact digital printing machine and work instructions:-identify the manipulated should be taken from the instructions given.

-Insert the work parameter in the control panel.

-Check the process of elevation, loin, Stapling and others, according to the instructions of work.

C7: analyze plans of prevention of risks labor and environmental and the corresponding normative applicable for use correctly means, equipment and materials in the realization of the printing digital.

CE7.1 relate and describe the rules concerning the cleanliness and order of the work in digital printing environment.

CE7.2 describe the properties and uses of them clothes and equipment of protection personal more employees in the industry graphic for the realization of the printing digital.

CE7.3 identify and describe the rules for the stop and the manipulation of them systems and machines of printing digital.

CE7.4 relate them materials employees in printing digital with the regulatory environmental, considering them substitutes of the products used.

CE7.5 in a practical course for the evaluation of security in digital printing, starting from a certain number of industry labor and environmental risk prevention plans:-identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe the factors and situations of risk to the health and safety in the plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe appropriate preventive measures and established methods of prevention to avoid accidents.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.7; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 on CE3.7 and CE3.8; C4 CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 CE5.5 and CE5.8; C6 regarding CE6.3; C7 with respect to CE7.5.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Comply with the rules of proper production.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at any given time, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate a good make professional.



Contents: 1. processes of printing digital procedures of printing.

Types of technologies.

Operations. Control parameters.

Printing machines: sheet, coil and others.

Main parts: characteristics, structures and types.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Measures of protection.



2. preparation and commissioning of equipment for feeder unit digital printing.

Marker device, transport and spreads or coil output.

Parties: mechanisms and regulation.

Body printer: cylinders, liners and nozzles.

Ink group: types of ink, ink control and regulation.

Forms printers dynamic: coatings of cylinder image, manufacture, Assembly, treatment and conservation.

Measuring devices.

The regulation of machine problems. Solutions.

Safety rules for the machinery, equipment and materials.



3 brackets used in digital printing paper supports: cardboard, paper and others.

Not paper brackets: plastic, metal, fabric, wood, glass and others.

Control of materials. Defects and disorders.

Measuring equipment: hygrometer, precision scale and others.

Storage conditions.



4 elements visualizantes: inks, toner and other inks. Types. Features.

Toner. Types. Features.

Color mixing. Special colors.

Measuring equipment: viscometer, densitometer and others.

Oils. Solvents. Varnishes.

Storage conditions.



5. the Chuck of the printed in digital reset manual or electronic of the elements mechanical of dosage: inking and others.

Registration of the image on the support.

Review of the printed. Adjustment of the parameters of the printed.

Speed of the machine. Relationship matters raw and speed.

Defects in the print digital. Cause/correction.

Intonation and color of the form: sequence of printing and others.

Checking of the printed with evidence of prepress.

Factors and situations of risk.

Equipment of protection individual.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



6. control of quality during the Chuck programs and equipment computer for the monitoring of the quality of the printed. Applications.

Equipment for the control of the printed: structure, characteristics and measurements.

Elements for the control: strips of control, control side and areas of control.

Criteria that there is that follow in the control of quality of the printed digital, conditions in the process of control, temperature of the colour, lighting and angle of observation.

Process of control over the printed: register, density of the mass, value tonal, gain of stamping, contrast of printing, trapping, error of tone and content in grey.

Control of the finished printed: behavior of ink over the bracket.

Printability of stand conditions.

Guidelines for inspection of the printed: sampling, reliability and measurement.

The printed in digital quality standards.



7. compact machines. Manipulated online types of machines. Features.

Manipulated is working in line with digital printing.

Typology of product.

Control parameters.

In the process and the product quality.



8. maintenance of world-class operations.

Lubricants: oils, fats.

Sequence of digital printing equipment cleaning.

Solvents: organic and inorganic.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and protection environmental.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1. domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the preparation of them equipment, adjustment of parameters and realization of it printing digital, that is credited by an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex IV professional qualifications: engraved chalcographic and xylographic family professional: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG216_2 overall competition record dies in intaglio and engraving making or based on previous sketches and performing tests of State, to obtain prints intaglio or recessed, operating in conditions of safety and quality.



Competition UC0687_2 units: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work UC0688_2: woodcuts woodcut UC0689_2: woodcut to intaglio UC0690_2: stamp intaglio and relief environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the area of engraving and printing in workshops devoted to the creation of graphic work, in public or proprietary of large size enterprises , medium and small, both by has own or others and depending on in its case, functional or hierarchically of a superior. In the development of the activity Professional is apply the principles of accessibility universal in accordance with the regulations applicable.



Sectors production




It is located in the productive sector of graphic artistic activities in the sub-sector on the artistic engraving and printing establishment and any other sector that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Engravers etchings Xylographers stampers in chalcographic engraving and woodcut technical advisors on engraving recorders Printing engravers artistic etching Burin and etching recorders clichés of wooden training associate (480 hours) training modules MF0687_2: techniques of expression for graphic work (120 hours) MF0688_2: xylographic engraving (120 hours) MF0689_2: intaglio engraving (120 hours) MF0690_2: printing intaglio and relief (120 hours) unit of competition 1 : Develop and interpret sketches to work graphic level: 2 code: UC0687_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: select the techniques of graphic expression for studies and sketches by choosing the most appropriate to the techniques of engraving and stamping.

1.1 CR materials, useful and procedures of graphic expression for the realization of sketches are valued by determining the adequacy of its resources to those relating to the techniques of engraving and stamping.

1.2 CR materials, useful and procedures of graphic expression are selected according to their nature and qualities which provide as resources.

CR 1.3 graphic expression techniques are chosen based on their suitability for formal and expressive possibilities of the techniques of engraving and stamping.

RP 2: develop notes and studies previous to the sketch, following stages successive in the construction of the image to establish the structure compositional basic of the sketch.

CR 2.1 the grade of complexity and development of them sketches is set according to the features of them technical of engraving and stamping chosen.

CR 2.2 the sketches are drawn by pointing them the basic forms collected in lines and general masses.

CR 2.3 the format and dimensions of the work is established, taking in has the relationship between footprint and margins of the paper in the stamping that culminates the process.

CR 2.4 the structure compositional is sketches, as base of the construction of the image, establishing them centers of attention and the lines of force.

CR 2.5 them studies of them parts or aspects particular of it composition is performed according to the needs of greater deepening or detail in the elaboration of the sketch final.

3 RP: Perform the final sketch, completing the construction of the image, to make it serve as a model in the realization of matrices and its stamping process.

CR 3.1 the previous stages of the image are collected in the sketch by applying the dimensional and compositional results obtained in the sketches, notes, and previous studies.

CR 3.2 development of the sketch is performed using conventional or using graphical techniques equipment and specific software.

CR 3.3 construction of the image in the sketch is done using the point and the line by applying constructive, descriptive, expressive, gestural abilities or signicas and taking into account the resources of engraving and stamping techniques.

CR 3.4 color is applied in the sketch the relationships required between the chromatic and tonal values in the image according to the techniques of engraving and printing certain resources.

CR 3.5 different tones of the image are applied in the development of the sketch by frames or through spots according to the needs of established engraving and stamping techniques.

CR 3.6 retrieved sketch is adjusted, where appropriate, by making the required changes arising from the needs of process of engraving and stamping.

4 RP: Determine the Visual characteristics of the own or others sketches for graphic work, valuing its formal characteristics, meaning and style in relation to processes of engraving and stamping.

CR 4.1 are valued, own, preparatory sketches of graphic work, determining their characteristics material and formal and choosing materials, processes and techniques of engraving and printing to use more allied with those characteristics.

CR 4.2 them sketches outside, preparatory of the work graphic, is analyzed determining the contribution stylistic own of the author and/or the derivative of them different styles artistic applied.

CR 4.3 sketches are analyzed considering the grafico-plasticas proposals and significant content (sign, representative, conceptual or symbolic) in relation to the process of engraving and stamping.

CR 4.4 style expressed in the sketches identified evaluating the adequacy to the technique of engraving or stamping which is to be used, respecting it in the subsequent development of the graphic image.

CR 4.5 techniques and engraving and stamping processes determine, establishing the most consistent with the needs identified and defined from the formal assessment, meaning and style on the sketches.

RP 5: Obtain the graphic documents collecting color selection and investment of the original image respecting the formal and expressive features of the sketch.

CR 5.1 inversion of the sketches, in his case, is carried out by applying the required methods, such as photocopies mirror mode, reverse tracing and others, depending on the composition and structure of the graphic characteristics of the images, in relation to the graphic processes.

CR 5.2 the image transfer is done by applying the methods of tracing required, respecting the structure of the composition and formal values, meaning and expressive images.

CR 5.3 image transfer process is controlled by checking that the basic structure and other formal and expressive values of the image comply with the sketch.

CR 5.4 image color selection is done by applying the methods required in accordance with the nature of the images and certain engraving and stamping techniques so that is guaranteed registration of matrices and the printing order.



Professional context: means of production: Media: paper, cardboard and fabrics. Materials, supplies and tools for dry drawing techniques (graffiti, charcoals, pastels, crayons, pencils compounds and fatty); for wet drawing techniques (inks, markers and pens, pens, rods and brushes); for techniques of painting (watercolors, temperas, temples) water; and for strong, oily and mixed media painting techniques (encaustics, oils and acrylics). Equipment and specific software.



Products and results: graphic expression materials: graphite, charcoal, pastels, pencils, inks, watercolors and others, prepared. Notes, sketches, studies, and made sketches. Investment of the sketches. The selection of image color graphic documents.



Used or generated information: technical literature, catalogues and monographs of graphic works, catalogues and samples of graphic and plastic material.



Unit 2 competition: Recorded in WOODBLOCK level: 2 code: UC0688_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare the materials, tools and tools for the xylographic engraving by selecting the most suitable to engraving techniques and conducting appropriate tests to ensure its correct state that.

1.1 CR materials used: tacos, tables, and others are selected according to the different parameters that determine the size such as the type of wood, the cutting direction, defects in knots or cracks, or the qualities of the material to record: consistency, uniformity, hardness, degree of drying and others.

CR 1.2 the tacos tables and other materials are treated, through cutting operations, squaring, brushing or others, looking for the dimensions and finish required for carving and stamping work to develop.

1.3 CR tools to use: knives, gouges, chisels, chisels, gouges, and all those who may be necessary are selected according to the needs of the woodblock technique chosen.

CR 1.4 tools are prepared especially according to its edge or cutting, grinding, Beveling, sharpening and seated techniques.

CR 1.5 tooling for the correction of the wear of the tools are arranged by ordering them according to their shape, quality and user needs.

CR 1.6 the quality and adequacy of them materials used in them processes of engraving is control, before its use, in accordance with them results sought, performing them tests required for rating their features and adapt its use.

RP 2: perform the engraving xylographic applying them technical of cutting or notching to fiber or of engraving to grain using the tools specific and applying them measures of security required.

CR 2.1 the engraving is transfers to the iron through the tracing of them sketches on the surface prepared of the same so the image is displayed on the taco facilitating the work of court or of engraving.


CR 2.2 the cutting or notching to fiber, and/or the engraving to grain is carried out on the iron in accordance with the character and resources own of these technical according to them values formal and expressive wanted by the recorder or established in them sketches.

CR 2.3 them incisions in the taco and the grooves in the table is made attending to it structure (veins) and others features of it wood worked.

CR 2.4 the surface of the iron woodblock is works hewn the part corresponding to them white in the stamping and lowering with the depth required according to them methods of inked expected.

CR 2.5 xylographic engraving is developed taking into account the effects that during printing, can cause pressure and the inking of the xylographic relief, especially on details and fine entretallas.

CR 2.6 quality monitoring is carried out above all the process, according to the correct choice and use of techniques, paper and tools in accordance with the purposes of the recorder.

CR 2.7 of xylographic engraving operations by applying labor and environmental risk prevention measures required.

3 RP: Get the State tests that allow you to follow the development of the xylographic engraving using the procedures manual stamping or press.

CR 3.1 media and stamping processes conform to get test status and retest, so faithfully collect the work done on the grill.

CR 3.2 initial state tests are valued, checking their adaptation process and sought after weekends, making, where appropriate, modifications required on the plate.

CR 3.3 papers and inks are selected by carrying out trials of inking to find adequate to pick up the work of the matrix, depending on the characteristics of the image and the chosen methods of stamping, recording the data obtained from different samples.

CR 3.4 prior to stamping -.T.-definitive test is done including all the results of the previous processes, becoming a point of reference for rear Chuck.

CR 3.5 final state tests are valued checking that they respond faithfully to the work done on the plate, avoiding the use of any alien or additive effect to the work of the matrix in your stamping.



Context professional: means of production: Tacos and tables of wood or plates of other materials. Tools and woodworking tools: saws, brushes, sandpaper, and others. Tools and wood engraving tools: knives, gouges, chisels, chisels and gouges. Tools for sharpening and seated: whetstones, limes and other. Magnifying glasses and linen. Materials and equipment of printing: ink and its components, papers, contact strips and presses. Tools for the application of ink: Japanese brushes, brushes and rollers.



Products and results: materials for engraving: knives, gouges, chisels, chisels, and others prepared. Recorded at fiber xylographic matrices. Recorded at grain xylographic matrices. State tests.



Used or generated information: technical literature. Catalogues and monographs of woodcut. Evidence of status. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Information historical, Museum, contemporary and others through web pages specialised.



Unit 3 competition: Record in INTAGLIO level: 2 code: UC0689_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare the materials, tools and tools for chalcographic engraving by selecting the most suitable techniques and procedures of engraving and conducting appropriate tests to ensure its correct state that.

CR 1.1 the plates for engraving are prepared by removing sharp edges, polishing them until obtaining a homogeneous surface and uniform, considering requirements of adherence according to nature of the material, provided Chuck and characteristics of engraving techniques to apply.

CR 1.2 varnishes used in intaglio engraving process are selected by applying criteria of affinity to the process and appreciating its features to meet the needs of quality required during the process of engraving and later bitten.

1.3 CR incision and engraving tools: tips, gravers, Roulettes, berceau and others of burnished and correction are prepared for use by checking its quality and correcting the defects of wear present.

CR 1.4 the supplies needed for sharpening and correction of the wear of the tools are arranged for use during the engraving process.

CR 1.5 the mordants or equipment used in the indirect methods of engraving are prepared, in the concentration required depending on the nature of the plates and the techniques and procedures of engraving to be used, with special attention to the safety measures for the handling of these corrosive products.

CR 1.6 products and auxiliary tools used during the different processes of engraving are arranged for use, respecting the conditions of security in handling and avoiding, at all times, its proximity to hot spots.

1.7 CR quality and adequacy of the materials used during the engraving process are controlled, prior to use, depending on the desired results, carrying out the necessary tests to know identify its characteristics and adapt its use.

RP 2: Record the iron for the matrix by applying direct and/or indirect chalcographic engraving techniques using specific tools and applying the required safety measures.

CR 2.1 the image is transferred on the prepared surface of the plate by the tracing of sketches using the technique of transfer of each matrix, such as: tracing paper, chalk, wax, and others.

CR 2.2 direct plate engraving is performed using tools and tooling of incision, in accordance with the own resources of the chosen techniques and according to the formal and expressive values sought or established in the sketches.

CR 2.3 the engraving indirect of the iron is performs applying them technical in hollow, exposing some areas of the surface of the iron to them mordants and reserving others by resins, varnishes u others products.

CR 2.4 reservation and exposure of the plate to the mordant is carried out, repeating the process until sizes corresponding to the lines and sought after tones.

CR 2.5 monitoring of quality is carried out the entire process, with attention to the selection and proper use of techniques and tools, according to the formal and expressive purposes of the recorder.

CR 2.6 the chalcographic engraving process is carried out by applying labor and environmental risk prevention measures required.

3 RP: Obtain state tests that allow you to follow the development of intaglio engraving, using the procedures manual stamping or press.

CR 3.1 State tests are carried out by means of systems of printing in intaglio, faithfully collecting the work done on the matrix.

CR 3.2 papers and inks are selected testing until you find the right to collect the work of the matrix, depending on the characteristics of the image and the chosen methods of stamping, recording the data obtained from different samples.

CR 3.3 stamping parameters remain constant at the execution of successive tests of State, preserving the fidelity to the matrix engraved, avoiding the use of any alien or additive effect to the work of the iron in your stamping.

CR 3.4 State tests are checked, analyzing the adequacy of the process of engraving for the purposes sought, such as recesses, relationship with the sketch, and others, performing, in his case, the modifications required in the iron.

CR 3.5 corrections and enhancements of the engraved plate are made, with useful and appropriate procedures, according to the results on State tests and, where appropriate, variations in tests.

CR 3.6 prior to stamping -.T.-definitive test is done including all the results of the previous processes, becoming a point of reference for rear Chuck.



Professional context: means of production: plates: copper, zinc, iron, plastics, and others. Tools and utensils cutting and sanding of metals: you shears, saws, files and other. Intaglio printmaking tools: tips, gravers, Roulettes, berceau and others. Materials and tools of painting: varnishes, paint brushes and brushes. Materials and tools of resinate: resins and resinadoras, sprays, and others. Materials and equipment for the bit of metal: acids, buckets. Materials, tooling and equipment of inking and stamping: inks and papers, spatulas, rollers, hollanders and others.



Products and results: tools and materials for chalcographic engraving: shears, saws, resins, acids and other preparations. Printmaking engraved dies. State tests.



Used or generated information: technical literature. Catalogues and monographs of intaglio engraving. State tests. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Consultations on internet, international workshops and other information on engraving and engravers.



Unit 4 competition: Stamp INTAGLIO and relief level: 2 code: UC0690_2 realizations professionals and performance criteria:




RP 1: review matrix in hollow or relief and assess its characteristics to select proper stamping techniques, in accordance with the directions of the engraver or artist.

CR 1.1 matrix either block or plate check, valuing peculiarities presenting in relation to printing such as: engraving techniques used, the array status and complexity of inking.

CR 1.2 indications of the recorder are analyzed, valuing their involvement in the decision of the techniques and procedures of stamping to choose.

1.3 CR techniques and stamping procedures, whether manual or press or press, choose selected according to their fidelity to pick up the work done in the matrix and in his case, according to the established stamping instructions.

RP 2: Perform previous stamping tests that allow to recognize the inks and papers suitable for Chuck, taking into account the criteria and indications of the recorder.

CR 2.1 used equipment for stamping tests prepare adjusting them according to the needs of the image and following the instructions for use.

CR 2.2 pressure from the press, press flat or vertical press is set to Chuck depending on the required results.

CR 2.3 elements of flexibility and damping of pressure (bed) are chosen depending on the type of matrix, embosser, and the processes used to create the image; establishing an excellent ratio of result between all of them.

CR 2.4 Chuck preflight testing of printing are printed using the materials required: media, inks and others and selected stamping technique.

CR 2.5 printing test results are measured in relation to the stamp model, making the necessary adjustments in materials in accordance with the characteristics of the matrix and indications of the recorder (B.A.T).

RP 3: prepare the paper, them inks and them equipment and useful of inking and stamping in hollow or in relief for his use during it pulled, having them neatly and attending to its correct manipulation.

CR 3.1 presses are prepared by having Chuck, pressure according to the thickness of the iron the paper and felts and other auxiliary elements from previous trials.

CR 3.2 the paper is formatted tearing or cutting it depending on them indications on the dimension and width of their margins for the Chuck of them prints.

CR 3.3 role damping according to the needs of the print-run and according to the characteristics of this: composition and weight.

CR 3.4 ink is prepared in sufficient quantity, by adjusting its properties: tyre, viscosity and others, to the needs of printing intaglio or relief of the matrix.

3.5 CR materials such as inking: spatulas, rollers, pads, tarlatanas and others, are prepared and have an orderly for use during the inking of the Chuck.

CR 3.6 felts, blankets and other auxiliary elements of intaglio or raised printing are reviewed, checking their condition and provided them for use, having foreseen, if Chuck is long, his replacement.

CR 3.7 the preparation of materials is carried out by applying labor and environmental risk prevention measures required.

4 RP: Carry out the marking and registration of stamping equipments establishing the relationship between the image and the print paper whites.

CR 4.1 the intaglio or recessed matrix takes place according to the relationship between the mark and the margins of the paper, as shown in the recorder (B.A.T).

CR 4.2 the order of stamping is sets, for use more than one matrix-iron or taco-, depending on the inks and of the structure of the image collected in the stamping.

CR 4.3 different registration systems are selected in accordance with stamping techniques used and the characteristics of the matrices.

CR 4.4 different to achieve a careful record operations looking for greater accuracy to achieve the homogeneity of the prints.

CR 4.5 marking is checked once registered, analyzing the correct measures of location of matrix or matrices in relation to the placement of support that will receive the stamping, keeping the indications of the recorder (B.A.T).

RP 5: Carry out the inking of the matrix for later transfer to the paper, using different techniques of ink and cleaning according to the nature and structure of the engraving.

CR 5.1 inks are prepared by looking for the density required for the type of inking beating them and adding in their case loads appropriate according to needs of application on the matrix.

CR 5.2 the inking of the matrix is performed applying the matrices such as cleaning and inking techniques: inking with roller, Poupée, carving and embossing or others, in accordance with the characteristics of the engraving, to faithfully achieve the embodiment in the role of the work of the recorder.

CR 5.3 ink deposited on the matrix in hollow or relief is checked by reviewing the amount deposited on its surface, the uniform application and its adaptation to the nature of the matrix and his engraving.

CR 5.4 of inking and cleanliness, where appropriate, of the matrices in hollow or relief operations by applying different techniques, such as: application of ink with rollers, spatulas, tarlatanas, non-abrasive papers or others, always avoiding the wear and tear of the matrix.

6 RP: Perform stamping looking for the homogeneity of the prints, respecting the conditions of quality, safety and environmental protection required.

CR 6.1 the matrix and the paper is placed with precision in accordance with those records previous, attending to a clean and proper handling.

CR 6.2 it waste, blankets, felts and others elements auxiliary is extend on the support so favor in all moment the proper transfer of the ink.

CR 6.3 the pressure is applied, of way uniform, in accordance with the features of the press used or attending to the takes of ink by the paper if the process is manual.

CR 6.4 the process of the pulled are performed avoiding variations significant that is manifest in a remarkable lack of homogeneity of them prints.

CR 6.5 them presses and others means of stamping is used applying the rules applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

7 RP: Carry out the drying and final pressing of prints using media and specific equipment, ensuring the conditions of conservation of these.

CR 7.1 media and equipment for drying and pressing are used following the instructions for use, avoiding the loss of ink of the stamp and glazing of white on the margins of the same.

CR 7.2 handling of paper during the drying and pressing processes is carried out according to the conditions of cleaning and correct the image obtained in the process of engraving.

CR 7.3 prints drying is carried out using the methods of drying rack, pressed in vertical baler in wet, pressed dry vertical baler, and others, to achieve the degree of moisture required for their preservation.

CR 7.4 means to guarantee a correct conservation of prints are used, taking into account the environmental conditions and the instructions for use.



Professional context: means of production: stamping stands: papers and other media. Inks and additives. Materials, tools and equipment from inking: spatulas, tampons, rollers and others. Humidification equipment: water tubs, drying and others. Printing equipment: contact strips, brochure and other presses. Drying and pressing equipment: drying rack, wet vertical baler, vertical baler dry and others.



Products and results: media, inks and prepared materials for the printing. Intaglio prints. Prints in relief. Dried and pressed the prints made.



Used or generated information: prior to stamping (B.A.T) conclusive evidence. Technical literature. Catalogues and monographs of intaglio engraving and xylography. Catalogues of papers and inks. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



TRAINING module 1: techniques of expression for work graphic level: 2 code: MF0687_2 associated with UC: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: recognize graphic expression techniques, selecting the most suitable for engraving and stamping techniques.

CE1.1 recognize and describe the main materials, tools and procedures of graphic expression.

CE1.2 explain the fundamental resources that provide graphic expression techniques.

CE1.3 relate the resources that provide the techniques of graphic expression with a specific technique of engraving or stamping.

CE1.4 in a practical course characterised by a technique of engraving or stamping set:-select the most appropriate graphic expression techniques: water, strong, oily and mixed u other.

-Determine the materials to use according to the technique of graphic expression selected: pigments, binders and solvents.

C2: Analyze the basic structure of proposed images, recognizing the fundamental elements that compose them and the relations established between them.


CE2.1 describe the basic elements of visual language and rating them as foundations of the construction of the image.

CE2.2 distinguish, viewing and linking, the basic compositional principles of different prints given identifying the main lines of force and care centres.

CE2.3 recognize and describe the main compositional structures in various proposed images of prints and engravings.

CE2.4 compare chromatic and luminous values of different proposed images of prints and engravings by valuing the importance of those in the construction of the image.

C3: Make notes, studies and sketches for graphic art graphic expression techniques and using the basic elements of visual language and compositional principles.

CE3.1 assess the use of sketches, notes, studies and sketches as successive phases in the process of construction of images.

CE3.2 apply techniques of graphic expression, in different practical assumptions, making sketches and notes that collect the basic forms of a composition into lines, frames and/or stains relationally established with certain tonal and color values.

CE3.3 in a practical course of elaboration of sketches and notes and previous studies:-carry out studies of parts or particular aspects that contribute to the development of the sketch.

-Get the final sketches so pick up the work done in notes and previous studies, by setting the tonal and color values in them.

CE3.4 rating the realization of the sketch as medium of expression personal and social, integrating it as a phase in the process of obtaining of recorded and prints.

C4: recognize and rating in different proposed Visual, those aspects technical and aesthetic collected in the images or sketches.

CE4.1 differentiate from a given so-called technical and aesthetic aspects of different images or sketches.

CE4.2 describe the main formal features of a given image.

CE4.3 from different images identify the highlights of each significant content.

CE4.4 rating features formal, significant or different proposals given visual style.

C5: Make the investment of the graphic image on the tracing guide taking into account its characteristics from a series of given sketches.

CE5.1 describe the main methods of inversion of images.

CE5.2 recognize the characteristics of a given matrix related to investment and transfer methods most suitable to them.

CE5.3 rating the features of different images to invest on a tracing guide whereas the process of transfer.

CE5.4 in different practical cases properly characterized by different images:-apply color selections to given images taking into account the order and registration of the matrices.

-Perform the transfer of those different types of images on matrices.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C3 on CE3.3; C5 CE5.3 and CE5.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Use of time and effort in expanding knowledge and information.



Contents: 1. materials, techniques and supports of graphic expression for the realization of tools of graphic expression sketches.

Pigments, binders and solvents.

Dry and wet techniques of drawing.

Water, strong, oily and mixed media painting techniques.

Supports.



2. analysis of the structure of the basic elements of the language grafico-plastico image.

Visual field (ratio figure).

Organization of the elements in the two-dimensional space.

Lines of force and care centres.

Basic compositional structures.



3. the line as Configurator of image building, descriptive and expressive values in the line.

The line according to the different techniques of engraving and stamping.

The line in positive negative.



4. stain and tonal in the graphic image texture and tonal values in the elaboration of images.

Xylographic tonal techniques.

Tonal printmaking techniques.

Tonal lithographic techniques.

Technical tonal screenprinting.

Techniques tonal for other systems for obtaining of graphic works.



5. the color in the graphic image building, descriptive and expressive values of the color.

Juxtaposition and overlapping in the color image.

Planning of the image in color printing processes.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the development and interpretation of sketches for graphic work, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: XYLOGRAPHIC engraving level: 2 code: MF0688_2 associated with UC: woodcuts woodcut duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: acknowledge and prepare materials, tools and supplies used in the xylographic engraving.

CE1.1 in different case studies and on the basis of different materials for engraving, select plates, tacos and tables serving a: - the nature of the material: wood type.

-The sense of cutting the wood fibre or grain.

-The qualities of the material to be recorded: consistency, uniformity, hardness, degree of drying and others.

-Possible defects affecting the size and the subsequent stamping.

CE1.2 adjust different dice tacos to give a uniform thickness and a surface essential flat for printing, applying the right systems of planing and thicknessing.

CE1.3 prepare tooling for the correction of a given engraving tools wear, tweaking them properly before beginning the engraving of a matrix: hone, sandpaper and others.

CE1.4 in a practical course of a process of xylographic engraving, characterized by a sketch and a wooden board:-sawing and squaring the iron, adapting it to the format and dimension the sketch.

-Polish and, if necessary, treat the iron until the precise surface finish, according to the needs of the work to develop.

-Select the gouges, knives, according to the woodblock technique required for engraving, preparing them to especially attending your edge or cut.

CE1.5 in a practical course of preparation of a xylographic engraving, characterised by a quality result:-monitor and adapt the materials used in the processes of xylographic engraving.

-Carry out the necessary tests to determine their specific characteristics and use.

CE1.6 perform all operations by applying labor and environmental risk prevention rules required.

C2: Apply techniques of spun fibre or grain engraving in the realization of matrices, following the indications of the previous sketch or the author of a work.

CE2.1 from a sketch given, transferred or trace the image onto the prepared surface of the iron for better visualization of the work of cutting or engraving.

CE2.2 check that the preparation of the materials are suited to them results expected.

CE2.3 in a so-called practical properly characterized by some technical of engraving and starting from a sketch given:-record the matrix iron, applying them procedures of cut or notched to fiber or well engraving to grain, in accordance with the character and resources own of these technical and according to them values expressive wanted by the artist or established in them sketches.

-Use in the creation of the matrix them technical additive necessary, in case of be required for the correct achievement of the same.

-Relate the structure of the veins and others features of the wood worked with them incisions in the taco and them undercuts of the table.

CE2.4 in a practical course, duly characterized effect engraving of an iron, taking into account effects that can cause pressure and inking on the xylographic relief, particularly with regard to details and fine entretallas, as well as the additions of material during printing due to the use of additive techniques.


CE2.5 starting from different xylographic plates, reduce the areas corresponding to the target in the stamping, grinding them with the required depth on the basis of expected staining methods.

CE2.6 perform all operations by applying labor and environmental risk prevention rules required.

C3: Testing of State using stamping procedures required in each case.

CE3.1 identify the stamping procedures used for arrays in relief, assessing their characteristics.

CE3.2 starting from a given State tests, check the adequacy of the work process to the purposes sought, using state tests as indicators.

CE3.3 starting from a given woodblock matrix, performing different tests testing inks, papers and other media until you find the right to collect the work of the array according to the characteristics of the image and the chosen methods of stamping.

CE3.4 in a practical course characterized by a relief engraving color, state tests with special attention to records and inking methods chosen: Rainbow, carving and embossing, juxtaposition, overlapping and others.

CE3.5 identify those processes made in a stamping model B.A.T given registering them to constitute the reference in a later Edition.

CE3.6 in a case study of stamping tests and from a woodblock matrix:-check printing tests to respond faithfully to the work done on the grill.

-Rating in its stamping the use of any alien or additive effect to the work of the matrix.

CE3.7 perform all operations by applying labor and environmental risk prevention rules required.

C4: Rating the prevention plans applicable labor and environmental risks in the process of xylographic engraving for a correct use of safety equipment and media.

CE4.1 identify standards of prevention of labour risks that affect the development of the operations of xylographic engraving.

CE4.2 describe and apply the correct lighting conditions for the process of carving or engraving.

CE4.3 identify tools and cutting tools, cut in the required conditions of security, according to proper precautions and describing if appropriate protection measures.

CE4.4 in a practical course characterised by a work environment:-rating tables, chairs and boards to adapt to the ergonomic conditions necessary to achieve good posture during the work.

-Determine the optimal lighting conditions for the established work environment.

-Determine the treatment to be given to the remains of wood caused by the cutting of the taco to work under optimum environmental conditions.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.1, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 on CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.6; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Propose alternatives with the goal of improving results.

Participate and collaborate actively in the team's work.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.



Contents: 1. engraving in relief the workshop.

Organization.

Maintenance and safety.

Materials, tool and machinery.

Basic fundamentals.

The matrices.

Principles of relief printing.

Press flat.

Graphic effects.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.

Press vertical.



2. engraving on linoleum materials and tools.

The taking of evidence.

Basic fundamentals.

Graphic effects.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



3. the woodcut fiber materials and tools.

Engraving of the matrix.

Notch of wood.

The taking of evidence.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



4 woodcut grain materials and tools.

Preparation of the taco: polishing, Assembly and others.

Engraving of the matrix.

The taking of evidence.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



5 cromoxilografía in evidence recorded in color.

Techniques and records.

Inked in carving and relief.

Inking Rainbow.

Juxtaposition of color.

Templates.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



6. additive processes applied to the engraving in relief materials.

Techniques.

Collagrafia.

Realization of matrix by combining different techniques in relief.

Interaction between linoleum and wood engraving.

Interaction between wood engraving to fiber and grain.

Experimentation with new materials.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the xylographic engraving, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: engraving INTAGLIO level: 2 code: MF0689_2 associated with UC: woodcut to intaglio duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: acknowledge and prepare materials, tools and supplies used in intaglio engraving.

CE1.1 identify different materials, tools and supplies used in intaglio engraving, describing the characteristics of each of them and their application in the process.

CE1.2 in a practical course characterised by a given process:-prepare correctly tooling for use if necessary in the correction of the wear of the tools to use.

-Polishing and degrease the plates in his case, seeking to standardize the surface and optimizing the adhesion to different materials to be used to create references for image and an optimal response to the mordant in case of working with technical hints.

CE1.3 from different engraving tools, check that the tools to record both by direct methods such as indirect: Tip, Roulette, burnishers and others, have correct quality and correctness of the wear.

CE1.4 in a practical course characterized by a determined quality result, control and properly adapt the materials used in the processes of intaglio engraving, performing the tests necessary to recognize its specific features and their use.

CE1.5 Select correctly the mordant required in indirect techniques of intaglio engraving, adapting its choice to the nature of the material used as matrix.

CE1.6 have to use different utensils and materials given respecting the optimal conditions of security, and controlling their quality and suitability for the desired results.

CE1.7 in a practical course of intaglio engraving, characterized by an iron and a sketch given:-check the quality and conditions of use of the tools to be used in the process of engraving, both with direct methods such as indirect: Tip, Roulettes, burnishers and others.

-Cut the iron adapting it to the format and dimension the sketch.

-Polish and, if necessary, treat the array to get the precise surface finish, according to the needs of the work to develop.

-Prepare the mordant used in indirect techniques adapting its choice to the nature of the material used as matrix.

-Carry out the operations by applying the rules of risk prevention and environmental required.

C2: Apply direct or indirect techniques for etchings tracking quality in the process.

CE2.1 from a sketch transfer or trace the image onto the prepared surface of the matrix to visualize correctly the work to perform.

CE2.2 check that the preparation of different materials given conforms to the expected results.

CE2.3 correctly choose the order of work in an array or arrays according to the specification required a prior both at the structural level and color sketch.

CE2.4 from a practical course of an intaglio print characterized by the application of direct techniques: drypoint, Burin, and others choose correctly the use of them responding to the previously established graphic effects.


CE2.5 in a practical course of intaglio engraving in which apply different technical hints: etching line, aquatint, lifting techniques, and others choose correctly the use thereof and the materials involved in the process: varnishes, mordant and others, looking for the right answer to the previously established graphic effects.

CE2.6 with a practical assumption of an intaglio print that requires you to combine techniques direct and indirect to correctly choose the use of the same according to order of use and graphical results previously established.

CE2.7 perform all operations by applying the rules of risk prevention and environmental required.

C3: Testing the State allowing you to follow the development of engraving using stamping procedures required in each case.

CE3.1 check the process of engraving of different prints using the media and certain printing processes.

CE3.2 check, using state tests as indicators, the adequacy of the process of engraving for the purposes sought.

CE3.3 in a practical case characterized by an image and methods of stamping certain testing workshop rehearsing inks, papers, and other media until you find the right to collect the work of the array according to the characteristics of the image.

CE3.4 in a case study of an engraving intaglio color testing State applied different methods of staining such as: Poupée, carving and relief, juxtaposition, overlapping, Hayter method and another, paying special attention to the record.

CE3.5 in a practical course duly characterized by an iron and a print model:-collect properly made in the print process model so that they constitute the reference in the subsequent Edition.

-Check that the tests respond faithfully to the work made on the iron avoiding, in your stamping, the use of any effect alien or added to the work of the matrix.

-Perform all operations by applying the rules of risk prevention and environmental required.

C4: analyze them plans of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in the process of engraving intaglio to use properly means and teams of security.

CE4.1 identify the standards of prevention of risks labour that affect to the development of the operations of engraving intaglio.

CE4.2 describe the conditions right of lighting for the process of engraving intaglio.

CE4.3 identify tools and cutting tools, incision used in the necessary security conditions, according to proper precautions and describing if the required protective measures.

CE4.4 in a practical case characterized by a work environment:-rating tables, chairs and boards to adapt to the ergonomic conditions necessary to achieve good posture during the work.

-Determine the optimal lighting conditions for the established work environment.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.2, CE1.4 and CE1.7; C2 regarding CE2.3, CE2.4, CE2.5, CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 CE3.2, CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Use of time and effort in expanding knowledge and information.

Act with speed in situations problematic and not limit it to wait.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.



Contents: 1. engraving in hollow historical principles.

The workshop.

Materials tools and machinery.

Organization.

Maintenance and safety.

Basic fundamentals.

Principles of intaglio printing.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



2 engraving intaglio basics.

The matrices.

Intaglio printing.

The etching press.

Graphic effects.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



3. technical printmaking direct technical processes.

Instruments and products.

Drypoint.

Burin.

Black way.

Graphics effects.

Realization of matrix by combining different techniques.

Materials and techniques.

Experimentation with new materials.

Rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



4. the mordant indirect chalcographic techniques.

Varnishes.

Resins.

Graphics effects.

Realization of matrix by combining different techniques.

Materials and techniques.

Experimentation with new materials.



5 intaglio in colour with a single plate.

Color with several plates.

Different systems of records.

The taking of evidence in color.

Techniques and records.

Inked in carving and relief.

Hayter method.

Juxtaposition of color.

Overlap of color.

Templates.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1. domain of them knowledge and the technical related with the engraving intaglio, that is be credited through an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



MODULE training 4: stamping in hollow and in relief level: 2 code: MF0690_2 associated to the UC: stamping in hollow and in relief duration: 120 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: make them operations of put punto de them machines that is van to use in the stamping: etching press, press vertical and others, as well as of them useful employees in the same.

CE1.1 describe the machines of stamping more common, such as etching press, press vertical and others, identifying those elements of put to.

CE1.2 identify the mechanisms of adjustment of the matrix-hollow or relief-in the different machines of stamping.

CE1.3 describe different tooling for stamping such as scrapers, rollers, wipes and others, specifying their characteristics and use in the process.

CE1.4 in a so-called practical starting a test prior to the Chuck -.T - stamping, regulation of the press's printing operations to use: pressure, type and number of felts or other materials needed for dampening the pressure between the machine and the iron, serving in the election to the required result.

C2: Select and perform registration necessary for stamping, always looking for the greater suitability with respect to the number of dies and stamping technique.

CE2.1 identify the elements of printing equipment that form the registration system and describe its operation.

CE2.2 from proof printing, select the registry system suited to stamping that are going to make, whether a single system of stamping is used as if the xylography and chalcography interrelate and always in accordance with the bat

CE2.3 in a case study of stamping from different matrices, establish the order of printing them, depending on inks and the desired outcome: transparency, opacity and superposition.

CE2.4 determine the pressure in the press or in the vertical press that better responds to the characteristics of a given array looking for accuracy and homogeneity in the Edition.

C3: Condition support that will receive the impression, by adjusting the parameters of moisture, porosity, flexibility and others.

CE3.1 describe the conditions that must meet the support to print in terms of moisture, basis weight, thickness and others, in relation to the different techniques of stamping.

CE3.2 have different supports given to receive printing, in a clean area that guarantees its perfect state, both during the stamping as long life as printed, always avoiding any risk of contamination by fungi and other bacteria capable of altering its correct conservation.

CE3.3 from about supports given to print with certain environmental conditions, moisturize if necessary and properly, the support that they will be used in the printing of stamps, adjusting them to the raised needs.

CE3.4 in a so-called practical editing a picture in different supports:-assess the porosity and the flexibility of each given brackets.

-Control during all the Edition: the atmosphere, humidity and luminosity of the workshop, to avoid both dimensional and other alterations.


C4: apply them technical of inked and cleaning of matrices, using the ink or other system of incorporation of color on the matrix.

CE4.1 determine the correct placement in the table of inked of them inks u others systems of application of color, as well as of them useful necessary according to the needs of use during your application.

CE4.2 in a so-called practical of inking of matrices:-check the correct state of the ink in relation to the type of inked that is going to make: viscosity, transparency and others.

-Adjust any other colour required in the job application system: chinecollee and others, as well as its correct fixation on the support that will receive the printing.

CE4.3 apply the techniques of ink and cleaning of a given matrix, as well as any other system of incorporation of color, according to the characteristics of the engraving, to faithfully achieve the embodiment in support of the work of the recorder.

CE4.4 in a case study of inking of arrays properly characterized: – prepare the ink enough for planned Chuck.

-Perform the operations of inking, according to the uniform application of the ink that is appropriate to the nature of the matrix and his engraving.

CE4.5 cleaning of different matrices intaglio and relief using materials that do not wear out the engraving such as: white of Spain, gauzes, tarlatanas and others.

C5: Perform the stamping, controlling the correct homogeneity between the prints and applying the rules of environmental and labour risk prevention required.

CE5.1 recognize the different printing processes used intaglio and relief, describing the characteristics of each of them.

CE5.2 check the correct registration of the image in different prints printed to color.

CE5.3 in a practical case characterized by a test of State -.T-, make the correct stamping maintaining regularity and quality required in the Edition.

CE5.4 in a so-called practical of stamping properly characterized:-check in each stamping that the parameters of color are them correct, keeping strictly the reference of the B.A.T

-Check the homogeneity of the Chuck.

-Apply systems of drying of prints more appropriate in each case.

-Apply pressing systems where required.

-Perform all operations while respecting the rules of applicable environmental and occupational risk prevention.

CE5.5 perform all operations while respecting the ergonomic conditions and security measures.

CE5.6 carry out the drying and pressing of different prints using the media and equipment required to ensure a proper finish, and ensure optimal conservation conditions.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 CE3.2 and CE3.4; C4 CE4.2 and CE4.4; C5 regarding CE5.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Use of time and effort in expanding knowledge and information.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Get used to the pace of work of the organization.



Contents: 1. stamping embossing press flat.

Pressure regulation operations.

Stamping tools: spatulas, shields, and others.

Other means of relief-stamping.

With rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



2 stamping hole the etching press.

Adjustment operations.

Registration systems.

Stamping tools: scrapers, rollers and others.

With rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



3 brackets used to receive printing types of roles.

Polyester.

Fabrics.

Leathers.

Plaster and others.

Conditioning of the brackets for the stamping.

With rules of applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.



4 cromoxilografía in stamping the printing in color.

Techniques.

Records.

Different staining methods.



5. intaglio color techniques.

Records.

Inking with various techniques of stamping methods.



6. the interaction between technical the xylography and chalcography prints.

Records.

Intonation.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to printing intaglio and relief, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex V professional qualification: guillotined and folded family professional: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG217_2 general competence be autonomous is the work of preparation and control of machines, raw materials and auxiliary products and run the cutting and folding of photographic material, according to productivity and quality established and intervening in the process taking into account security conditions quality and productivity.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0691_2: prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for the UC0692_2 binding: adjust parameters, synchronize computers and make the cut of graphic materials UC0693_2: adjust parameters, level elements and make folding environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the area of binding dedicated to folding and cutting of graphics products. In entities of nature public or private, of size large, medium and small and with independence of its form legal, usually works by has alien and depending on, in your case, functional or hierarchically of a superior. Can be personal to its charge in occasions, by seasons or of form stable. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors productive is located in the sector productive of industries graphic: Arts graphic, manipulated and processed of field national or international that have with the thread of cut and folded of material graphic: products publishing, newspapers, magazines, advertising, containers and packaging and others, and in any other sector that count with any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs of work relevant them terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs of work is used with character generic and all-inclusive of women and men.

Machinists of Guillotines operators of bending to the Edition Machinists in bending commercial operators of machines guillotinadoras operators of machines bending Guillotineros of binding hand training associated (450 hours) modules training MF0200_2: processes in arts graphic (120 hours) MF0691_2: materials and products for binding (90 hours) MF0692_2: preparation and execution of the cutting of materials graphic (90 hours) MF0693_2 : Preparation and execution of the folded (150 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process graphic in conditions of security, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: determine them features of them products graphics for establish the process of manufacturing suitable, taking in has them elements available and the regulations applicable.

CR 1.1 them products graphics is identified starting from the data provided by them original, sketches and mock-ups, responding to them specifications technical established.

CR 1.2 the graphics to carry out product specifications are valued by identifying its typology and its communicative and functional characteristics - use of the product and applicable regulations.

CR 1.3 graphic to make product functional and technological relations are established according to its component elements: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

1.4 CR phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: prepress, printing bookbinding and finishing, are established from your specifications, by entering data in the workflow.

2 PR: Make the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphic product, in accordance with established specifications.


CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

CR 2.3 them parameters and elements of manufacturing of the product graphic in the different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and processed, is checked according to the specifications technical.

CR 2.4 the environment productive in each an of the phases of the process graphic is determined starting from them specifications technical established.

CR 2.5 the follow-up of the process graphic is done through flows of work facilitating the planning, automation, them procedures and others factors that affect to the environment of the production.

CR 2.6 incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following the established procedures to take corrective and preventive measures.

3 RP: Verify the parameters of quality in the process through specific equipment to obtain the product with established standards.

CR 3.1 characteristics of quality most significant in each of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and set attributes.

CR 3.2 the graphic product in process checks, verifying that it meets the fundamental concepts of quality in all the phases of manufacture according to the norms and standards.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Printer digital. Communication standards. Workflows. Standard light mixer. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Chips techniques of equipment. Maintenance manuals. The company's quality control plans.



2 competition unit: Prepare the materials premiums and LOS products auxiliary for the binding level: 2 code: UC0691_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the technical data on the raw materials of bookbinding from production orders to start the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

CR 1.1 production order is reviewed by checking that it contains all the information relating to raw materials and auxiliary products quality and technical: papers, cartons, tails, steel wire, thread, skins, fabrics and others, which are to be used in the binding process.

1.2 CR information relating to the auxiliary equipment to be used: tools, tools, wheelbarrows, binding, seal, pallets, boxes and others obtained from orders production, establishing its usage in relation to each of the raw materials used.

1.3 CR model, test or any other product that serves as a model, contrasts with the indications of the work order by checking that both coincide to avoid errors in the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products.

CR 1.4 from preparation of raw materials operations by applying the quality criteria set out by the company.

2 RP: Check printed sheets following the established methods to ensure their quality in the binding process.

CR 2.1 the printed sheets are checked by verifying its quality in terms of the foliation, paths, specific measures and possibilities of scratches, repaint, stiffness, resistance to the bending, meaning of fiber breakage in folding and others, in accordance with work order and/or according to model or test.

CR 2.2 possible defects of the printed sheets relating to the: thickness, weight, resistance to the double sheets, ripped, repainted, shine and others that may have occurred in the printing phase are identified taking the corrective measures.

CR 2.3 elements of registration of specifications such as record of height and side position are checked, ensuring that its positioning and entrance into machine match the specifications of bookbinding machines: collators, folders Guillotines and others, according to the work order.

CR 2.4 observed sheets that do not comply with the company's quality standards are removed by applying the corrective measures.

RP 3: prepare the materials raw and them products auxiliary, applying them methods of work established so is ensure the continuity in the Chuck.

CR 3.1 the quantity and quality of raw materials and auxiliary products are checked, ensuring their conformity with the production order.

CR 3.2 raw materials are stacked neatly in the surroundings of the machine ensuring the continuity of the production without interruption, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 3.3 raw materials and auxiliary products are prepared according to the methods of work established to ensuring its entry and passage through the various machines which configured binding processes.

The measurement of parameters of auxiliary products 3.4 CR: viscosity, temperature, mixtures, is performed by checking its suitability for the required quality specifications.

CR 3.5 conservation and storage of auxiliary products is done in an orderly manner, facilitating their location.



Professional context: means of production: materials for bookbinding: papers, cartons, fabrics, leathers, threads, wire, glues and others. Auxiliary equipment of binding: pallets, binding, bindings, boxes and others. Printed sheets. Humidity of the paper, brackets and flexometers drivers. Auxiliary equipment.



Products and results: Quality Control of raw materials, ancillary products and printed sheets. Papers, fabrics, furs, cartons, cardboard and others stacked ready for binding. Auxiliary products: glues, wire, steel wire, prepared for binding.



Used or generated information: work order. Technical documentation of raw materials. Models. Model tests. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards of quality. Technical equipment instructions.



UNIT of competency 3: Adjust parameters, synchronize equipment and perform the cutting of materials graphics level: 2 code: UC0692_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: Regular mechanisms of setting up and operation for the cutting of the graphic material, through its setting and synchronization, choosing the appropriate program as the technical orders, work that is to be performed and the materials will be used.

CR 1.1 work is visually checked according to the parameters of the work order, checking the supplied specifications do not present anomalies that hinder production.

CR 1.2 cutting parameters are entered into the program, adjusting them in accordance with the specifications that appear in the work order.

CR 1.3 elements of record, front and side bracket and measuring systems, conform ensuring its operation, by applying specific technical procedures.

1.4 CR elements and mechanisms of the system power supply and output are checked visually, guaranteeing the correspondence of the support that will be cut with the format of the list is going to get.

CR 1.5 reviewing its elements and commissioning, correcting anomalies established technical procedures, operating the machine is checked.

RP 2: Check the State of registry, pressure and cutting elements to ensure the quality of the cut according to the specifications of the work.

CR 2.1 brackets setting checks ensuring its position at 90 °, the RAM pressure, cutting precision and avoiding the 'ear' effect.

CR 2.2 square usage status is checked visually detecting wear, changing it if necessary.


CR 2.3 blade is checked visually, by checking if there are deficiencies such as lack of sharp, irregular wear, nicks, and others.

CR 2.4 the blade changes, by adjusting the precision of the cut according to the manufacturer's technical specifications and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 2.5 Rammer is level by adjusting pressure depending on the type of material and quantity to be cut.

3 RP: Cut getting the optimum performance of the machines, the quality specified in the work order and compliance with established security standards.

CR 3.1 the layout and position of the heels of the statement is checked before starting to cut, carrying out a sample of the cut of the product.

CR 3.2 tender cut is done by controlling the speed of the machine, keeping settings and levels of quality required according to the specifications of the work order.

CR 3.3 process control is performed by sampling laid down in the method of work, confirming that cut results meet the required quality noting especially the possible repaint, distortions in the form of court and others.

CR 3.4 them copies that are object of the self-control is saved following the instructions of each company or the guidelines of self-control of each work.

4 RP: Strapping or place the products cut into boxes or pallets, ensuring their integrity and exposing clear information content using plates.

CR 4.1 cut products are placed on pallets or cases taking into account, if them, indications of the work order, avoiding that in the subsequent handling and transport them to deteriorate.

CR 4.2 the plates are attached to boxes or pallets in accordance with the directions of the order of work, facilitating the control of the production and helping its easy subsequent identification.

CR 4.3 packaged products are identified with plates indicating the model and number of copies containing, as well as the information necessary for their identification.

CR 4.4 strapping is made to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

5 RP: Record the data of the work of the cutting work, contributing to the control of production plans and the confirmation of the work, done with data issues, quality and productivity.

CR 5.1 data of work tasks at each stage are identified so that it facilitates the traceability of the product.

5.2 CR cut imbalances, repainting, distortions in the format cutting et al., are collected in the parts of production like self-control issues.

CR 5.3 the parts of production is completed by checking that the specified productivity coincides with that obtained.

CR 5.4 quality parameters: measures indicated, material behavior, number of copies and used material consumption are controlled during the print run and are collected in the part of production.

CR 5.5 Chuck data are collected in the parts of production, enabling its analysis in subsequent works.

6 RP: Perform cleaning and maintenance of first level checking security systems to keep cutting machines to point according to established procedures.

CR 6.1 periodic greasing is done according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CR 6.2 the operation of the circuits and filters of air is checks according to the standards of maintenance established.

CR 6.3 components of machines are maintained in the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance.

CR 6.4 the maintenance of first level is performed following them plans expected and registering them data required in the procedures.

CR 6.5 them systems of security is checked to keep them machines and equipment auxiliary of folded in the conditions of security established.



Context professional: means of production: guillotines, elevators, stackers, strapping-tying machines, vibrating. Specific computer system. Spreads. Cards and other materials to cut. Pallet. Boxes. Cartouches.



Products and results: design of the guillotine. Sheets cut to a handling back in another phase of binding and/or manipulated. Specimens cut for direct delivery to the client packed in cartons or placed in pallet. Court prior to printing. Made first-level maintenance.



Used or generated information: parts of the work. Manual of the manufacturer of the machine. Work orders. Mock-ups or models. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Technical details of the ancillary products and maintenance tabs. Standards and quality standards.



Unit 4 competition: Adjust parameters, level elements and make the folding level: 2 code: UC0693_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: Regular implementation mechanisms in place for folding through its synchronization and adjustment in accordance with the technical orders, the work to be performed and the materials to be used.

1.1 CR elements and mechanisms of power of the brake system are checked to guaranteeing its correspondence with the support to fold.

1.2 the different CR stations that they will be used for folding are defined according to the type of product to fold.

CR 1.3 elements and mechanisms of the exit system are verified, guaranteeing reception and stack support folding and bending to obtain.

CR 1.4 the correct operation of the machine is checked by reviewing its elements and implementation underway, correcting anomalies, in accordance with the needs of production and technical instructions.

1.5 CR regulation operations of carried out complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

2 RP: Check stations and accessories which are to be used in the bend to guarantee the quality of the process according to the specifications and approved sample.

2.1 CR adjustment and levelling rollers and folding bags is ensuring the accuracy of the bend.

CR 2.2 cut, punched and/or cleft tooling conform and placed in the place that corresponds, according to perform folding and product to get.

CR the table 2.3 of stack, the air suction and separation of sheets, are adjusted to facilitate a correct power.

CR 2.4 them profiles of input in them bags and/or blades is reset with them first spreads of adjustment, installing them balls suitable to the work in them profiles pods and resetting them riders of the bags.

CR 2.5 them first spreads of adjustment is fold with the speed to which is goes to work, checking the synchronization of them cycles of sucked and the cycles of them stations.

CR 2.6 the latest corrections of precision is made by adjusting the mechanism of delivery and the counter.

CR 2.7 folding stations checking operations are performed complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Make folding getting the optimum performance of the machines, the quality specified in the work order and compliance with established security standards.

3.1 CR such as work order specifications: type of folding and imposition, launcher of the folding and others, are applied in the realization of the bend in accordance with the procedure laid down.

CR 3.2 the quality levels required for each product are kept in the execution of the bend, obtaining the optimal production speed of the folder.

CR 3.3 Chuck is keeping a visual control over the specifications controlling the absence of laces, air bags, scratch and others.

CR 3.4 control of folding is performed on samples of products folded, confirming that the folding results meet the quality required in the working method.

CR 3.5 observed defects are corrected during Chuck, taking samples and checking the quality of the product, especially of mismatches of the bend, repainted, the foliation shoe laces and scratches.

CR 3.6 them exemplary that are object of the self-control is saved following the instructions of the company or the guidelines of self-control of each work.

CR 3.7 it Chuck is performed fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

RP 4: strap and place them products folded in boxes or pallets, avoiding its deterioration and exposing with clarity the information of the content by gussets.

CR 4.1 them products folded is Packeting, packaged and stacked avoiding the deterioration of them themselves, driving them machines auxiliary used and avoiding stops in the production of the folding.

CR 4.2 them products folded is placed in pallets or boxes taking in has, if them had, them indications of the order of work, avoiding that in the later handling and transportation of them same can deteriorate is.

CR 4.3 the cartouches are chosen according to the standards of size, color, and fields to fill.

CR 4.4 the plates are filled with clearly identifying the content and quantity of boxes or pallets.

CR 4.5 them plates is attached to them boxes or to them pallets, in accordance with the indications of it order of work, facilitating the control of the production and its identification rear.

CR 4.6 the strapping is performed using them equipment specific and complying the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labour and environmental.


5 RP: Record the data from the work of the folding process to contribute to the control of production plans by entering data of incidents, quality and productivity.

CR 5.1 the data of the work relating to the tasks in each phase is identified, facilitating the traceability of the product.

CR 5.2 them mismatches of the folded, repainting, foliation, stiffness and others, is collected in those parts of production as incidents of the self-control.

CR 5.3 the parts of production is completed by checking that the specified productivity coincides with that obtained.

CR 5.4 quality parameters: folding type, material behavior, number of copies and used material consumption are controlled during the spin and are collected in the part of production.

CR 5.5 Chuck data are collected in the parts of production, enabling its analysis in subsequent works.

6 RP: Be first level maintenance work, checking the safety systems for keeping the machines about to according to established procedures.

CR 6.1 components of machines are maintained in the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance of the company.

CR 6.2 first level maintenance is carried out according to the plans and registering the data required in the procedures.

CR 6.3 security systems are checked to maintain machines and auxiliary equipment of bend under the security conditions laid down.

CR 6.4 the areas of work of your responsibility is maintained in conditions of cleaning, order and security.



Professional context: means of production: bending machines for bags, bending blades and combined folding machines; Stacker, hand tying machines and strapping machines, blades of perforated, cleft and of court and others products auxiliary. Spreads. Cards and other materials to fold. Strapping machines. Boxes. Pallet. Cartouches.



Products and results: the tuning of the brake. Punched, drilled or cut folding: leaflets, brochures, lists of 8-12-16-24 or 32 pages and others, maps, response coupons, complets and other folded graphics products. Completed plates. Folded graphics products placed in boxes or pallet. Strapping products. Made first-level maintenance.



Used or generated information: parts of the work. Manual of the manufacturer of the machine. Orders of work. Mock-ups or models. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Technical details of the ancillary products and maintenance tabs. Standards and standards of quality.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Hatched.

-Profile of the characters.

-Mark or highlighted on the stand.

-Defects in printing.

-Number of past in machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finished, describing and relating their main phases with the machines, equipment, materials raw and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the features functional of them different products graphics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify those features structural of the different products graphics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 starting from some samples of products graphics:-recognize your composition physico-chemical and identify their capacity functional.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate the differences of color and its possibility of reproduction in the system graphic.

-Measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating readings on a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometers, colorimeters, strips from control and control on production line equipment, identifying its application in different phases of the graphic process.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the most significant quality characteristics of products:-binding and manipulated: subjective evaluation, cutting marks, footprints, registration, glue-down signals.

-Resistance to bending.

-Rub resistance.

-Print: density, 'trapping', stamping, color, with balance, gain, sliding.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:


Responsibility are of the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Comply with the procedures and standards internal of the company.

Keep an attitude assertive, empathetic and conciliatory with the others showing cordiality and kindness in the try.

Recognize the process productive of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of product graphics.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Models of standardization and of communication. Workflows.

Systems of prepress. Original classes. Image latent, process of development. Adaptation to the environment of flow of work digital.

Peripheral of entry, peripheral of output, software and hardware specific, processing and systems of testing.

Layout and Assembly. Mount items. Specific software.

Printing systems. Equipment, benefits, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each printing system.

Binding and processed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and its measuring nature of the light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of the vision.

Chromatic space.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Color theory. Additive and subtractive color synthesis.

Systems of representation of the color: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3. rules of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in processes of Arts graphic plans and standards of safety.

Regulations in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.



4. quality in the processes of Arts graphic trials, instruments and measurements more features.

Quality in prepress: dot gain, balance of greys and density.

Variables of printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, gain of stamping, balance of color and of gray).

Areas of control in the printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of the quality.



5. control of quality in arts graphics the quality in the manufacturing.

The control of quality. Concepts that are involved.

Elements of control.

Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.

Standards and standards relating to the process chart.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1. domain of them knowledge and the technical related with them operations of production in the process graphic in conditions of security, quality and productivity, that is be credited through an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 2 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top), engineering technical, architecture technical, diploma or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. competition teaching accredited in accordance with that established the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 2: materials and products for binding level: 2 code: MF0691_2 associated with UC: prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for bookbinding duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: interpret the working procedures in the preparation of raw materials in processes of binding from production orders.

CE1.1 be a sequencing of the binding process by means of the interpretation of a work order type, identifying the materials used in each case.

CE1.2 contrast indications of different work orders with a model type with binding instructions.

CE1.3 in a practical course of data extraction of raw materials for binding, from a mock-up model:-check that in the model are all data relating to the binding to perform.

-Identify those papers, cartons, threads and other materials required according to the model.

-Assess the established quality criteria.

CE1.4 in a practical course of identification of raw materials, from a production type order:-interpret the work order relating information technical and production with the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary equipment to be used such as wheelbarrows, binding, seal, pallets, boxes, spreads to bind and others.

-Recognize the raw materials for binding different trains.

-Identify the auxiliary elements of the machines.

C2: Analyze the printed sheets regarding its quality in the binding process.

CE2.1 measurements of printed sheets handling the corresponding measuring instruments assessing the following properties:-squaring of the specifications.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Moisture in paper.

CE2.2 in a practical case of checking the quality, from actual printed sheets check the quality in the following aspects:-the foliation.

-Paths.

-Registry.

-Specific measures.

-Repaints.

-Stiffness.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Sense of fiber.

-Break into the fold.

CE2.3 detect, in actual printed samples, defects in printing, using a Chuck with defective specifications.

C3: apply the methods of preparation of them materials raw and them products auxiliary for a process of binding, in accordance with the requirements of production.

CE3.1 interpret methods of work, taken from the reality of a company, on handling of materials raw and products auxiliary of binding.

CE3.2 analyze the process of storage characteristic of the business of binding.

CE3.3 relate the materials with the procedures and conditions requiring its storage.

CE3.4 in a practical course of preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products in accordance with an order of real work:-check the quantity and quality of raw materials and auxiliary products.

-Piled raw materials and auxiliary products and handle them according to the established work methods to ensure your entry and passage through the various machines which configured binding processes.

-Identify the established safety standards for stacking the raw materials and auxiliary equipment.

C4: To evaluate the characteristics of the variables of quality of raw materials, using appropriate instruments.

CE4.1 relate the durability and performance of the various media used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: moisture and temperature, the storage, the direction of the fiber.

CE4.2 relate the durability and performance of various chemicals used in the binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: temperature, humidity, composition, oxidation and light.

CE4.3 differentiate the features and operation of those instruments of measurement used for the control of quality of materials raw.

CE4.4 in a practical course of a trial of materials for binding, from measuring devices:-handle tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, balance of accuracy, viscometer, microscope.

-Obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, dimension of media, materials and raw materials variations.

-Express correctly the results of the measures.

CE4.5 check that the properties of the different raw materials used in bookbinding processes are in line with the characteristics of the materials to be bound and to the final result for which they are intended.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.2; C3 on CE3.4; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Comply with the procedures and standards internal of the company.

Get used to the pace of work of the company.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Convey information with clarity, in an orderly manner, structured, clear and precise respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the process productive of the organization.



Contents: 1. materials premiums in binding paths: classes and features.

Standard sizes of sheets.

Printed binding specifications: inpainting and stiffness.

Resistance to bending.

Sense of fiber.

Break in the bend.

Tails. Types. Features.

Varnishes. Types. Features.

Wire. Types. Features.

Threads. Types. Features.




2. packing and storage in bookbinding storage conditions. Temperature and humidity.

Automatic storage systems.

Stack. Cartouches.

Binding: operation and management.

Seal: types and placement.

Pallets: placement and management.

Boxes: types, use depending on the material.

Shrinkwrapper: management and use.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. ancillary elements of bookbinding machines. Benefits.

Types of machines for the process of binding.

Components of the machines.

Auxiliary equipment of the machines.

Guillotines.



4. control of quality of materials raw of binding quality of the print.

Control of the viscosity.

Drying times.

Resistance to rubbing and scratching of varnishes and glues.

Most characteristic measurements and trials.

Measuring devices: gyrometer, measuring tape, gauges, micrometer, thermometer and viscometer.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products for the binding, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: preparation and execution of the graphics level cutting of materials: 2 code: MF0692_2 associated with UC: adjust parameters, synchronize computers and make the cut of graphic materials duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: check starting start the machine from the technical specifications.

CE1.1 interpret the technical documentation relating to putting cutting machine up, performance and security.

CE1.2 rating the different cut programs that include equipment, relating most common brackets to be cut on the graphics processing.

CE1.3 in a so-called practical of put underway of the machine of cut, starting from an order of work given:-analyze the specifications technical of the machine.

-Check and review the elements of the machine of cut and its proper functioning or State.

-Check the elements and mechanisms of the system power supply and output to ensure its correspondence with the support to be cut and spread to obtain.

-Locate and check the correct functioning of systems of safety of the cutting machine.

CE1.4 in a practical course of adjustment of auxiliary elements robotized on a cutting machine, from a given work data:-analyze the performance of each element and its synchronization with the cutting machine.

-Make different settings by entering data in the terminal cutting machine and check its correct operation.

-Make programming of the cutting machine with real examples of jobs to be cut, interpreting each work orders.

C2: Make setting operations in cutting machine considering the characteristics of the support.

CE2.1 recognize the elements of the cutting machine which must be adjusted based on the characteristics of the product to be cut: squares, squares, blade and others.

CE2.2 identify the layout of the cutting in different sheets and graphics products, carrying out a sample of the bend.

CE2.3 in a practical course of adjustment of cutting equipment, from the technical instructions of the machine:-adjust the brackets checking the precision of the cut and the ground, detecting defects in the regulation such as the 'ear' effect.

-Determine the State of the blade sharpening valuing, absence of nicks, anchor and others, following the technical specifications.

-Change the defective blade and tighten, in accordance with specific standards of safety.

-Check the State of the square and its leveling.

-Change and adjust the square defective, fulfilling the norms of security specific.

-Leveling the Rammer for different media to be cut.

C3: Carry out the operations of cutting of the graphic material from specifications of quality and compliance with required safety standards.

CE3.1 identify the elements of control that should be monitored the machine during a cutting process.

CE3.2 identify applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks to be enforced during a cutting process.

CE3.3 in a practical course of cutting graphic materials, from a few instructions:-interpret the work order and program the machine for this work.

-Set the power supply and output systems and check its correct operation.

-Making the cut, checking the quality parameters established in the quality system for splitting: sampling, detection of repainted, distortions in the Court due to lack of pressure, height of excessive lenght, unevenness of the brackets and others.

-Perform cutting work, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C4: Carry out operations of packaging and placement of products cut into boxes or pallets identifying products by gussets.

CE4.1 identify signs and identification systems normally used in the binding process.

CE4.2 filling plates for identification of contents of boxes and pallets of various assumptions of work, in accordance with the methods outlined in a business model.

CE4.3 in a practical course of strapping from cut copies.

-Perform the cut strapping of the specimens.

-Pack them in boxes, looking for the perfect fit that would prevent further deterioration.

-Placed in pallet boxes looking for the optimization in transportation.

-Attach the plates in accordance with the indications of the work order established for this so-called.

C5: Apply first level maintenance on the machines involved in the folding process.

CE5.1 identify the greasing points arranged in the cutting machines according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CE5.2 perform the greasing greasing points provided for in the standards of maintenance of cutting machine.

CE5.3 check the circuits and filters of air according to maintenance standards.

CE5.4 cleaning of the elements set out in the standards of maintenance.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.2; C3 on CE3.4; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Comply with the procedures and standards internal of the company.

Get used to the pace of work of the company.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Convey information with clarity, in an orderly manner, structured, clear and precise respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the process productive of the organization.



Contents: 1. cutting process of court procedure. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Cutting machines.

Paths: classes and features.

Standard sizes of sheets.

Safety rules for the machinery, equipment and materials.



2. ancillary elements of blades cutting machines: use parameters.

Blade change system.

Squares: use parameters.

Replacement of squares.

Vibrating tables.

Systems automated for the splitting.

Emergency systems.



3. operation and management of guillotine electromechanical elements.

Functioning of the elements of the guillotine.

Guillotines with computer programming.

Programming of each type of work.

Use of cutting programs.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Equipment of protection individual.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer:




1 domain of knowledge and techniques related to parameters, timing equipment and realization of cutting graphic materials, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 4: preparation and execution of the folding level: 2 code: MF0693_2 associated with UC: adjust parameters, level elements and make the bend length: 150 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: maneuver operations and service in bending machines by adjusting them to the requirements of the job.

CE1.1 recognize the folder items: feeding system, stations, exhaust system, identifying the characteristics of each one.

CE1.2 identify and explain the use of the handles that allow you to calibrate the elements that make up the transmission and pressure equipment.

CE1.3 in a practical course of adjustment of equipment, from a conveniently characterized work order:-perform functional maneuvers in correspondence with the type and format of the bracket folding correcting possible defects.

-Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the system of power and marker in function with the size and type of support.

-Adapt function mode of elements and mechanisms for output to the support system of the Chuck.

C2: During operation of regulation in the stations and machine accessories of bend according to requirements of the job.

CE2.1 adjust the pressure of the rollers according to the thickness and characteristics of the stand to fold.

CE2.2 set the bags in their positions, according to the interpretation of a given work order.

CE2.3 perform operations of levelling and regulation of them bags of folded, according to those data technical of an order of work given.

CE2.4 useful cut, drilled and split, according to work instructions given operations of installation and adjustment in tooling cut, perforated, folding machines.

CE2.5 adjust the elements of the apparatus of power in bending type machines:-table of stacking.

-Regulation of the air of sucked.

-Regulation of the separation of sheets.

-Regulation of the height of pile.

-Regulation of the control of twos.

CE2.6 optimize the elements of timing, guides and transport systems in the folding machine to achieve the passage of the specification in accordance with given requirements.

CE2.7 in a practical course of regulation of equipment by bending, from a work order characterized conveniently, regular mechanisms of:-entrance of spreads.

-Transport of sheets in the folder.

-Output specifications.

-Placement of the elements involved in the bend of the work order and regulate them.

C3: Operations folded by the specific equipment from technical specifications.

CE3.1 linking machines and materials to bend with bending speed.

CE3.2 describe the method and frequency of sampling folded during a specific circulation.

CE3.3 describe the defects themselves of the system of folding.

CE3.4 operate with main bending machines to make Chuck and get the required quality.

CE3.5 in a practical course of bend, starting from a given printed:-relate the causes and effects of the bend parameters reset.

-Materials properly dispose in machines, in order to get the results and required times.

-Obtain the folding of the forms with the required quality.

-Identify the risk and level of danger posed by the handling of the materials, products and equipment used in the bend.

CE3.6 identify and describe the different folding machines security mechanisms: buttons stop, protections, housings, as well as the means of protection and clothing that must be employed.

C4: perform operations of strapping and placement of products folded in boxes or pallets identifying those products by gussets.

CE4.1 identify signs and identification systems normally used in the binding process.

CE4.2 filling plates for identification of contents of boxes and pallets of various assumptions of work, in accordance with the methods outlined in a company model.

CE4.3 in a practical case of strapping, from exemplary bends:-carry out the strapping of exemplary bends.

-Pack them in boxes, looking for the perfect fit that would prevent further deterioration.

-Placed in pallet boxes looking for the optimization in transportation.

-Attach the plates in accordance with the indications of the work order established for this so-called.

C5: apply the operations of maintenance of first level in the machines that involved in the process of folding.

CE5.1 identify the greasing points arranged in the folders according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CE5.2 perform the greasing greasing points provided for in rules of folding machine maintenance.

CE5.3 check the circuits and filters of air according to maintenance standards.

CE5.4 cleaning of the elements set out in the standards of maintenance.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.3; C3 on CE3.3; C4 on CE4.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Adapt to the Organization, its organisational and technological changes as well as new contexts or situations.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.



Contents: 1. folding folding process process. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Folding machines.

Paths: classes and features.

Standard sizes of sheets. Relationship with each machine.

Safety rules for the machinery, equipment and materials.



2. auxiliary folding binding machines, finishes and manipulated elements. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Types of machines for the binding process.

Auxiliary materials of the bending machines.

In the process of folding safety regulations.

Emergency systems.



3. operation and management of press brakes electromechanical elements.

Operation of the items in the folder.

Press brakes with computer programming.

Programming of each type of work.

Use of folding programs.

Adjustment of the machine for folding.

Configurations of the folders for the different types of folding.

Synchronization of items in the folder.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Personal protective equipment.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of parameters, leveling elements and the completion of the fold, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex VI professional qualification: die cutting family professional: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG218_2 general competition prepare materials, adjust the elements of the process and carry out die-cutting of material, intervening in the graphic process taking into account the conditions of safety, quality and productivity.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0694_2: prepare elements of die-cut in relation to the support to transform UC0695_2: adjust the process elements and carry out die-cutting environment professional scope professional




Develops his professional activity in the area of processed in graphic companies dedicated to the production of graphic material with finishing of die-cutting, in States of nature, public or private, small, medium and large, irrespective of its legal form. Usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. May have occasionally people to your cargo or be head of team. In the development of the activity Professional is apply the principles of accessibility universal in accordance with the regulations applicable.



Sectors productive is located in the sector productive of industries graphics: Arts graphic, manipulated and processed of scope national or international that troquelen products publishing, advertising, packaging and packaging and others, and in any other sector that count with any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Stamping machine operators machine operators produce labels with groups or bodies of die-cutting in line machine operators produce corrugated cardboard with punching stamping machine operators body cylindrical Machinists of stamping machine of mourner paper, air mail or large setting for envelopes and sobres-bolsa printing and other processed Machinists of cutting paper with easy printing or non-printing envelope autoplatina , sobres-bolsa and others processed Machinists of minerva die Machinists of die cutter printer Machinists of relief preparers of dies operators of machine die cutting of paper, carton and materials related training associated (330 hours) modules training MF0200_2: processes in arts graphic (120 hours) MF0694_2: preparation of the die (90 hours) MF0695_2: preparation and execution of the die-cut (120 hours) unit of competition 1 : Operate in the process graphic in conditions of security, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: determine them features of them products graphics for establish the process of manufacturing suitable, taking in has them elements available and the regulations applicable.

CR 1.1 them products graphics is identified starting from the data provided by them original, sketches and mock-ups, responding to them specifications technical established.

CR 1.2 the graphics to carry out product specifications are valued by identifying its typology and its communicative and functional characteristics - use of the product and applicable regulations.

CR 1.3 graphic to make product functional and technological relations are established according to its component elements: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

1.4 CR phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: prepress, printing bookbinding and finishing, are established from your specifications, by entering data in the workflow.

2 PR: Make the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphic product, in accordance with established specifications.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

2.3 CR parameters and elements of manufacture of the graphic product in different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 production environment in each of the phases of the graphics processing is determined by the established specifications.

CR 2.5 graphic process monitoring is performed using workflows facilitating planning, automation, procedures and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 them incidents that arise in the process is recorded in the flow of work following the procedures established to take them measures corrective and preventive necessary.

3 RP: Verify the parameters of quality in the process through specific equipment to obtain the product with established standards.

CR 3.1 characteristics of quality most significant in each of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and set attributes.

CR 3.2 the graphic product in process checks, verifying that it meets the fundamental concepts of quality in all the phases of manufacture according to the norms and standards.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Digital printer. Communication standards. Workflows. Standard light mixer. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Technical specifications of equipment. Maintenance manuals. The company's quality control plans.



2 competition unit: Prepare elements of die-cut in relation to the support to transform level: 2 code: UC0694_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the technical data of the die to prepare from the orders of production to begin the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

CR 1.1 production order is reviewed by checking that it contains all the technical and quality information to begin the process of preparation of the die: materials, labour, technical specifications parameters and others.

CR 1.2 data of the production sheet die cutting materials are matched with methods and equipment used in the company, valuing their viability.

CR 1.3 technical information on the elements that make up the die is contrasted with the client's specifications, models or samples authorized, by checking its coincidence.

CR 1.4 possible incidents that have arisen are recorded in the production order scoring types such as incompatibility of materials and others, according to the procedures established in the control plan.

RP 2: Prepare the support die-cutting and material replenishment to feed the die cutter machine so as to ensure the continuity of the process.

CR 2.1 the quantity and quality of support to cutting checks verifying that it corresponds with the production order.

CR 2.2 support cutting is transported to the die-cutting machine following established safety standards.

CR 2.3 support cutting is being handled and treated according to the methods of work established ensuring its entry and passage through the machine and holding the signs of quality.

CR 2.4 stack and conditions of stored stand are checked periodically, according to the established control plan.

CR 2.5 support cutting is indicated, maintaining the identification and their traceability through the process.

2.6 CR material replenishment: creasing cutting blades, tires and tools are prepared and available enough for his eventual replacement as needed.

3 RP: Prepare the die to carry out the embossed according to technical specifications and supports to process.

CR 3.1 required gums are placed in the die avoiding cutting support sticking to the blades.

CR 3.2 leftovers expeller prepares according to needs of the support cutting according to the guidelines set out in the technical instructions of the stamping machine.

CR 3.3 poses separator is placed in the die according to the specifications, so as to ensure its functionality.

CR 3.4 sheet arrangements made with a blade in white and a dressmaker, applying a slight pressure on the anvil.


CR 3.5 the peči creasing are performed using different systems such as cardboards, strips of bakelite, chanel and his stepovers are adjusted depending on the thickness of the support through the use of gauges.

CR 3.6 the seals are determined from the thickness and quality of support, preparing them according to the shape and anchor required for disposal where necessary for their replacement.

CR 3.7 die preparation of operations complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

4 RP: Review by die to test visual observation that corresponds to its plane and its constituent elements are specified.

CR 4.1 die, leftovers, figures and others, measures are checked by verifying that they correspond with the plane and production instructions.

CR 4.2 the cutting blades and cleft are reviewed by checking its location in the die, perpendicularity with the base and notches for fastening the poses.

CR 4.3 die is inspected by replacing, in his case, blades, rubbers and defective relief according to the established process.

CR 4.4 die is handled in accordance with the procedures established by the company, avoiding damage and damage to the same.

CR 4.5 dies are protected and stored according to established norms guaranteeing its preservation and duration.

CR 4.6 times use of the die are recorded in the record sheets specific to indicating the number of hits and machine entries to determine its life through the valuation of recorded data.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment, table with white light, papirometro, sword hygrometer, Vernier caliper, measuring tape, palmer, gauge and durometer shore. Elements of the die: cutting, creasing blades, rubbers, and others. Die-cutting supports: materials paper, cardboard, complexes and others.



Products and results: die full mounted and ready. Support to cutting prepared. Blades cutting and creasing, straps and replacement erasers ready. Stored dies.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and die cutting machines. Drawings and models of distribution, cut and Emboss. Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental. Standards and quality standards. Sheet arrangements.



UNIT of competency 3: Adjust the elements of process and carry out the embossed level: 2 code: UC0695_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: Regular mechanisms of implementation underway of the die-cutting machine in accordance with the technical instructions, the work to be performed and materials to use.

1.1 CR teams and mechanisms of the system of the die-cutting machine is checked to guaranteeing its correspondence with the support to die-cutting, according to the technical requirements and the user manual.

CR 1.2 the proper operation of the machine is checked by reviewing its elements and commissioning, correcting anomalies through the established processes.

CR 1.3 them equipment and mechanisms of the system of evacuation: ejector, needles ejector and separator of poses is checked guaranteeing its operation in correspondence with the support to die-cutting and the product to get.

CR 1.4 elements of position of the die in the die-cutting machine are controlled by checking its adjustment through observation in the parameters of the control panel.

CR 1.5 machine regulation operations are performed in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

2 RP: Adjustment pressures in the die-cutting machine to ensure the machine hit required according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.1 separation between deck and eardrum or anvil is level by ensuring the pressure of the press hit.

2.2 CR cutting and the cleft is level using different hikes, taking into account the thickness of the material to be used.

CR 2.3 the peči avoiding unwanted on the stand to die-cutting marks are lowered and the machine jamming.

CR 2.4 the relief pressure conforms preparing him for the depth and the stamping registration required.

CR 2.5 preparation of pressure adjustment of operations complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Carry out die-cutting, getting the optimum performance of the machine, the quality specified in the work order and compliance with established security standards.

CR 3.1 die cutting machine gets underway by adjusting speed to optimum production requirements and the required parameters for the process and the product graph in course.

CR 3.2 brackets first graphic metal stamping are controlled in sufficient quantity, checking by visual observation log printing, parallelism of cut die and split and absence of defects.

CR 3.3 results of the diecutting process are controlled by observing the following features: clean cuts, depth and width of the split, UWI, drilled and others.

CR 3.4 die cutting process is controlled monitoring supports: cardboard, cardboard, complexes and others, according to samples, plans, sketches and specifications of the work order.

CR 3.5 obtained punched brackets is checked sequentially, contrasting the samples obtained with samples or mock-ups of the graphic product, according to technical specifications.

3.6 CR correction and adjustment of the die-cutting machine is made operating on the elements and mechanisms of power, die cutting and evacuation.

CR 3.7 correction and adjustment of materials is carried out by changing their physical-mechanical characteristics: supplementing hikes, changing coils, reinforcing reliefs and others.

CR 3.8 of stamping operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

4 RP: Ensure the maintenance of first level in the machine die, by applying established procedures.

CR 4.1 components of the die-cutting machine are kept in the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance.

CR 4.2 first level maintenance is carried out according to the plans and registering the data required in the procedures.

CR 4.3 willing lubrication points greased newspaper is carried out according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CR 4.4 operation of circuits and air filters is verified according to maintenance standards.

CR 4.5 all safety devices are checked according to legislation.

CR 4.6 machine elements are maintained in the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance of the company.

CR 4.7 auxiliary elements of suction of dust and cut conform avoiding environmental pollution.

5 RP: Record the data from the die cutting process to contribute to the control of production plans by entering data of incidents, quality and productivity.

CR 5.1 the results and impact of self-control are arranged in tabs of control in this regard for their analysis.

CR 5.2 possible occurrences in the quality observed in the die-cut graphic product such as cracked, means cuts, cuts intermittent and others, are recorded in the parts of production like self-control issues.

CR 5.3 production orders are completed by verifying that specified for the die cutting process productivity coincides with that obtained.

CR 5.4 data obtained from the diecutting process are recorded in the parts of production enabling its analysis in subsequent works.



Professional context: means of production: die-cutting machine. Die. Table with white light, papirometro, sword hygrometer, Vernier caliper, tape measure, palmer, gauge, strip of cleft and durometer shore.



Products and results: design of the stamping machine. Completed control chips. Quality control on die-cut samples. Machine settings. Punched graphic media. First level maintenance.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and die cutting machines. Drawings and models of distribution, cut and Emboss. Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental. Standards and quality standards.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.


-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Hatched.

-Profile of the characters.

-Mark or highlighted on the stand.

-Defects in printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finishing, describing and linking its main phases with machinery, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the functional characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify the structural characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 from samples of graphics products:-recognize its physico-chemical composition and identify their functional capacity.

-Rating the capacity communicative and functional of them different products graphic.

-Classify the samples of products graphic proposals according to their nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify those spaces colour: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in arts graphic.

CE3.2 describe them teams of measure used in the measuring color: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each one of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, temperature of color and conditions of observation to reproduce the color in conditions standardized.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-To assess the differences in color and the possibility of playing in the graphics system.

-Measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating readings on a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 through examples practical, identify the tags of security that appear in the machines and products used in the process graphic.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometers, colorimeters, strips from control and control on production line equipment, identifying its application in different phases of the graphic process.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the features of quality more significant of them products of:-binding and manipulated: valuation subjective, marks of court, footprints, signals of record, glued.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Resistance to the rub.

-Printing: density, ' trapping', gain of stamping, balance of color, pasting, sliding, register.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Maintaining an assertive attitude, empathic and conciliatory with others showing cordiality and kindness in the deal.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of graphics products.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Prepress systems. Original classes. Latent image, development process. Adaptation to the environment of flow of work digital.

Peripheral of entry, peripheral of output, software and hardware specific, processing and systems of testing.

Layout and Assembly. Elements of the Assembly. Software specific.

Systems of printing. Equipment, benefits, comparison of the different systems.

Types of inks and stands for each system of printing.

Binding and processed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and its measuring nature of the light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of the vision.

Space chromatic.

Factors that affect to the perception of the color.

Theory of the color. Synthesis additive and subtractive of the color.

Systems of representation of the color: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3. rules of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in processes of Arts graphic plans and standards of safety.

Standards in force.

Signals and alarms.

Regulatory environment.



4. quality in the processes of Arts graphic trials, instruments and measurements more features.

Quality in prepress: gain of point, balance of gray and density.

Variables of printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, gain of stamping, balance of color and of gray).

Areas of control in the printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of quality.



5 quality control in graphic arts quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control phases: reception of materials, processes and products.

Norms and standards related to the graphic process.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity, which will be using one of the following ways:


-Academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



MODULE training 2: preparation of the die level: 2 code: MF0694_2 associated to the UC: prepare them elements of die-cut in relation to the support to transform duration: 90 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: interpret them procedures of work in the preparation of them elements of the die, starting from orders of production.

CE1.1 make a sequencing of the process of punching through the interpretation of an order of work taken of the reality productive, identifying them materials in each case.

CE1.2 in a so-called practical of assessment of procedures of work for the development of a die, starting from an order of production given:-check that the material to cutting corresponds with the of the order.

-Rating method to use.

-Identify the expected performance.

CE1.3 starting from a hypothetical client, analyze the generated production order data comply with the specifications of the customer.

C2: Check the characteristics of the graphics support to cutting and materials replenishment of the die on the equipment used.

CE2.1 identify the supports used in processes such as paper, cardboard, paperboard die cutting, supports complex and others, valuing its characteristics.

CE2.2 recognize replacement elements used in the production of dies, such as: cutting blades, creasing blades and others.

CE2.3 starting a production order specification check, the amount of the support for die-cutting, quality support - material, flatness and registration status-, physical characteristics, cutting and squaring, repainted and other.

CE2.4 manipulate and treat different types of graphic media for cutting in such a way that its entrance and passage through a given machine will not sustain stoppages or damage.

CE2.5 in a practical course of die cutting from a given work instructions:-make the traceability of the support through the process through its signs and identification.

-Stacking and storing the support die fulfilling a control established for a case practical proposed.

-Identify the replacement of die materials: rubber cutting, creasing blades blades, takeoff, rising and others.

CE2.6 in a practical case of a die, prepare replacement materials sufficient for use where necessary, taking into account the type of support to cutting and its circulation.

C3: Carrying out the preparation of dies according to technical specifications, samples, and support to cutting.

CE3.1 recognize the preparation instructions on the die in different work instructions.

CE3.2 strapping a die according to the shape and anchor required for replacement as needed.

CE3.3 gumming a die in such a way that support non-stick to cutting in the blades.

CE3.4 in a practical course of preparation of a die from a punch and work patterns:-prepare the ejector of leftovers following the guidelines given.

-Ensure the functionality of the separator of poses.

-Make arrangements through a white sheet and a tracing sheet giving the correct pressure of the anvil.

-Perform the peči from split by chanel, cardboards, strips of bakelite and others systems by adjusting their widths using feeler gauges.

C4: Contrasting the die with his model plane to check your correspondence by visual observation and rating that the constituent elements are specified.

CE4.1 interpret an exemplified case of Diecast planes:-measures.

-Surplus.

-Figures.

-Distribution.

CE4.2 review a die respect to his model plane checking that there are no blades or defective reliefs.

CE4.3 in a practical course, die, from the flat model checking:-check the measures compared to the flat die die.

-Assess the elements that make up the die to the plane.

-Check the cutting blades and cleft checking perpendicularity with the base and notches for fastening the poses.

-Record the use of the die to determine lifetime scoring: number of hits, entry into machine and others.

-Use set out in the work of die-cutting measure according to the parameters and variables tools.

CE4.4 by an example taken from the production reality, protect and store dies according to established norms to ensure its conservation and duration.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.2; C2 CE2.2, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 on CE3.4; C4 on CE4.3.

Other capabilities: communicate effectively with the right people at any given time, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.

Get is to the rhythm of work of the Organization interpret and execute instructions of work.



Contents: 1. stands for cutting types of media: paper, cardboard, plastics, materials complexes and others.

Physical and chemical properties of media.

Internal structure.

Composition.

Behavior of the brackets.

Technical specifications for manufacturers leaves.



2. materials for cutting strips.

Blades.

Ejector gums; physical characteristic, types.

Cardboards.

Strips of bakelite.

Chanel.

Replacement materials.



3. preparation of the die distribution plans.

Realization and peči from split settings.

Ejector techiques.

Separator of poses.

Arrangements.

Stacking, storage and signalling.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of the elements of die-cut in relation to the support to transform, which will be credited by using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: preparation and execution of the stamping level: 2 code: MF0695_2 associated with UC: adjust the process elements and carry out the embossed duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: making adjustments in equipment of punching through mechanisms of implementation up and proper operation, in accordance with the technical instructions and production.

CE1.1 identify the elements of the die-cutting machine which acted to make the adjustment: start-up, pressures and unemployment.

CE1.2 regulate the entry of the support system of a machine die cutting, power step getting continued support by machine without stops or deterioration of the material.

CE1.3 in a practical course of adjustment of stamping machine, from stands and work instructions given:-adjust all the elements of the machine and putting up with a correct functioning.

-Adjust the equipment and mechanisms of the evacuation system: ejector, ejector needle, poses and other separator to set support.

CE1.4 in a practical course of adjustment pressures on die-cutting machine, starting from a given graphic support:-adjust the clearance between deck and eardrum to ensure the press beat pressure.

-Level cut and the cleft by measuring the thickness of the graphic support to cutting.

-Lower the peči avoiding unwanted marks and jamming in the machine.

-Adjust the pressure of the relief getting depth and stamping registration required.

C2: Perform the stamping operation, monitoring the quality of the process through sampling, according to specifications and blueprints model.

CE2.1 identify the optimal speed parameters for the execution of embossed on a machine type and the influence of the support in the process.

CE2.2 carry out the embossed with constant parameters of production over different materials and check the results, determining the relationship between parameters and brackets.


CE2.3 perform the process of the die-cut, modifying variables of production and valuing their results for your checking, determining the more appropriate.

CE2.4 in a so-called practical of die-cut of a support graphic, starting from some instructions of production given:-check that the features of the process of die is fit to them parameters of production required speed, desk of controls and others.

-Check the direction of fiber support.

-Select samples according to the marked periodicity.

CE2.5 in a practical course of verification of quality in the process of pressing, from already pressed samples:-check the registration with the printing.

-Check the parallelism of cut and split.

-Check the absence of defect in support.

CE2.6 in a practical course of adjustment of the process of pressing, a supervised samples:-rating in the samples mismatches due to the machine and those due to die and support elements.

-Correct the imbalances, operating on the mechanisms of power, die-cutting or evacuation - correct the imbalances, by modifying the physical-mechanical characteristics of the materials acting on supplements, increases, change of straps, reinforcement of reliefs and others.

C3: Apply first level maintenance on die cutting machines according to maintenance standards.

CE3.1 identify the greasing points arranged in die-cutting machines according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CE3.2 performed the lubrication of lubrication points provided for in the standards of maintenance of die-cutting machine.

CE3.3 check them circuits and filters of air of the machine die cutter according to the standards of maintenance established.

CE3.4 cleaning of the elements set out in the standards of maintenance.

C4: Analyzing plans of labour and environmental risk prevention and the corresponding regulations applicable to correctly use the diecutting process safety equipment and media.

CE4.1 relate and describe safety standards relating to the operations of preparation and adjustment of the elements of the diecutting process.

CE4.2 describe the properties and uses of clothes and personal protective equipment used in the printing industry for the preparation and realization of stamping.

CE4.3 in a practical course for the evaluation of the safety in the die-cutting process, starting from a certain number of prevention plans of labour and environmental risks of processing sector companies:-identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, contained in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe the factors and situations of risk to the health and safety plans.

-Relate and describe appropriate preventive measures and established methods of prevention to avoid accidents.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C4 on CE4.3.

Other capabilities, communicate effectively with the right people at any given time, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.

Get used to the pace of work of the Organization interpret and execute work instructions.



Contents: 1. machines for die-cutting types and use of each type.

Applications of each machine of cutting for each type of graphic product.

Die-cutting in line with machines for manufacturing of Cartonboard, MicroChannel, carton, among others.

Maintenance of first level.

Safety rules for the machinery, equipment and materials.

Factors and situations of risk.

Measures of protection.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2 parts and mechanisms of a machine of cutting starting in March and programming.

The entrance of spreads.

Mechanisms of operation of the machine.

Mounting plate.

Regulation of the die on the roadside Panel.

Pressure settings and balanced.

Output specifications.

Ejection system.

Prevention and environmental protection systems.

Equipment of protection individual.



3. systems of die cutting quality in manufacturing quality control.

The control of quality. Concepts that are involved.

Elements of control.

Phases of control: receipt of materials, processes and products.

Standards of quality applicable.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the setting of the elements of the process and implementation of die-cutting, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex VII professional qualification: professional family graphic product design: graphic arts level: 3 code: ARG219_3 general competence develop graphic projects from the initial specifications of the product, making sketches, selecting and adapting color, images, and fonts, creating graphic elements, mock-ups and final using computer tools, doing budgets according to the characteristics of the project and checking the quality of the finished product.



Competition UC0696_3 units: graphics products UC0697_3 projects: treating images and create graphic elements with the appropriate color management parameters UC0698_3: compose graphic elements, images, and texts according to the theory of typographic architecture and UC0699_3 layout: prepare and verify final Arts for distribution environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the Department of graphic design in graphic arts companies publishing houses and media companies in States of nature public or private, small, medium and large, and irrespective of their legal form, works both self-employed and employed persons. You may have staff occasionally, seasonally or stable. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Productive sectors lies in the productive sectors of graphic industries, manipulated and transformed that design products, packaging, advertising, packaging and any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Graphic art finalists graphic designers model makers training associate (600 hours) training modules MF0696_3: project graphics products (180 hours) MF0697_3: creative editing of images and graphic elements (150 hours) MF0698_3 design: typographic architecture and layout (120 hours) MF0699_3: preparation of final Arts (150 hours) unit of competition 1: develop projects of products graphics level: 3 code : UC0696_3 professional accomplishments and performance criteria: RP 1: determine customer requirements related to the project of graphic product picking them in the report registry, taking into account the needs study.

1.1 CR type of graphic product develop: communication, publishing, packaging and packing, and the number of copies or reproductions, are clearly established with the client according to the objectives and economic conditions.

CR 1.2 characteristics of the final product are established with the client specifying brackets on which it is intended use and budget, and technical requirements according to bracket or brackets to be used: printing, computer, tablet or smartphone, ebook or other.

CR 1.3 data on the client that performs the custom determined evaluating the range of products, the type of services offered and the corporate image: logo, corporate colors, manual and rules of corporate identity of your company.

CR 1.4 described the data on the target, indicating: socio-economic status, age, gender, habits, attitudes and motivations; market research and brief assessment of the competition.

1.5 CR texts, illustrations or images materialize with the client by determining which are contributed and which must be created.

CR 1.6 graphic product colors are specified with the client using samples, measured colorimetric or references of manufacturers.


CR 1.7 minimum information requirements are agreed with the customer, considering according to the type of product: labeling, barcode, composition and expiry date, or any other established legislation.

CR 1.8 characteristics of the product to contain the container and/or packing design, if any, are recorded taking into account the nature, fitness, support, size, shape and toxicity, indicating the characteristics of marking to perform.

CR 1.9 the report record is reviewed with the customer checking that is has of all the information and specifications necessary for the development of the project, including, also, sketches, sketch and samples of any another information graphic provided by the customer.

RP 2: determine the features techniques according to the type of product graphic, of communication, publishing, container or packing, to define them instructions for the realization.

2.1 CR type of support or device display, the required software, the number of inks and printing systems, to use are selected to conform to the objectives, budgetary constraints and the desired quality of the work.

CR 2.2 those formats is determined ensuring is that are compatible with the type of support and the system of printing chosen.

CR 2.3 them conditions of cutting, cleft and folded, is established considering the requirements of the product and the thickness and dimensions of the support.

CR 2.4 them finished is choose depending on the conditions of use and the characteristics of the process, according them with the customer.

CR 2.5 the distribution of elements or conditions of DTP are determined depending on the type of graphic product, the final support the editorial line and the technical and economic conditions of the process.

CR 2.6 of inks, media and finishes are selected taking into account requirements legal, sanitary, environmental, conditions of use and endangerment.

CR 2.7 structural factors in the design of packaging/packaging, are established, according to the resistance, tightness, closure, inviolability, dispensing, ergonomics, versatility and protection against counterfeiting and other.

CR 2.8 instructions relating to the technical characteristics of the product are collected by writing a brief and clear way.

3 RP: Draw the sketches of graphic product design taking into account the characteristics and technical and aesthetic parameters for further development.

CR 3.1 the format of the graphic design product sets looking for its adaptation to the objective determined with the client and the chosen distribution or printing system.

CR 3.2 the graphic elements are harmoniously respecting the espacio-formato in the composition.

CR 3.3 objects are drawn using the techniques of representation and the normalization, and keeping the ratio of the objects represented, through specific programmes or freehand.

CR 3.4 lines of sketches are run only once with clean and uniform strokes.

CR 3.5 them thicknesses of lines is running taking present the rules and the effects desired.

CR 3.6 the shadows and feathering applied considering the limitations of the system of printing or output.

4 RP: Develop sketches of graphic product by applying the basic principles of design to respond to the needs of the customer.

CR 4.1 sketches are prepared on the basis of the parameters set in the previous sketches and the needs for graphic product design.

CR 4.2 sketch design is structured by applying the principles of psychological Association, proximity, similarity, continuity and symmetry material and cultural and respecting the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, stress and rhythm in its composition.

CR 4.3 technical elements that make up the sketch are integrated by applying visual synthesis to combine ideas and materials.

4.4 CR message of the graph of the sketch is developed applying visual speech, looking for simplicity and understanding on the underlying ideas and promoting innovative elements, cultural or contextual information that favor the visual impact.

CR 4.5 the composition of elements of the sketch is done respecting the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, stress and rhythm.

CR 4.6 sketch color applying color theory, respecting the conditions of readability, the principles of harmony, contrast, saturation and inverse proportion.

CR 4.7 the arrangement of texts is carried out taking into account the ergonomic conditions, habits of reading and visual logic: nesting, coherence and meaning.

CR 4.8 design developed in the sketch is liked, checking that it is suitable for reproduction.

RP 5: The budget of the graphic product from specifications, deadlines and the market conditions.

CR 5.1 printing budget is requested by specifying all the graphic product features such as: terms of delivery, size, number of images and color, type of testing and delivery formats.

CR 5.2 postpress budget is requested indicating terms of delivery, number of sheets, binding type, manipulated, peliculados and packaging.

CR 5.3 graphic standards are specified in the budget according to the characteristics of the project and the type of designed graphic product.

CR 5.4 creation budget is made by applying the rates of fees recommended by the professional associations, market conditions and the rates of the company's designer.

CR 5.5 budget is made considering the costs of creating, manufacturing, distribution and the rights of intellectual property and patents or licenses.



Professional context: means of production: graphic design software and equipment. Software for presentations. Image processing software. Budgeting software. Peripheral for printing. Useful and instruments of sketching and drawing.



Products and results: report record. Instructions for the realization and orders of manufacturing. Sketches of product graphics drawn. Sketches of product graphics of communication, publishing, of containers and packaging developed. Budgets made.



Information used or generated: study of needs. Legislation on intellectual property rights. Budget printing. Postpress budget. Delivery times. Original. Color swatches. Media samples. Catalogues. Instructions of the client. Database legislation.



Unit 2 competition: Treat images and create graphics with the suitable level COLOR management parameters: 3 code: UC0697_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: select images files and image banks for inclusion in the project of the graphic product, depending on the needs of the custom and the conditions of use.

CR 1.1 selection criteria to be applied in the search for the images are established from the specifications of the custom established with the customer.

CR 1.2 possible membership of the graphic product proposed to a collection or series is considered, assessing the factors involved in the selection of the images.

CR 1.3 image files or image banks search is carried out by applying parameters and well-defined criteria delimit the results according to established needs.

CR 1.4 images were selected taking into account the technical aspects in terms of digitization and reproduction.

CR 1.5 preset images are tested according to price and intellectual property rights.

CR 1.6 selected images are reviewed by checking that they have the necessary optimal quality for playback.

CR 1.7 selected images are archived, identifying them so as to facilitate its later location in the development of the project.

2 RP: Calibrate, characterize and get color cameras, scanners and monitors profiles, to maintain color consistency in processes of capture and image processing.

CR 2.1 monitor calibration is performed using suitable measurement devices and software, taking into account the standard conditions of observation, the adjustment of brightness and contrast, color temperature and gamma values.

CR 2.2 camera calibration is performed manually or automatic white balance and color through the software settings and specific devices for later use in the creation and management of profiles.

CR 2.3 monitor characterization is done with software and measure appropriate devices, by selecting the number of patches to be used according to the linearity of the device, while maintaining the calibration conditions.

CR 2.4 the characterization of the camera is made by cards recommended by software manufacturers of color management, maintaining the calibration conditions.

CR 2.5 the characterization of the scanner is made by cards standard, registering gamma, black and white point settings, verifying, values colorimetric reference provided by the manufacturer of the letter's characterization.


CR 2.6 monitors, scanners, and cameras color profiles are created using the software of color management, selecting the type of storage model based on the degree of linearity of the device.

3 RP: Capture images using a digital camera, scanner or others to incorporate them into the graphic design by adjusting their values, taking into account the characteristics of the original capture conditions.

CR 3.1 conditions of calibration and color profiles defined during the characterization are maintained in the capture of images.

CR 3.2 the captures of images through camera digital and others, is made adjusting the relationship opening of the diaphragm / speed, depending on the level of lighting and the depth of field desired, adopting them same values that is set to the get the profile.

CR 3.3 the captures of images through scanner is made taking in has the adjustment of the resolution of input to it of output, the system of printing, the factor of enlargement and the type of original: line, tone continuous or dithering.

CR 3.4 the captured images are transformed to a standard color space, once the image has been assigned to the capture device color profile, selecting the purpose of rendering and standard profile type, whereas the main destination of (print or digital device display, or others).

RP 4: correct them images for get the effect desired in his Edition, taking in has its features, the management of the color, the conditions of the environment and the system of printing.

CR 4.1 the monitor it checks, verifying that keeps them conditions of calibration corresponding to the profile used.

CR 4.2 them settings of color in the software of edition of images is performed, by selecting them profiles of color standard in those spaces RGB and CMYK.

CR 4.3 settings color management in image processing software, are made to implement the recommendations of the manufacturers and standardization organizations.

CR 4.4 contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones are controlled by maintaining a proper balance and achieving the desired effects.

CR 4.5 the tonal characteristics of the illustrations are valued, checking that they comply with the actual values, correcting them if necessary.

CR 4.6 artistic effects in the images are created using mergers, filters, layers and other resources of the image processing software.

CR 4.7 grayscale and color balance are reviewed by making sure it is right in the editing and computer processing.

CR 4.8 the final conformity of the images is carried out using the test print or digital devices calibrated and characterized and taking into account the recommendations of the manufacturers and standardization organizations.

CR 4.9 image files formats are adjusted according to the characteristics of the output device or the distribution system.

RP 5: Create the graphic elements using computer design programs to respond to the needs of the project.

CR 5.1 software is checked by carrying out the required settings whereas printing system, compatibility of files, registry problems, unions and intersections, guides, margins, reference lines and others.

CR 5.2 graphic elements are drawn using references to characteristic of objects, control nodes, guides or grid points.

5.3 CR model color: RGB, CMYK, spot colors and other models are selected in the creative process of graphic elements according to their coherence with the selected printing system.

CR 5.4 the creation of elements is developed fulfilling the requirements of a technical nature, the parameters of communication, visual identity and aesthetic specified in the project, by the creative or the customer.

CR 5.5 color for the created image adjustments are performed in program design by applying the principles of color management.

CR 5.6 created widgets page is configured to print according to the desired scale, the thickness of the lines and the sizes of the dimensions and texts.

CR 5.7 print settings are carried out taking into account frequencies, screen angles, and conversions between color spaces established in the graphic creation.

CR 5.8 created graphic elements are valued by checking compliance with the artistic, communication and corporate identity requirements established in the project.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Bank of images. Color management software. Digital cameras. Scanners. Testers. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Color measurement devices. Densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Multimedia devices: tablets, smartphones and others.



Products and results: selected images. Cameras and other calibrated, color profiles and characterized. Monitors calibrated and characterized with color profiles. Scanners calibrated and characterized with color profiles. Images created. Corrected images. Calibrated test devices. Digital files on different storage media. Tests printed and digital revised.



Used or generated information: normalization on color. Patches and color charts. Letters of characterization. Technical specifications of the manufacturer. Specifications of possible printing systems. The received custom specifications. Samples of paper and other media. Try color or configuration. Digital and analog models.



UNIT of competency 3: COMPOSING graphic elements, images and texts according to the theory of the TYPOGRAPHIC architecture and layout level: 3 code: UC0698_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: define and master pages for the layout of the graphic product, using desktop publishing programs, taking into account the technical and communication needs reflected in the sketches.

CR 1.1 structure of the master page is established considering the characteristics of the editorial product: books, magazines, newspapers, deployable and brochures, large format.

CR 1.2 composition of the elements is done as shown in the sketch, by applying the theory of graphic architecture and layout.

CR 1.3 margins, boxes of content and all the graphic elements are defined in the master page, determining the style of product unit.

1.4 CR margins and lines of the page reference teacher or models are marked on the master page by adjusting the conditions of cutting, folding or binding which take the graphic product.

2 RP: Select typefaces to get the effects desired, taking into account the typographic architecture layout and final stand, creating style sheets if necessary.

CR 2.1 typographical characters are selected according to their interaction with the image, support or display device, stamping and aesthetic criteria.

CR 2.2 fonts are chosen considering its availability and cost according to the parameters set in the project.

CR 2.3 text harmonises body, style and font family, applying the rules of composition and spelling.

CR 2.4 paragraph settings are performed using indents, tabs, leadings, widows, orphans and the standard methods of partition and justification.

CR 2.5 selected texts are reviewed by adjusting proportions, Finials, grids, readability, kern, track, alignment, line spacing, groupings and paragraphs and creating style sheets if necessary.

3 RP: Develop test models to display the product depending on the type of graphic product graphic.

3.1 CR test for packaging mock-up is made indicating their specific characteristics such as: number of bends, creases, closures and interior volume of the package among others.

3.2 CR model of the editorial product is made by marking their specific characteristics such as number of columns, holders, boxes, families and typefaces and others.

CR 3.3 model of graphic communication products is carried out by checking its specific characteristics such as format, color values and others.

CR 3.4 creative elements which can improve the results are incorporated into the model of test according to the type of product and type of target audience.

RP 4: Obtain the final model of the graphics product for the customer's approval, incorporating graphic elements, texts and images.

CR 4.1 image boxes are located and dimensioned correctly in the demo pages, keeping the established margins.

CR 4.2 images are trimmed and fit to take account of its size and the box.

CR 4.3 display of the layout program color settings are checked taking into account the principles of color management and workflow.

CR 4.4 the contouring of the image boxes conforms to the graphic elements depending on the desired effect.

CR 4.5 text boxes are linked so that the text flows and can be modified easily.

CR 4.6 final layout is checked, valuing that it fits the customer's needs and production needs.




Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Software of layout. Systems of storage. Monitors. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Multimedia devices: tablets and smartphones, and others.



Products and results: master pages. Selected typefaces. Style sheet. Tight paragraphs. Test models. Revised texts. Models final of: products graphics of communication, products graphics publishing and products graphic of containers and packaging. Squared and framed images. Digital files on different storage media. Printed and digital evidence.



Used or generated information: spelling rules. Sketches of graphic product. Information on workflows. Samples of color, paper or other media. Viewing, recording and printing specifications.



Unit 4 competition: Prepare and verify Arts late for your distribution level: 3 code: UC0699_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: check all the elements involved in the graphic product design to ensure its reliability, analyzing the tests performed.

CR 1.1 type testing to be carried out to check the quality of the design are selected considering the reliability of the results through the control of materials, processes and cost.

CR 1.2 reproduction of color tests visual checks and colorimetrically using strips of control, checking density, contrast, color balance and gray balance.

CR 1.3 texts and composition in the test are checked and corrected, applying the principles of the proofreading and using the standard signs of correction.

CR 1.4 possible variations between the test and the originals are checked by observing the color, text and layout.

CR 1.5 them tweaks required is indicated in the test, pointing with clarity the errors observed.

RP 2: Incorporate all specifications and necessary elements to the final art, developing prototypes if required, for the manufacture of the product graphic.

CR 2.1 the elements necessary for the manufacture of the product: original, fonts, colors, die-cut lines, profiles of color and other elements are enclosed in the final art.

CR 2.2 the technical feasibility of designed graphic product is verified using a computer check-up program.

CR 2.3 brackets and established formats are reviewed by checking that they are compatible with the workflow.

CR 2.4 samples of color and necessary role are included in the artwork, indicating their characteristics to be used by the printer.

CR 2.5 the functionality of the product is verified by creating, if necessary, the prototype of the graphic product.

CR 2.6 digital originals are archived for playback fulfilling the recommendations of the applicable quality standards the guidelines on preparation, delivery and receipt of originals for graphic production.

3 RP: Adjust and retouch the final art for distribution and publication in printed or digital support, taking into account the particularities of the output for which is intended.

CR 3.1 images are compressed with compression factor appropriate to the medium and the method in which are going to distribute or publish.

CR 3.2 fonts are embedded or conform to avoiding incompatibility issues.

CR 3.3 format and file size are adjusted to adapting them to the means of distribution and publication in different media: print, website, e-book, applications (App), interactive PDF, and others.

CR 3.4 it presentation graphic of the different versions is valued, checking its operation in different platforms digital: Web page, application (App), PDF interactive, and others.

4 RP: Perform the quality control of the final product to check the execution of the indications made in the final art, verifying that it meets the needs of the report record.

CR 4.1 the color reproduction is controlled by: densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer, verifying amongst others the contrast, density, gray balance, balance of color and colorimetric colour reference values.

CR 4.2 brackets are checked by verifying that the values of weight and dimension record correspond to those indicated in the report.

CR 4.3 printed reproduction is verified by testers, by determining the absence of defects in registry, started or specks.

CR 4.4 printed finished product is inspected by checking the correct execution of finishes, bent, split, binding and others according to the design project.

CR 4.5 digital product is verified by controlling their behavior on all platforms of distribution laid down and checking the different elements of the associated design.

CR 4.6 final product is evaluated, checking that it meets the expectations or needs of the client, according to the indications of the custom.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Storage systems. Scanners. Cameras digital and others. Check-up programs. Workflows. Color measurement devices. Testing equipment. Layout software. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Tipometros. Linen testers. Densitometer. Colorimeter. Spectrophotometer. Multimedia devices: tablets, smartphones and others.



Products and results: hard proofs of the design. Prototypes. Verified final arts. Retouched final arts. Images in compressed format. Digital on different storage systems files. Graphic presentations for different media. Quality control of the different types of final Arts in different platforms.



Used or generated information: specifications for manufacture and needed retouching. Workflow. Information about media and formats. Paper and color samples. Original digital. Specifications of the colour of the printing. Legislation applicable of quality and features of the platform of distribution. Models, models analog and digital, tests and others.



TRAINING module 1: project of product graphics level: 3 code: MF0696_3 associated with UC: develop projects of graphics products duration: 180 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: draw up instructions for the creation of graphics products from so-called customers commissioned.

CE1.1 configure the settings of a report log type, determining aspects and sections that should be seen.

CE1.2 list the characteristics of a product or service sold by a company that should be taken into account when preparing an offer of commercial graphics product.

CE1.3 in a practical course of elaboration of instructions on a graphic product from a characterized custom design:-perform needs study collecting data of customer, product and target audience.

-Analyze the sources of information and documentation.

-Draw up instructions for the realization of the graphic product in a brief and clear way, collecting in a report log.

CE1.4 specify the characteristics of different colors using samples or measures colorimetric.

CE1.5 Select inks, media and finishing, noting the main rules on labelling of products and the legal, health and environmental requirements.

CE1.6 identify the main procedures of security against copying and falsification of documents.

CE1.7 in a practical course of selection of colors for a design type, different samples:-select colors using process color charts.

-Select the samples of spot colors most frequently used in graphic arts.

-Find in the catalogues the trade reference of the selected color.

CE1.8 analyze the corporate identity elements to be considered in the design of a graphic product from a manual of identity and a so-called Commission properly characterized.

C2: Rating the technical parameters required for the elaboration of different graphics products.

CE2.1 identify the formats compatible with the types of stands, display devices and most common printing systems.

CE2.2 Select the type of stand, number of inks and printing, from a practical course duly characterized systems, adjusting to budgetary constraints and the quality of the working press.

CE2.3 select the main binding methods and their implications in terms of price, terms, conditions of use, dimensions and characteristics of the process.

CE2.4 apply the conditions of cut, split and folding to a design depending on the thickness, the dimensions of the stand and the process conditions.

CE2.5 evaluate the necessary finishing a graphic product, depending on the conditions of use and the characteristics of the process.

CE2.6 determining the conditions of combining an editorial product, according to their characteristics, the conditions of the reproduction or display and the editorial process.

C3: Draw graphics products sketch free hand, applying the most appropriate techniques and taking into account the characteristics and parameters of a given product.


CE3.1 determine the format more suitable to a type of product graphics to develop and to the system of distribution or of printing chosen.

CE3.2 in a practical course of preparation of the outline of a graphic product, from technical specifications:-adjust the drawing scale to the chosen output format.

-Distribute harmoniously graphics elements in the composition, respecting the espacio-formato.

-Draw using the systems of representation and drawing standards.

CE3.3 draw freehand sketch while maintaining the proportion of the objects represented, using lines clean and uniform and, in their case, by applying the thickness recommended by the standards of drawing.

C4: Develop sketches for the realization of a graphic project from so-called instructions, suitable for playback computer and/or manual procedures.

CE4.1 develop a sketch by applying techniques of sketching.

CE4.2 determine, on proposed sketches, if met minimum conditions for legibility with regard to typography and use of color.

CE4.3 in a practical course of sketches from a given project valuation:-analyze whether elaborate sketches simply reflect the underlying concepts, if you have visual impact and the reasons for it.

-Consider whether the elaborate sketches meet the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, stress and rhythm.

-Adapt them sketches given to those systems of printing more common, taking in has them demands technical of each one.

CE4.4 in a practical course of elaboration of sketches, from different types of graphics to products:-develop a sketch of a publishing product from the given type of the product.

-To develop the graphical component of a container or package from the typology of the product given.

-To develop the outline of a communication product from the typology of the product given.

CE4.5 prepare sketches elaborated previously for submission to a so-called client.

C5: Prepare estimates of graphic projects, properly characterized, making the planning, assessing costs and times.

CE5.1 consider and account for the costs in terms of intellectual property rights involving a so-called type graphic design work.

CE5.2 in a practical course of budgeting for the reproduction of a graphic product, starting from the given project:-assess the costs of the processes of creation, production and distribution and the materials.

-Classify the costs incurred by the proposed work, depending on their nature.

-Plan temporarily carrying out the proposed order, setting deadlines according to the plans of the company and the conditions imposed by each supplier.

-Make the budget by referring to market conditions and recommended rates.

-Distribute the resources available for a company from a so-called working given plan.

CE5.3 ensure the viability of an alleged proposal to the client by adjusting costs and times.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.7; C2 concerning CE2.2, CE2.4 and CE2.6; C3 on CE3.2; C4 CE4.3 and CE4.4; C5 regarding CE5.2.

Other capabilities: responsibility is of the work that develops and of the fulfillment of objectives.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Complete the work according to criteria of fitness, speed, economy and efficiency.

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Sharing information with the team.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand those changes.



Contents: 1. methodology of the project graphic delimitation of the requirements of the customer. Report record.

Methods of search and sources of information.

Knowledge of the market: materials and services.

Guidelines for the preparation of the instructions for the realization.

Process of realization: techniques of activization of the creativity.

Methods for the proposal and selection of solutions.

Techniques of presentation.

Planning of tasks.

Distribution of resources.

Preparation of offers and budgets: calculation and planning of costs. Estimation of times. Contracting and subcontracting of services graphics.



2. foundations creative and technical of the design graphic elements of the design graphic: lines, flat, volumes, text, color, size and shape.

Principles of composition: repetition, structure, similarity, gradation, radiation, contrast, texture and perspective.

Bases of the synthesis visual: simplicity, clarity, aesthetics and impact visual.

Components of the impact visual: innovation, information, context, scale, movement, colour and contrast.

Conditions ergonomic: readability and habits of reading.

Available titles and illustrations.

Fonts: components and families.

Criteria for the selection of fonts in design graphic.

Theories of the color. Symbolism associated to those colors.

Principles, features technical, formats, equipment and fields of application of the systems of printing: offset, gravure, flexo, screen printing, printing digital.

Procedures and systems against the copy and the falsification of documents.

The influence of the system of printing in the features of the design.

Phases of the design graphic.



3. materials raw and stands of the product graphic classification of stands for printing.

Paper supports: components.

The paper manufacturing processes: preparation and manufacture of pasta, laminated, calendered, coated and finished.

Paper types and fields of application.

Specifications for the purchase of paper.

Inks: types and features.

Interaction papel-tinta in print.

Other types of support: features, processes, and printing problems.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Conditions of labelling of commercial products.



4. communication and corporate identity theory of communication and communication strategies.

Brand: concepts, functions, evolution and types.

Requirements of the brand: legibility, originality and expressiveness.

Figuration and abstraction. Simplicity front accumulation of concepts.

Graphic design's visual identity: logos and graphic symbols.

Corporate identity manual. Definitions, content and presentation.

Rules for the preparation of the corporate identity manual.

Applications of the visual identity to the design of promotional products.



5 techniques of expression and graphic design basics.

Drawing freehand. Sketch.

Tools of graphic expression.

Principles of sketching.

Composition and color.

Techniques of representation.

Drawing industrial and standardization.

Working procedures.

Equipment and specific software.



6 design graphic editorial editorial product classification.

Publishing lines.

Preparation of sketches.

Composition of an editorial product.

Guidelines for the design of an editorial product.

Manufacturing process.

Workshop design: graphic design from a magazine and a book.



7. graphic design for packaging and wrapping basics.

Factors to be considered in the design of packaging.

Preparation of sketches.

Normative. Applicable environmental and labour risk prevention.

Design methodology.

Graphical analysis.

Manufacturing process.

Workshop design: graphic design of a container and packaging.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the development of projects of graphics products, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: Edition creative of images and design elements graphics level: 3 code: MF0697_3 associated with UC: treating images and create graphic elements with the appropriate color management parameters duration: 150 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: determine the images to include in a graphic project, according to instructions given for its realization.

CE1.1 set the criteria of choice of images to include in a project from alleged instructions to create.

CE1.2 Select the source of obtaining of images right from a so-called budgetary constraints and resources.

CE1.3 determine the technical characteristics of several proposed images.


CE1.4 classify a set of images given depending on their nature, analyzing the language specific of each a.

CE1.5 in a practical course of selection of images for incorporation into a project, from a few instructions:-assess the adequacy of a set of images to the project established.

-Determine the price of the proposed images.

-Calculate the costs in terms of intellectual property of the proposed images.

CE1.6 determine the inclusion of an image in a project type based on its price and the costs of intellectual property, from a so-called budgetary constraints.

C2: Reproduce the color workflows to obtain the graphic product, maintaining coherence and taking into account the basis of Colorimetry and color management principles.

CE2.1 apply the principles and concepts related to the color vision, analysing the main factors and phenomena which depends, in a particular case.

CE2.2 make colour measurements using specific equipment: densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers, applying the principles and bases of color measurement.

CE2.3 Exchange specifications of color from one color space to another by means of computer tools.

CE2.4 use the main rules on standard conditions for viewing and comparison of established a certain original and reproductions.

CE2.5 interpret the causes of the lack of consistency in processes or workflows in a graphic product colour reproduction.

CE2.6 explain the particularities of measuring the color differences and different current models in an original type.

CE2.7 measure color differences between different originals and reproductions using colorimeters or spectrophotometers with the help of computer utilities.

CE2.8 in a practical course of color, from a given workflow management:-describe the need and principles of color management systems that are to be used.

-Identify the different phases for the implementation of the management system of color: calibration, characterization and generation of profiles and use.

-Apply different quality standards on the use of management systems of color.

-Characterizing devices of input, output and visualization through charts, utilities, and color management software.

-Adjust the programmes of color management for the production of profiles, according to the recommendations of the standards and the same programs.

-Adjust graphic design, color and layout editing programs to get the greater possible consistency according to the obtained profiles, calibration conditions and characteristics of devices involved in the workflow input, output and display.

C3: Capture and edit images by adjusting the technical parameters and maintaining conditions of calibration and color profiles given to create.

CE3.1 capture different images using a scanner by setting the output resolution to a printing system and a given magnification factor.

CE3.2 capture different images using a digital camera by adjusting the zoom, the diaphragm/speed ratio and lighting, according to effects to get dies.

CE3.3 in a practical course of editing of images, from a few instructions:-treat the images proposed by computer procedures for adjustment to the instructions for the creation.

-Rating it correction of the images proposed and adjust the balance of white, depth of color and range of color to get a certain quality of reproduction.

-Integrate different images given creating assemblies merged and effects creative without relating real.

CE3.4 edit and a correct balance of grayscale and color in a series of proposed images.

CE3.5 make them settings of management of the color of the program computer of treatment of images, following the recommendations of them manufacturers and the organizations of normalization.

CE3.6 determine the compliance end of a set of images proposed through testers correctly calibrated and characterized, according to the manufacturers instructions and standardization organizations.

CE3.7 determine the most appropriate computer file depending on different applications of the image and software proposed.

CE3.8 adjust the technical parameters of an image to the more common printing systems.

C4: Develop creations of graphic elements, using design programs and considering systems of image reproduction.

CE4.1 reproduce an illustration or a graphic motif given through computer procedures.

CE4.2 adapting an illustration or graphic reason given to alleged instructions to create.

CE4.3 in a so-called graphical creation of images, from a few instructions:-adjust the preferences of the computer program: registration, reference lines, margins and guides to a so-called work to develop properly characterized.

-The page setup so that the image is printed to the desired scale, respecting thicknesses of line, colors and dimensions dimensions and texts.

-Draw of reality objects in the graphic design program, proportion and scale.

-Drawing elements graphic using references to points characteristic of those objects, nodes of control, guides or grids.

-Correctly the adjustment of color in the design program, taking into account the principles of color management.

-Create, select or modify color specifications, taking into account the characteristics of the printing or distribution systems.

-Apply shadows, wefts or degraded, taking into account the limitations of the system of printing or output.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 regarding CE2.8; C3 on CE3.3; C4 on CE4.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the fulfilment of the objectives and the work that develops.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical/professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work performed.

Sharing information with the team.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Demonstrate interest in the knowledge of the Organization and its processes.



Contents: 1. images and image types capture systems: photography or illustration.

Concepts of photography.

Evolution of the graphic image.

Technical evaluation of the image.

Image banks. Intellectual property.

Technical characteristics of the scanners. Resolution and color depth.

Technical characteristics of digital cameras: resolution, depth of color, sensitivity and white balance control.

Scanners and cameras: how-to use.

Principles colorimetric digital cameras and scanners.



2 Colorimetry and color color management: nature, space and color coordinates.

Uniform color models. Models of colour perception. Factors that affect perception.

Color measurement instruments: densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers.

The quality of the image: depth of color, white balance, color gamma, contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones.

The problem of the color reproduction.

Elements of the color management: profiles and color for different platforms management module.

Recommendations for the specification and color management.

Color in the workflow settings.

Color management: calibration and characterization, scanner, camera and display device profiles obtain.



3 capture and analysis of images using computer tools tools: vector and raster.

Computer image files formats. Fields of application.

Adjustment of the display device. Conditions and rules for consideration of a computer as a test device monitor soft.

The program settings: resolution of input, color depth, color model and color management.

Image capture. Determination of white point, black point, gamma and white balance. Choice of manual or automatic adjustment.

Analysis of the image. Contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones. Gray balance. Color balance.

Adjustment of images: editing tools. Scanning with new settings.



4. digital image editing image processing. Modification of picture, resolution, and color space sizes.

Working with channels. Process colors, spot colors, and six.

Adjustments of contrast, gray balance, balance of color, brightness and saturation.

Selective color correction in color-editing program or program of color management.

Filters: destramado, focus, blur.

Fiddling, gradients, molten and feathering.

File storage. Formats and fields of application. Use depending on the number of channels and the degree of compression.

Print settings. Frequencies, output resolutions and screen angles. Choice of color space of output, color management settings and PostScript settings.

Color proofs. Rules and recommendations for obtaining and acceptance.



5. graphic design through specific programmes basic concepts.


Tools available on the market.

Stages of the design of a graphic element.

Configuration of computer aided graphic design programs. Formats, guides and grids.

Administrator of colors. Color management. Emulation modes.

Methods of specification of the color in a graphic design program: RGB, CMYK, color planes.

Design tools.

Editing tools.

Sketching digital.

Lights, shadows and textures.

Application of color to objects.

Printing.

Storage of files.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1.-domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the treatment of images and the creation of elements graphics with them parameters of management of color suitable, that is credited by an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 2 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top), engineering technical, architecture technical , Diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: TYPOGRAPHIC architecture and layout level: 3 code: MF0698_3 associated with UC: compose graphic elements, images, and texts according to the theory of typographic architecture and layout duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: create master pages, sorting and classifying spaces, from a given sketch, using a computer program's layout.

CE1.1 set the criteria of layout from the reading of alleged instructions to carry out.

CE1.2 sorting and classifying spaces of page determining margins, length of lines, number of columns, and leading to a graphic project type.

CE1.3 in a practical course of creation of master pages from instructions of the graphic to make product and your sketch:-create master pages, taking into account the needs of different graphics products: communication, publishers and packaging and packaging.

-Carry out the master page using a specific layout according to the given graphic product program.

-Order the spaces in the master page according to the instructions of the sketch of the given graphic product: margins, cutting lines and white page.

-Corrected, applying the principles of layout and the distribution of the spaces in the proposed models.

CE1.4 adapt a model given to types of folding and bound more frequently used in the production of graphics products.

C2: Select fonts and create style sheets, based on alleged instructions for its completion.

CE2.1 classify a set of fonts based on aesthetics, analyzing its communicative power.

CE2.2 identify the most common typefaces from its characteristic features.

CE2.3 determine the readability of a font given to different sizes, reading distances, printing systems, display devices and color of letter and background combinations.

CE2.4 determine the cost of the use of a series of given fonts.

CE2.5 determine the availability of a group of sources given, both in the designer environment and in the subsequent processes of filming.

CE2.6 assess the readability, aesthetics, cost and availability in certain selected sources.

CE2.7 define leaves of style, defining sizes, style of text, thickness of the stroke, width of the characters, inclination and colors for a model given.

C3: Distribute texts and images by applying the parameters established in a designed model.

CE3.1 include multiple images and texts in various proposed models.

CE3.2 trim and fit several images given within proposed image boxes.

CE3.3 link different text boxes so that text flows between them properly.

CE3.4 assign to each paragraph the text style that suits you, according to different style sheets proposals.

CE3.5 in a practical simulation of distribution of texts and images, based on the model and given instructions:-adjust the texts of the model for a correct visualization, modifying partition, kerning and justification methods.

CE3.6 in a practical course of definition of display settings of the color in the layout program taking into account the principles of color and a proposed workflow management:-adjust layout depending on different display, recording and printing processes proposed program.

-Adjust the layout program to the development of a communication to be reproduced printed product or by digital means.

-Adjust the layout program to the development of an editorial to be reproduced printed product or by digital means.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 regarding CE2.7; C3 on CE3.5 and CE3.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the fulfilment of the objectives and the work that develops.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical/professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work performed.

Demonstrate interest in the knowledge of the Organization and its processes.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Adapt to new contexts or situations.



Contents: 1. Introduction to typography typographic architecture.

Parts of the type. Tipometria.

Visual variables of typography: thickness of the stroke, expansion or condensation, and others.

Classification of typefaces.

The rights of intellectual property in the use of fonts.

Criteria of readability.

Typography and color.

General criteria for the selection of fonts in a document.

Problems in the selection of typefaces by computer according to platforms.



2 layout and composition of the General principles of layout page.

Rationale: methods and parameters.

Distribution of the blank space. Typographic color.

Distribution of the text on an image. Arracacia and travel.

Capitulares, indents and tab.

Columns, margins, line spacing and line length.

Style sheets.

Typographic aesthetic. Widows and orphans, interletrado pairs and optical alignment.

Size of page and proportions.

Structure of the model: margins and reticle.

Layout styles.

Parts of an editorial product.



3 tools equipment and layout concepts specific programs related to layout and desktop publishing computer.

The program settings. Text and image boxes. Bonding.

Creation of master pages: numbering, division of documents into sections.

Master pages define according to the editorial product.

Work with text flows and columns.

Text settings: attributes of characters, paragraphs, alignment and indents, line spacing and space between paragraphs, attributes tab.

Control over words partition, justification of text and lines widows and orphans.

Scroll of text around graphics and image boxes.

Import, manipulation and export of images.

Management of color in layout programs.

Print settings. Settings of the digital version.

Specifying settings for film, print, or convert to digital format.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the composition of graphic elements, images, and texts according to the theory of typographic architecture and layout, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture , Diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 4: preparation of final Arts level: 3 code: MF0699_3






Associated to the UC: prepare and verify Arts late for your distribution duration: 150 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: analyze evidence of design of a product graphic controlling its correct reproduction.

CE1.1 classify evidence according to their degree of reliability and cost-based hardware or software.

CE1.2 check in a visual way, using a colorimeter or spectrophotometer color a given printing test playback, using strips of control to verify density, contrast, balance of grayscale and color balance.

CE1.3 reviewed texts and the composition of a supposed proof of a product online on the screen.

CE1.4 use established standards to indicate the adjustments in an alleged test.

C2: Elaborate artwork and the prototype of a graphic product, attaching instructions, files and materials necessary for proper playback.

CE2.1 create a so-called final art project chart.

CE2.2 test the feasibility of a so-called final art through tools of verification or check-up.

CE2.3 adjust brackets and a final art to various workflows proposed formats.

CE2.4 determine the convenience of attaching samples of color and paper to the final art of a given project.

CE2.5 create prototypes using different methods for a graphic project type.

C3: Adapt the final art of a designed graphic product preparing it for distribution in digital format 'offline' and 'online'.

CE3.1 compress a series of given images, using the method and best suited to the most common distribution media compression factor.

CE3.2 adapt the format and the size of various files proposed to them means of distribution more frequent.

CE3.3 in a so-called practical of adaptation of Arts end of products graphics to different platforms, starting from some instructions given:-adapt the art end for its printing in support role.

-Adapt the final art for proposed to their presentation on the screen.

-Check the sources, images and others, in both art end of product graphics.

CE3.4 check the performance of a design web given on different platforms and browsers.

CE3.5 check the performance of a design type in format digital to in different platforms: PDAs, tablets, smartphones and others.

CE3.6 check the functionality of a design for e-book and in different formats on different proposals digital platforms.

C4: Check the quality of a graphic product, checking and verifying your correspondence with a report data type record.

CE4.1 control the reproduction of the color of a graphic product, densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer, verifying contrast, density, gray balance, balance of color and the colors of reference colorimetric values.

CE4.2 check weights and dimensions of a set of proposed graphics products, ensuring that they conform to a defined parameters.

CE4.3 check, linen testers, the absence of defects in registration, ripped or specks on a given finished products.

CE4.4 check finishes, bent, split and the binding of several finished products given.

CE4.5 Verify the operation of the design in different browsers and platforms of various finished products given.

Skills whose acquisition should be completed in an environment real of work: C1 respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.2 and CE2.5; C3 on CE3.3, CE3.4, CE3.5 and CE3.6; C4 concerning CE4.1 and CE4.5 other capabilities: be responsible for the fulfilment of the objectives and the work that develops.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical/professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work performed.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.

Sharing information with the team.

Promote the professional and personal development in the content team: 1. final and prototypes components of the finished craft: original, fonts, color profiles, samples of paper and others.

Quality standards on the delivery of digital originals for graphic production.

Digital formats of images and documents (TIFF-IT, EPS, PDF, JDF, and others).

Adaptation of the finished craft to the exhaust system.

Verification of the suitability of the finished craft using check-up programs.

Kinds of prototypes: advantages and disadvantages.

Development of digital and physical prototyping: materials and production phases.



2 digital environment in the digital environment design introduction: technical constraints.

Online and offline distribution.

Digital services on the Internet.

Differences between print design and digital design: resolution, fonts, and others.

Tools for the generation of digital documents or books.

Adjustments of the conversion to electronic format programs: resolutions, frequencies, factors of image compression, font embedding, color and other management.

Computer files in the digital environment and limitations with regard to the format.

Basic principles of digital graphic communication.

Check the operation of the application in different browsers and platforms.



3. types of tests hard proofs.

Revision of texts and the layout in printed proofs.

Orthotypographic rules: grammatical theory. Literary writing. Syntax. Spelling.

Correction of tests and symbolism. Rules on signs of correction.

Check the reproduction of color in hard proofs. Use of control strips.

Rules for the indication of corrections printed tests.



4 quality control in preparation of final Arts Control of raw materials: films, plates, ink and stands.

The image on the plate CTP quality.

Color control: densitometry, Colorimetry and spectrophotometry.

Standardization of printing processes. Applicable quality standards.

Standardization of the finishing processes. Applicable quality standards.

In the film image quality: gain point, tune-up and contrast.

Behavior of ink: transfer, monochromatic deviation error tone, grayness and adicionabilidad.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation and verification of final Arts for distribution, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex VIII professional qualification: taxation and how to obtain printer professional family: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG288_2 general competence to the imposition and filming of graphics products and to obtain forms printers using digital or conventional systems, ensuring its proper reproduction and treatment with respect to the various devices and printing systems, binding and transformed and intervening in the graphic process according to established quality and productivity.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0920_2: make the imposition and filming of the graphic works UC0921_2: obtain forms printers using direct digital systems UC0922_2: obtain forms printers for offset, flexo, screen printing and pad printing by the conventional method UC0923_2: obtain a printer for rotogravure printing environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in prepress in graphic companies to obtain forms printers for all printing systems. In entities of nature, public or private, small, medium and large size and irrespective of their legal form, usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. You may occasionally have people in charge and/or be team leader. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and processed that are dedicated to obtaining forms printers or printing companies which obtained the form printer in process and in any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and relevant jobs




The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs of work is used with character generic and all-inclusive of women and men.

Technical in imposition digital operators of equipment of filming of computer to iron (computer to plate-CTP) operators of equipment of filming of computer to film (computer to film-CTF) operators of equipment of filming of computer to screen (computer to screen-CTS) operators of equipment of filming of computer to Photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP) assemblers in digital preparers of forms printers Trazadores-montadores pins of forms printers preparers of cylinders of gravure engravers of cylinders Confeccionadores of screens screenprinting

Packers of cliches clichés associated with training (450 hours) training modules MF0200_2 tampograficos Confeccionadores flexographic: processes in graphic arts (120 hours) MF0920_2: imposition and filming of the graphic work (90 hours) MF0921_2: obtain forms printers using direct digital systems (90 hours) MF0922_2: obtain forms printers for offset, flexo, screen printing and pad printing by the conventional method (90 hours) MF0923_2 : How obtaining printer for rotogravure printing (60 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process chart in conditions of security, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: determine the characteristics of the graphics products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the items available and the applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 them products graphics is identified starting from the data provided by them original, sketches and mock-ups, responding to them specifications technical established.

CR 1.2 the specifications on the product graphic to make is value identifying its typology and its features functional and communicative-use of the product, normative applicable and others-.

CR 1.3 them relations functional and technological of the product graphic to perform is established according to their elements components: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 the phases required for the reproduction of the product graphic: prepress, printing binding and finished, is set starting from their specifications, introducing them data in the flow of work.

RP 2: make the standardization of them parameters of production in them flows of work for each phase of the product graphic, in accordance with the specifications established.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

CR 2.3 them parameters and elements of manufacturing of the product graphic in the different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and processed, is checked according to the specifications technical.

CR 2.4 the environment productive in each an of the phases of the process graphic is determined starting from them specifications technical established.

CR 2.5 the follow-up of the process graphic is done through flows of work facilitating the planning, automation, them procedures and others factors that affect to the environment of the production.

CR 2.6 incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following the established procedures to take corrective and preventive measures.

3 RP: Verify the parameters of quality in the process through specific equipment to obtain the product with established standards.

CR 3.1 characteristics of quality most significant in each of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and set attributes.

CR 3.2 the graphic product in process checks, verifying that it meets the fundamental concepts of quality in all the phases of manufacture according to the norms and standards.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Printer digital. Communication standards. Workflows. Standard light mixer. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Chips techniques of equipment. Maintenance manuals. The company's quality control plans.



Unit 2 competition: Make the imposition and FILMING of the graphic work level: 2 code: UC0920_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: determine specifications to generate the imposition of digital or conventional form of graphic products from the job specifications.

CR 1.1 work production criteria are defined by specifying its characteristics and technical characteristics, depending on its dimensions and shape, page format and the definition of the graphic structure.

CR 1.2 technical specifications about the printing system, production flow and characteristics of systems creating the shape printer are valued considering its impact on the taxation of labour.

CR printer, maximum work area is 1.3 or minimum, clamp and clamp margins and other variables according to the particularities of the printing machine, are determined according to established specifications.

CR 1.4 imposition criteria are set according to the processes and characteristics necessary to produce the graphical product finishing and binding.

CR 1.5 them different types of paths that can contain the imposition and them mounts is determined considering them special features of the product and the possibility of use different systems and machines of printing and/or different systems of finished.

CR 1.6 digital files are checked by verifying compliance with all the requirements to generate the imposition of digital or conventional form of graphic products, from the job specifications.

2 RP: Make the necessary paths to the digital imposition or the Assembly of the color separations, in the conventional way, taking into account the technical specifications of the form creation printer, printing and finishing processes.

2.1 CR data on how printer such as: minimum and maximum work area both paper and printing, margins of clamp and clamp and other variables are identified by assessing the peculiarities of the printing machine.

CR 2.2 paths of imposition of the color separations are established on the basis of the technical characteristics of the systems of binding and finishing defined for graphic product, such as the development of booklets, your folding and paging depending on the type of binding.

2.3 CR path for special graphics products: packaging, and punched forms is performed to the verse (side A) or recto (side B), optimizing the maximum print area and taking into account the technical characteristics of finishing machines.

2.4 CR brands of information necessary for the control and adjustment of the shape printer, they join in the conventional imposition the astralon performing Assembly of pages and applying to the same color-coding for each item: lines, brands and others.

CR 2.5 different brands of registry, cut, folded or flat are incorporated into the development of the path by defining dimensions of bending and cutting, print heels, signatures, dimensions for folding, die lines and others according to the work order.

3 RP: Make digital imposition, as shown in the work order, to obtain the correct placement of all elements, checking the final result and generating the final file.


3.1 CR order pages or product graph containing digital documents, complete or fragmented integration into the imposition is set according to the order of work and test or mock-up.

CR 3.2 dumps digital files are attached to the layout of imposition, as shown in the work order, respecting the exact position and distance between them and the set print area.

CR 3.3 tax work is valid by the visual observation of the final result, using Preview in taxation program options.

CR 3.4 the work tax in digital is checks through a test printed where is simulate faithfully them marks of information, married of the pages and the content of the form printer, controlling that the result end is the expected.

CR 3.5 the file final is generates, following them indications of the order of work, depending on the needs of the process back: filming of computer to iron (computer to plate-CTP-), filming of computer to film (computer to film-CTF-), filming of computer to screen (computer to screen-CTS-), filming of computer to Photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP-), systems of printing digital u others environments of distribution.

4 RP: Shooting digital files, either taxes or on loose pages, to get the film, making sure that the separations are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 4.1 the movie camera is calibrated and characterized by sending to the same manufacturer's own linearization wedges, ensuring that the density of black is adequate by means of appropriate instruments, and entering the driver RIP possible deviations by a curve of reset.

CR 4.2 the data relating to the compensation of the gain of stamping, provided by the printer, is introduced in the RIP controller of the device.

CR 4.3 the processing of film is keeps in perfect state of operation, checking the State of them liquids, its regenerated, speed and temperature appropriate.

CR 4.4 taxes digital files are flushed into the workflow of prepress establishing the order of them and their integration complete or fragmented.

CR 4.5 digital files, either taxes or on loose pages, sent to shoot from the workflow, introducing the parameters appropriate to the printing equipment to use.

CR 4.6 the obtained color separations are revealed in the processor, control to maintain the speed and temperature, and according to the applicable regulations of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 4.7 separation that makes up the graphic work is checked, verifying the absence of defects and its correspondence with digital files, according to the technical specifications.

CR 4.8 setting in machine perforations in the film are verified, checking that it fits the pre-registration of the printing machine elements.

5 RP: Perform the imposition and Assembly of the films by the conventional method, for the past in the way printer, making sure that the separations are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 5.1 the received color separations are checked, noting its correct dithering in relation to the printing system, clean and free from defects that may cause effects not desired in the past of plates.

CR 5.2 the color separations and separations of color is checked, verifying that include indications of the color that represent.

CR 5.3 the imposition of the films is performed on the dye, provided with pre-registration dies and addressing Strip needs and withdrawn in printing.

CR 5.4 them color separations is cut if there are pages of find, excesses of blood and surplus of film, avoiding the creation of edges in them cuts and the overlap of color separations, preventing thus effects not desired in the last of plates.

CR 5.5 the color separations, elements of registration, guides, heels, adjustment and scales of measurement of densities of stamping are attached to the astralon using materials and transparent adhesive products, adjusting each one on different dye color separations.

CR 5.6 the assemblies (ferros) testing by exposure of the assemblies on special paper and its later revealed.

CR 5.7 the ferros fold and cut, forming the booklet, checking the content and the correct location and cutting of all the elements that make up the Assembly.

CR 5.8 operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Test of imposition and Assembly equipment. Camcorder. Processing. RIP. Storage devices. Test software. Creation of digital imposition software. Workflows, verification and control of the digital imposition software module. Materials bonuses for test of taxation systems. Materials raw for color separations (movie) filming process. Materials bonuses for Assembly of manual imposition (dye). Color separations. Materials and adhesive products for mounting. Assembly table. Tools and Assembly material. Tools and measuring instruments: rules, tipometro, linen testers.



Products and results: made paths. Made imposition of work (digital or conventional). Test of imposition, position correction tests and conformity test. Setting, characterization and calibration of devices. Already taxes manual mounts. Photolithograph taxes or in loose pages. Ferros. Testing of prototypes.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical specifications sheet. Information about the printing system. Information provided by the printer: maximum area print, clip margin, turning of the specifications and other variables of the machine system. Information regarding the postpress: binding, sewing, cutting, crevices, bend, lift and handling and peculiarities of other finishing processes. Technical documentation of prepress, printing and finishing equipment. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 3 competition: Obtain forms printers using direct digital systems level: 2 code: UC0921_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: set and configure the preferences and options of dithering in the form creation system printer, calibrating and characterizing the device, to obtain correct form.

CR 1.1 folders or input queues are created and configured through its association with work (plot options) created in the driver RIP curves.

CR 1.2 data concerning the type of work to be done and the limitations of the printing system are incorporated into the RIP adapting the possibilities of the driver program in terms of generation of the plot for the work to be done, creating a specific queue where necessary.

CR 1.3 the RIP is configured including dithering method to use: conventional, stochastic raster hybrid or others depending on the type of work to print.

CR 1.4 creating the shape systems printer are kept in perfect working order by performing the control through the RIP.

CR 1.5 processor of the form creation system printer is maintained in optimum working condition, verifying state of fluids your regenerated, speed, temperature appropriate.

CR 1.6 stability of the form creation system printer is checked, by obtaining of cradles of linearization of manufacturer secure with proper instrumentation, the density of black is the appropriate minimum and the percentage of point has not suffered deviations.

CR 1.7 possible deviations in the percentage of point read as printer joining the driver RIP through a readjustment of the behavior of the bracket curve and again verifying the result.

CR 1.8 data stamping gain compensation, provided by the printer, are inserted into the device's driver RIP.

2 RP: Obtain a printer for printing offset, through direct computer-to-plate system (computer to plate - CTP), verifying that graphic work color separations are correct and contain all the required elements.

CR 2.1 the digital file is sent to the form creation system printer configuration and adjustment of machine in the specifications of the work.

CR 2.2 the parameters of the devices of the system direct to plate processor remain optimal settings, adjusting them where necessary and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 2.3 waste generated during the process are treated, according to the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 2.4 obtained plates number is checked to verify that they match the number of required colour separations.

CR 2.5 them forms printers of offset is reviewed checking that is correspond with them requirements for the work and that have been obtained in conditions of quality without defects apparent, and that its contents are according to them files digital and to the specifications of the work.


RP 3: get it form printer for printing flexographic, through the system direct of computer to Photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP), verifying that them separations of color of the work graphic are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 3.1 photopolymer plate prepares for the exhibition according to the characteristics of the output device: thickness, margins, and others.

CR 3.2 the file digital is sent to the system of creation of the form printer with the configuration and settings of machine suitable.

CR 3.3 the process of pre-exposure of the Photopolymer as proof of depth of relief, is done validating the result.

CR 3.4 the process of exposure of the Photopolymer is done ensuring them conditions of adhesion surface and hardness.

CR 3.5 parameters of the devices of the system direct to Photopolymer processor remain optimal settings, adjusting them where necessary and comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 3.6 residues generated during the process are treated by applying the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 3.7 number of obtained Photopolymer checks ensuring that they correspond to the number of required colour separations.

3.8 CR forms printers of reviewed by checking that correspond to the requirements for the job and that they have been obtained in conditions of quality without apparent defects, and that its contents are based on digital files and to the specifications of the work.

RP 4: Obtain a printer for screen printing, direct computer to display appropriate system (computer to screen - CTS), verifying that graphic work color separations are correct and contain all the elements.

4.1 CR type of mesh screen to be used is chosen taking into account the specific characteristics of the type of work to print.

CR 4.2 serigraphic screen is prepared by removing the fat substances it may contain.

CR 4.3 the file digital is sent to the system of creation of the form printer with the configuration and settings of machine suitable.

CR 4.4 exposure of serigraphic screen process is ensuring the conditions of water-tightness and permeability of the form printer.

CR 4.5 parameters of the devices of the direct system to screen screen processing remain optimal settings, adjusting them where necessary and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 4.6 waste generated during the process are treated by applying the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 4.7 number of screens obtained screenprinting checks ensuring that it corresponds to the number of required colour separations.

CR 4.8 screens are reviewed by checking that correspond to the requirements for the job and that they have been obtained in conditions of quality without apparent defects, and that its contents are according to digital files and work specifications.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and software. Creation of the form device driver RIP printer. Creation of different forms printers devices. Creation of dithering software. Digital files of the work. Materials raw for creation of forms printers. Chemicals for the processing of different forms printers system. Tools and measuring instruments: tipometro, linen testers, densitometer densitometer plates, strips control digital printing and creation of the form control printer, control of past iron strips.



Products and results: setting and the preferences of the form creation system configuration made printer. Options of dither for the system of printing specific established. Devices for obtaining the form printer calibrated and characterized. Processing in working conditions. Forms printers for different systems of printing: offset plates, Photopolymer and screen printing. Quality control in process carried out.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical specifications sheet. Information about the system of printing and its determinants, established workflow and quality control. Information provided by the printer: print, margin of clip, and other variables of machine maximum area, curved stamping gain. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 4 competition: Obtain forms web offset printers, FLEXOGRAPHY, screen printing and pad printing by the conventional method level: 2 code: UC0922_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: check the status of the color separations or mounts to his heatstroke, verifying that they conform to the required conditions of printing.

CR 1.1 the color separations or received mounts are examined and verified, noting its correct dither, cleanliness and absence of defects of manufacture and inappropriate use and which can cause unwanted effects in the heatstroke in the way printer.

CR 1.2 the color separations or received mounts are valued, checking that they are equipped with dies of pre-registration, where, suitable for printing machine.

CR 1.3 received assemblies are checked, verifying that they include elements of registration, guides, heels, adjustment and scales of measurement of densities of stamping suited to printing system that will be used.

CR 1.4 received assemblies are checked, verifying that they are all colour separations necessary for the realization of the print job.

2 PR: Get grilled for offset printing, making the heatstroke in the color separations and processing, with the required quality.

CR 2.1 the correct operation of the light source and the vacuum of the lightbox system is checked by activating the equipment according to the manual of the device.

CR 2.2 the lightbox is configured using settings exposures and vacuum, adjusting them to the quality requirements for the work to etch.

CR 2.3 used plates are checked previously making sure that his State responds to quality conditions minimum for their employment.

CR 2.4 the assembled film is placed, along with the iron, vacuum press, adjusting the lightbox using the appropriate mechanisms to achieve a perfect vacuum.

CR 2.5 the heatstroke in the color separations on the plate is done by adjusting the values of the light source intensity and exposure time, getting an image transfer grilled with the quality parameters required for the printing system to use.

2.6 CR plate processor is configured to making sure that they work properly, regarding the State of liquids, regeneration, dragging rollers, speed and temperature.

CR 2.7 them plates insoladas is processed, introducing them in the processing and adjusting them values of speed and temperature required meeting the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

CR 2.8 the plates obtained is validated, checking the quality of the processed through the employment of strip of control or instrumental of measurement (strips of control / densitometer) specific.

RP 3: obtain the Photopolymer plates for printing flexographic, performing the heatstroke of them color separations and the processing, with the quality required.

CR 3.1 the insoladora is configured acting on the source of light and the system of vacuum following the instructions of manual of the device.

CR 3.2 them Photopolymer employees is checked ensuring is that his State responds to the conditions of quality minimum for your correct employment.

CR 3.3 the photolith mounted is placed, together with the Photopolymer plates, in the insoladora activating the system of vacuum according to the instructions technical.

CR 3.4 the pre-insolado of the Photopolymer is done, getting the hardness and adhesion surface required.

CR 3.5 the heatstroke the Photopolymer is performed by adjusting the values of the light source intensity and exposure time, achieving a transfer of the image to the Photopolymer plates with the quality parameters required for flexographic printing system.

3.6 CR photopolymers processor check checking its performance regarding the State of liquids, regeneration, dragging rollers, speed and temperature.

CR 3.7 the overexposed photopolymers are processed, inserting them in the food processor, adjusting the speed and temperature values, getting a processed with the quality parameters required for flexographic printing system and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 3.8 obtained photopolymers are validated, checking that they have been performed correctly through the use of control strip or instruments of measurement (control/densitometer strips) specific.

4 RP: Obtain the screen for screen printing, making the heatstroke in the color separations and processing, with the required quality.


4.1 CR the lightbox is set by acting on the light source and vacuum system following the instructions in the device manual.

CR 4.2 screen etch prepares, by selecting the type of fabric, mesh opening and the appropriate density.

CR 4.3 the mounted film is placed, along with the screen in the lightbox by activating vacuum according to the technical instructions.

CR 4.4 the heatstroke in the color separations on the screen is done by adjusting the values of the light source intensity and exposure time, achieving a transfer of the image to the form printer with the quality parameters required for screen printing system.

CR 4.5 uninsulated screen is revealed using mechanical or manual pressure water jet systems.

CR 4.6 the drying of the screen is performs using a source of heat (dryer), to eliminate the moisture that contains.

CR 4.7 forms obtained printers are validated, checking that they have been performed correctly through the use of control strip or instruments of measurement (control/densitometer strips) specific.

CR 4.8 operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

RP 5: Get the engraving or form printer for printing in printing, with the required quality.

CR 5.1 the color separations or assemblies are revised to observing its cleanliness and the absence of defects of manufacture and of inappropriate use and which can cause unwanted in the heatstroke the Photopolymer effects.

CR 5.2 the color separations or received assemblies are checked, checking the correct frequency and dither associated with printing tampografica system.

CR 5.3 engraving or form printer tampografica is obtained by proper procedure, verifying that it has been created according to the specifications of the graphics product to perform.

CR 5.4 raw material for the element which acts as a buffer is chosen so that it responds to the minimum quality conditions so that the subsequent print reliably.

CR 5.5 shape obtained printer is checked, verifying that you conform to the technical specifications.

CR 5.6 operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: media production: film with the image of the form printer. Forms printers: plates offset, Photopolymer, screen printing and pad printing engravings. Downframes. Processing and drying of forms printers. Products chemical to the system of processing and finishing of the forms printers. Tools and measuring instruments: tipometro, linen testers, densitometer, control of past grilled strips.



Products and results: color separations and mounts checked. Downframes, processing and forms printers configured and prepared driers. Products chemicals and solvents controlled and prepared. Forms printers insoladas of: offset, flexo, screen printing and pad printing.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical specifications sheet. Information about the system of printing and its determinants, established workflow and quality control. Information provided by the printer: printing, clip margin and other variables of the machine, maximum area curved stamping gain. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 5 competition: Obtain a level rotogravure printer: 2 code: UC0923_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare gravure printing cylinders for its electronic recording verifying its proper finish.

CR 1.1 received gravure printing cylinders are checked, verifying that they conform to the technical specifications and the type of printing press used.

CR 1.2 the cylinders are cleaned using mechanical means or by specific chemical agents.

CR 1.3 covering of the cylinders is done, applying necessary electrolytic baths to the desired characteristics.

CR 1.4 immersion baths are giving to the cylinder of the necessary layers of material (nickel, copper over the hearts of steel/iron), according to the instructions of the order work and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 1.5 the grinding of the cylinder is made eliminating the copper excess, leaving it prepared for its rear polished.

RP 2: Configure options and dithering at the driver RIP curves and calibrate the system to obtain the form of intaglio printing.

2.1 CR RIP is configured, including the dithering method to use depending on the type of work to print.

CR 2.2 cylinder recording curves are created, adapting them to the types of graphic works to be carried out starting from the determination of variables such as line of plot, inclination of the wall of the alveolus, engraving speed, and others.

CR 2.3 possible deviations in the percentage of read in the simulation point, joining the RIP controller using a reset of the behavior of the bracket curve and again verifying the result.

CR 2.4 recording head calibration is performed regularly and in each the form creation process printer.

CR 2.5 test print control launches the device checking the margins of tolerance in the depth of engraving and its values on the curve of pre-selected recording.

CR 2.6 margins of tolerance in the depth of the engraving are reviewed by checking that they kept recording curve values indicated in the technical specifications.

CR 2.7 control and periodic validation of the status of the device are executed, through maintenance processes, ensuring proper operation.

3 RP: Record the way printer for gravure printing system, verifying that cylinders are correct, graphic work color separations are correct and that they contain all the elements.

CR 3.1 recording cylinders are selected according to the recording device and the technical specifications of the job.

CR 3.2 the number of cylinders to record is determined by the number of color separations that have work.

CR 3.3 cylinder is mounted on the electronic engraving machine using appropriate mechanisms that facilitate their correct location.

CR 3.4 files are sent to the RIP of recording, validating that the acquisition of image data is correct.

CR 3.5 treatment of data acquired by the RIP controller is performed by checking the form generation printer.

CR 3.6 cylinders recording orders are sent to the machine cylinder, checking is done correctly according to the specifications, or validation of the test of engraving, using suitable instruments (electron microscope).

3.7 CR engraved cylinder is valid, by checking that the engraving has been paid without problems or visible defects in the form obtained printer.

CR 3.8 separations that comprise the graphic work are verified, checking that correspond to the requirements for the job and that they have been obtained in conditions of quality and no apparent defects.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and software. RIP driver of device creation of cylinders, output peripherals, and storage devices. Devices for electrolysis and plating of cylinders. Software of creation of the dithering for printing in intaglio. Device's recording of the cylinder. Materials raw for creation of the cylinders (nickel, chrome, copper). Useful and instruments of measurement: microscope electronic, strips of control digital for print and control of creation of the form printer.



Products and results: options of dithering in the RIP to print in gravure configured. Work graphics dithering ready for creation of the cylinder. Device's recording of the cylinder calibrated and characterized. Cylinder engraving and ready for mounting on machine of print.



Information used or generated: order of production, sheet of specifications technical, information about the system of printing and its conditions, the flow of work and the control of quality established. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.


-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Dithering.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or embossed on the support.

-Defects in printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finishing, describing and linking its main phases with machinery, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the functional characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify the structural characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 from samples of graphics products:-recognize its physico-chemical composition and identify their functional capacity.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color employees in the arts graphic.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-To assess the differences in color and the possibility of playing in the graphics system.

-Carry out measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in the control of quality: densitometers, colorimeters, strips of control and devices of control in line of production, identifying its application in the different phases of the process graphic.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the most significant quality characteristics of products:-binding and manipulated: subjective evaluation, cutting marks, footprints, registration, glue-down signals.

-Resistance to bending.

-Rub resistance.

-Print: density, 'trapping', stamping, color, with balance, gain, sliding.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Maintaining an assertive attitude, empathic and conciliatory with others showing cordiality and kindness in the deal.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of graphics products.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Prepress systems. Kinds of original. Image latent, process of development. Adaptation to the environment of flow of work digital.

Peripheral of entry, peripheral of output, software and hardware specific, processing and systems of testing.

Layout and Assembly. Mount items. Specific software.

Printing systems. Equipment, benefits, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each printing system.

Binding and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and nature of light measurement.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic space.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Color theory. Additive and subtractive color synthesis.

Colour representation systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3. rules of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in processes of Arts graphic plans and standards of safety.

Standards in force.

Signals and alarms.

Regulatory environment.



4. quality in the processes of Arts graphic trials, instruments and measurements more features.

Quality in prepress: gain of point, balance of gray and density.

Variables of printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, gain of stamping, balance of color and of gray).

Areas of control in the printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of quality.



5 quality control in graphic arts quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control phases: reception of materials, processes and products.

Norms and standards related to the graphic process.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity, which will be using one of the following ways:


-Academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. competition teaching accredited in accordance with that established the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 2: imposition and FILMING of the graphic work level: 2 code: MF0920_2 associated with UC: make the imposition and filming of the graphic work duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: determine various layout methods used in the imposition of graphic works.

CE1.1 identify the data required to perform the layout of a graphic product type.

CE1.2 define the sequence of work characteristic of the creation of a mapping manual.

CE1.3 describe the sequence of work characteristic of the creation of a layout digital.

CE1.4 identify and describe the different symbols used in the layout and Assembly:-cutting lines.

-Lines of folding.

-Range of clamps.

-Crosses of record.

-Signatures.

-Heels.

-Die lines and other necessary elements in print.

CE1.5 starting from the technical specifications or model of a given graphic product extract information from:-production flow.

-Printing systems.

-Form creation system printer.

-Types of finishing and binding.

-Launched scheme.

CE1.6 from a graphic product type determine the type of path depending on:-the original class.

-Printing machine format.

-The size of paper available.

-The kind of binding.

-Printing system.

C2: Make digital or conventional paths to a given technical specifications.

CE2.1 identify the characteristics that determine the development of the path, taking into account the systems and machines for printing, binding and finishing of graphics products.

CE2.2 perform a layout, incorporating data on a form given printer: minimum and maximum work area both paper and printing, margins of tweezers and others.

CE2.3 make a path for the imposition of a so-called graphical product stamped, properly characterized, optimizing the maximum print area.

CE2.4 make a path marking the spaces for the correct location of the pages in a course of manual imposition.

CE2.5 in different practices incorporate an astralon brands of information necessary for the control and adjustment in enforcement manual, by applying a code of colors for each element.

CE2.6 in a practical course of digital imposition from given instructions:-Add the registration marks, cutting, folding and elevation to the development of the plot.

-Have the released of the digital file.

-Indicate the order and layout of the pages according to format specification established in the given specifications.

C3: Make digital imposition of files using specific software, checking the final result and generating standardized files.

CE3.1 identify the characteristics that must be valued imposition software applications, describing its particularities.

CE3.2 describe different processes of digital imposition, according to the software and the flow of work used.

CE3.3 identify the formats of storage pages, features and compatibility with the programs of taxation.

CE3.4 have pages files and formats them necessary to carry out a particular imposition.

CE3.5 in a practical course of digital imposition from a layout base:-Add digital files to impose, by setting the order of them.

-Join the digital files to the path of the imposition.

-Validate tax work, and visual inspection of the final result.

-Obtain a printed proof, making the final result.

CE3.6 in a practical course of digital imposition of a magazine from a digital file and given instructions:-make the imposition from a defined path of taxation.

-Verify visually display the distribution and placement of the pages.

-Check the correct arrangement of the elements of registration on display and auxiliary of cutting and bending.

-Obtain evidence of imposition of taxes digital files, checking the correct distribution and placement of the pages in the tender.

CE3.7 in a practical course of digital imposition of a book, from the impositions of pages and given instructions:-generate the final file: Pdf, Ps, Tiff or other, depending on the needs of the printing process defined.

-Check proper disposal of all elements on screen.

-Obtain a proof of imposition from the generated file, checking the correct distribution and placement of the pages.

C4: Carry out filming already tax digital files or loose pages, obtaining color separations with the given specified quality.

CE4.1 describe the characteristics and operation of the film cameras.

CE4.2 explain the different mechanisms of the processing of film and its role in the processing of the film.

CE4.3 describe the characteristics of the different raw materials used to obtain color separations: films, liquid processing.

CE4.4 identify the operations of configuration depending on the typology of the camcorder.

CE4.5 describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of dither: conventional, stochastic, or hybrid.

CE4.6 explain the process of calibration of the cameras.

CE4.7 describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used in the filming of the film.

CE4.8 relate the causes, motives and effects of the adjustment of the parameters in the camcorder, taking into account the technical data of the process and of the work that is to be performed:-point gain.

-Registration and traps.

-Overlay and reserve of colors.

-Specification of bleeding.

-Black spot: UCR, GCR.

-Transfer curves.

CE4.9 perform self-test of the RIP and the camcorder according to protocols established by the manufacturer.

CE4.10 on the basis of a video camera type, select the right materials for the film.

CE4.11 in a practical course for obtaining color separations, from a digital file, and given specifications:-identify the process of the film.

-Correct the photosensitive material in the video camera.

-Expose the photosensitive material.

-Process photosensitive material.

-To evaluate the quality of the product obtained: percentages point, exposure, resolution, and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Consider the environmental protection measures that should be considered in the process.

CE4.12 in a practical case of a film given, check the quality of the observations and measurements following color separations:-search for rays, scratches and other damage to the film.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

C5: Perform impositions by the conventional method based on color separations, getting the correct record in the color separations.

CE5.1 describe the process followed a conventional taxation.

CE5.2 identify the tools and materials used in a process of conventional taxation.

CE5.3 in a practical course of preparation of Lithos for its imposition, from given instructions:-check the absence of scratches, streaks and other anomalies.

-Check the presence and accuracy of the necessary elements of the record.

-Perform all operations, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

A predefined layout table CE5.4 place on mounting and properly position the dye where the pages are mounted.

CE5.5 assemble the color separations of the pages on the astralon respecting the exact position and distance between them and respect the established on a path previously defined print area.

CE5.6 assemble the color separations of different color separations of a graphic product given with precision, getting a correct record.

CE5.7 visually verify the quality and accuracy of impositions on dye by comparison with the technical specifications of properly characterized graphic projects.

CE5.8 get tests ozalicas ('ferros') of a given taxation, making sure the positioning of the mounting elements and complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.5 and CE1.6; C2 regarding CE2.6; C3 on CE3.5, CE3.6 and CE3.7; C4 on CE4.4, CE4.8, CE4.9, CE4.11 and CE4.12; C5 regarding CE5.3.

Other capabilities: recognize the productive process of the organization.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Interpret and execute work instructions.


Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.



Contents: 1. the layout of the specifications format work, paper format and format of the product in the product specification.

The bend. Forms of bending: bending in parallel, cross, zig-zag, combined.

Sheets or signatures.

Folded and married.

Kinds of married: regular, irregular, products.

The specification and the printing: Strip and removed, flip in horizontal or in vertical.

Types of layout and considerations: marks of cutting, folding and record margins of tweezers, clamps, guides and heels.

The document and marks of elevation.



2. taxation digital or electronic imposition electronic.

Characteristics of the programs of taxation electronic.

Process of preparation.

File formats.

Digital paths.

Imposition of the pages.

Workflows.



3 filming of Lithos types and characteristics of the video cameras.

Types and characteristics of the film processing.

Drivers RIPs. Features.

Calibration and characterization of the cameras.

Generation of dithering.

Methods of filming.

Color separations.

Processing of the color separations.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



4. manual imposition layout used.

The conventional page-imposition.

Process of preparation.

Review of color separations.

Imposition of color separations.

Materials and instruments used in the manual imposition.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the imposition and filming of the graphic work, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: obtain forms printers using direct digital systems level: 2 code: MF0921_2 associated with UC: obtain forms printers using direct digital systems duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: configure preferences and options of dithering in the form creation systems printer, according to the typology and the technical specifications of a graphics product.

CE1.1 differentiate and describe the characteristics and functioning of the various systems of creation of forms printers.

CE1.2 identify the operations of configuration depending on the typology of the device's creation of the form printer.

CE1.3 describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of dither: conventional, stochastic or hybrid.

CE1.4 relate them causes, reasons and effects of the adjustment of them parameters in them different teams of exposure, taking in has them data technical of the process and of the work that is going to make:-gain of point.

-Register and traps.

-Overlay and book of colors.

-Specification of bleeding.

-Black of process: UCR, GCR.

-Curves of transfer.

CE1.5 configure a RIP depending on the type of dithering specified in a sheet of production type.

CE1.6 in a practical course of setting options of dithering, starting from a given technical specifications:-incorporate the RIP information about the type of work to be carried out.

-Introduce the stamping machine print gain compensation curve.

-Fit the limitations of the printing system to use, depending on the given technical specifications.

CE1.7 use folders or queue entry by the same association to previously created in a RIP raster options presets.

CE1.8 in a practical course of testing different digital files from a few instructions and forms given printers:-verify their validity for obtaining the form printer.

-Describe the characteristics of digital files.

-Recognize the most common defects in digital files.

C2: Calibrating and characterizing devices of creation of forms printers using appropriate measuring instruments.

CE2.1 differentiate and describe the characteristics and functioning of the various devices of creation of forms printers.

CE2.2 explain the process of calibration and characterization of the different devices of creation of the form printer.

CE2.3 describe the features and the operation of the instruments of measurement used in the creation of forms printers.

CE2.4 in a simulation practice of preparation of equipment, perform operations of self-test of the RIP and them units of exposure according to the protocols established by the manufacturer.

CE2.5 in a so-called practical of calibration of devices for the obtaining of forms printers, to starting a device type:-calibrate and characterize the team's creation of the form printer through the procedure established by the manufacturer.

-Check the stability of the system of creation of the form printer using the instrumental of measurement proper.

-Verify the correct reproduction of the percentage of point by wedges of linearization own of the manufacturer.

-Modify the possible deviation of percentage of point.

-Incorporate the RIP controller reset of the behavior of the bracket curve.

-Introduce the curve of compensation of the gain of stamping of a machine's print type.

CE2.6 in a so-called practical of control of the processing of the form printer, starting from ones instructions given:-control the quality of the processed through tasks of control manual checking: the State of them liquids, regenerated, speed and temperature adequate.

-Carry out methodically operations of maintenance: cleaning of tanks and regeneration of the liquids of processing.

-Comply with the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

C3: obtain forms printers to offset, through system direct from computer to iron (computer to plate-CTP), checking the quality of the result end.

CE3.1 describe the features and operation of the equipment of creation of it form printer of computer to iron (computer to plate-CTP).

CE3.2 explain the different mechanisms of processing used for the obtaining of the form printer.

CE3.3 describe the characteristics of the different raw materials individuals from computer to plate systems (computer to plate - CTP): plates and liquid processing.

CE3.4 rating the use of teams of obtaining of forms printers depending on the systems of printing established and some features of work, properly characterized.

CE3.5 select them materials appropriate to get it form printer, whereas the type of device of obtaining of the form, in so-called practical properly characterized.

CE3.6 in a so-called practical of obtaining of forms printers for offset, starting from a file digital and some specifications technical given:-identify the process of obtaining of the form printer.

-Place correctly the material photosensitive in the device.

-Expose the material photosensitive.

-Processing the material photosensitive.

-To evaluate the quality of the product retrieved: percentages of point, exposure, resolution and others, detecting possible anomalies.

CE3.7 in a color separations given, check the quality of the following measurements and observations:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

C4: Obtain forms printers for flexography, through direct computer-to-Photopolymer system (photopolymer to computer - CTP), checking the quality of the final result.

CE4.1 describe the characteristics and operation of direct computer to Photopolymer equipment (computer to photopolymer - CTP) creating the shape of flexographic printer.

CE4.2 explain the different mechanisms of processing used to obtain the form printer.

CE4.3 describe the characteristics of the different raw materials individuals of Photopolymer plates (CTP) computer systems: Photopolymer, liquid processing and others.

CE4.4 determine the pre-registration system: microdot, perforations and other, more appropriate to a given technical specifications.

CE4.5 determine ways to obtain equipment printers according to the established printing systems and work characteristics.


The right to obtain materials printer, whereas the type of device for obtaining the Photopolymer forms CE4.6 select.

CE4.7 in a so-called practical of obtaining of forms printers for flexography, starting from a file digital and some specifications technical given:-identify the process of obtaining of the form printer.

-Correct the Photopolymer plates on the device.

-Pre-insolar the Photopolymer.

-Make further insolation of the Photopolymer, if required by Photopolymer plates (CTP) used computer technology.

-Process the Photopolymer.

-To evaluate the quality of the product obtained: percentages point, exposure, resolution, depth of engraving, hardness of the Photopolymer and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the Photopolymer taking into account printing machine fastening systems.

CE4.8 in a color separations given, check the quality of the following measurements and observations:-search for rays, scratches, and other defects of the Photopolymer.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

-Trapping and color overlays.

-Correction of the deformation dimensional due to the curvature of the cylinder printer.

C5: get forms printers for screen printing, through system direct from computer to screen (computer to screen-CTS), checking the quality of the result end.

CE5.1 describe the characteristics and operation of the equipment of computer screen (computer to screen - CTS) creation in the way silk screen printer.

CE5.2 explain the different mechanisms of processing used for the obtaining of the form printer.

CE5.3 describe the features of the different materials raw particular of them systems of computer to screen (CTS): screens, emulsions, liquids of processing and others.

CE5.4 determine the system of pre-registration more appropriate to some specifications techniques given.

CE5.5 Select the process screens depending on features from the established printing equipment and work characteristics.

The right to obtain materials printer, whereas the type of device for obtaining the screen is CE5.6 select.

CE5.7 in a practical course of obtaining forms printers for screen printing, from a digital file and given technical specifications:-identify the process for obtaining the form printer.

-Carry out the prior preparation of the screen.

-Correct display on the device.

-Make screen exposure, if computer-to-screen technology (computer to screen - CTS) used requires it.

-Process on the screen.

-To evaluate the quality of the product obtained: percentages point, exposure, resolution, status of the mesh, State of emulsion and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the screens considering systems of fixing the frames and printing equipment.

CE5.8 in a color separations given, check the quality of the following measurements and observations:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

-Correct installation and tensioning frames.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4, CE1.6 and CE1.8; C2 CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 on CE3.4, CE3.6 and CE3.7; C4 CE4.5, CE4.7 and CE4.8; C5 CE5.7 and CE5.8.

Other capabilities: recognize the productive process of the organization.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.



Contents: 1. configuration of the type of equipment systems.

Characteristics and performance.

The RIP settings.

Preferences and dither options.

Technical configuration data.

Frames: frequency, angulatura and percentage point.

Dithering technology: features and use.

Dot gain.



2 materials bonuses for obtaining forms printers direct digital systems characteristics and application.

Forms web offset printers: plates. Types and features.

Forms for flexographic printers: photopolymers. Types and features.

Forms printers for screen printing: screen printing screens. Types and features.

Emulsions. Types and properties.

Products processing and finishing as the printer. Types and features.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. earning of forms printers using direct digital systems direct to plate. Types and features. Operation.

Comparison between different technologies.

Calibration and configuration of devices for obtaining forms printers.

Measuring instruments. Characteristics and performance.

Linearization wedges.

Characteristics and management of downframes.

Characteristics and management of processing.

Maintenance and cleaning devices.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Quality control of insoladas plates.

Defects of forms printers: variation of the point, oiled, Veil, pendentives and scratches, defects of the emulsion, processing defects.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the obtaining of forms printers using direct digital systems, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 4: obtain forms printers for OFFSET, FLEXOGRAPHY, screen printing and pad printing by the conventional method level: 2 code: MF0922_2 associated with UC: obtain forms printers for offset, flexo, screen printing and pad printing by the conventional method duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: check color separations or assemblies, verifying its validity for the heatstroke of forms printers in offset printing systems flexography, screen printing and pad printing.

CE1.1 describe the characteristics of the plot: angulation, screen frequency and dot.

CE1.2 explain the most common defects that occur in the color separations.

CE1.3 recognize the elements of registration, guides, heels, adjustment and scales of measurement of densities of stamping used in color separations and mounts for forms printing systems printers offset, flexography, screen printing and pad printing.

CE1.4 in a practical course of color separations, from given instructions checking:-check that the films have no defects that produce effects not desired in the subsequent heatstroke.

-Check that the dithering and frequency are suitable for the printing system to use.

-Verify that all the films contain elements of setting and registration and scales of densities of stamping, as well as the number of color separations that contains.

C2: Etch and process plates for offset printing, on the basis of their corresponding color separations and controlling the quality of the result.

CE2.1 describe the characteristics and operation of the equipment of sunstroke and processing of the plates for offset printing.

CE2.2 explain the mechanisms of sunstroke and processing used for obtaining the plate for offset printing.

CE2.3 recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the heatstroke and processing of plates for offset printing: movies or films, plates and liquid processing.

CE2.4 in a practical course of a process of isolation plates offset, starting from a set of color separations provided:-select the iron depending on the machine to print.

-Prepare the pre-sensitized plates, assessing the correct emulsified.

-Drill the plates bearing in mind the jaws of the printing machine.

-Correctly position the astralon on griddle.

-Place the iron in the press of insolation.

-Carry out the vacuum in the lightbox.

-The amount of light and time depending on the material and the features of the original program.

-Etch plates.

CE2.5 in a practical course processing plates offset, starting from a set of insoladas plates provided:


-Check and replace the fluids processing, taking into account the standards of safety, health and environmental protection.

-Adjust the speed and temperature of processing parameters.

-Process plates.

-Check the quality of the obtained plates, tweaking possible anomalies.

CE2.6 in a practical course of a transaction processing plates given offset, checking the quality of the plates for printing color separations offset, from technical specifications with observations and measurements to be carried out:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way printer.

-Appropriate density of the black areas in separations.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

-Trapping and color overlays.

C3: Etch and process Photopolymer flexographic printing, starting with their corresponding color separations and controlling the quality of the result.

CE3.1 describe the characteristics and operation of them teams of heatstroke and processing of Photopolymer for printing flexographic.

CE3.2 explain the mechanisms of heatstroke and processing used for the obtaining of the Photopolymer plates for printing flexographic.

CE3.3 recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the heatstroke and processing of Photopolymer flexographic printing: movies or color separations, Photopolymer and processed products and solvents.

CE3.4 in a so-called practical of insolation of photopolymers, starting from a game of Lithos eased:-select the type of Photopolymer depending on the machine's print.

-Assess the correct emulsified of the Photopolymer.

-Make it pre-insolacion if the characteristics of the Photopolymer it require.

– Correctly position the color separations on the Photopolymer.

-Place the Photopolymer plates along with the color separations in the press of insolation.

-Carry out the vacuum in the lightbox.

-The amount of light and time depending on the material and the features of the original program.

-Perform insolation getting the anchor and strengthening areas of final picture of the Photopolymer.

CE3.5 in a practical course of processing of Photopolymer, from a game of overexposed Photopolymer facilitated: – check and replace the fluids processing, taking into account the standards of safety, health and environmental protection.

-Adjust the speed and temperature of processing parameters.

-Process the Photopolymer.

-Carry out the drying of the Photopolymer.

-Check the quality of the obtained Photopolymer: percentages point, exposure, resolution, depth of engraving, hardness of the Photopolymer et al., detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the Photopolymer taking into account printing machine fastening systems.

CE3.6 according to technical specifications of a transaction processing of Photopolymer given, checking the quality of color separations in the Photopolymer plates for flexographic, observations and measurements following:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way printer.

-Density appropriate for them areas black in the separations.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

-Trapping and color overlays.

-Correction of the deformation dimensional due to the curvature of the cylinder printer.

C4: Etch and process screens for screen printing, starting with their corresponding color separations and controlling the quality of the result.

CE4.1 describe the characteristics and operation of the equipment of sunstroke screens for screen printing.

CE4.2 explain the processing mechanisms used to obtain the screen for screen printing.

CE4.3 recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for processing and heatstroke screens for screen printing: movies or films, screens, emulsions and products processing.

CE4.4 according to technical specifications of a silkscreen process given, select the right materials for the display, considering:-the type of device for obtaining the form.

-The kind of film to use.

-Screen to use class: type of fabric, opening of mesh density.

-The type of emulsion.

-The processing system.

-Frames to use.

-The type of blade used.

-The inks to be used.

-Silkscreen printing equipment.

CE4.5 in a practical course screens screenprinting insolation and starting from a set of color separations eased:-select the screen depending on the printing equipment.

-Prepare the screens.

– Correctly position the film on the screen.

-Place the display in the lightbox.

-Carry out the vacuum in the lightbox.

-The amount of light and time depending on the material and the features of the original program.

-Etch screens.

CE4.6 in a practical course screens screenprinting, starting from a set of insoladas screens facilitated processing:-check and adjust the pressure of the water processing.

-Process screens, taking into account the standards of safety, health and environmental protection.

-Carry out the drying of the screens.

-Check the quality of the obtained screens, tweaking possible anomalies.

-Carry out, if necessary, the processes of hardened and necessary conservation according to the characteristics of the emulsion and screen.

CE4.7 according to technical specifications of a processing screens given operation, check the quality of color separations in screens for screen-printing, with observations and following measurements:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way printer.

-Appropriate density of the black areas in separations.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

-Correct installation and tensioning frames.

C5: get it form printer's printing, starting of their corresponding color separations and controlling the quality of the result.

CE5.1 describe the characteristics and operation of them teams of heatstroke and processing of forms printers for printing.

CE5.2 explain the mechanisms of insolation and processing used for the obtaining of the form printer for printing tampografica.

CE5.3 recognize the features of them different materials raw used for the heatstroke and processing of forms printers for printing tampografica: movies or Lithos, cliches and products of processing.

CE5.4 according to technical specifications of a process of printing given, select the right materials for the cliche, considering:-the type of device for obtaining the form.

-The kind of film to use.

-The kind of cliche to use.

-The type of emulsion.

-The processing system.

-Tampografico printing equipment.

CE5.5 in a practical course cliches tampograficos isolation and, starting from a set of color separations eased:-select the cliches depending on printing equipment.

-Prepare the cliches.

– Correctly position the film on the cliche.

-Place the cliche in the lightbox.

-Carry out the vacuum in the lightbox.

-The amount of light and time depending on the material and the features of the original program.

-Etch the cliche.

CE5.6 in a practical course of cliches tampograficos and, from a game of overexposed cliches facilitated processing:-check and replace the fluids processing, taking into account the standards of safety, health and environmental protection.

-Process the cliche.

-Check the quality of the obtained cliches, exposure, depth of engraving, hardness of the cliche et al., detecting possible anomalies.

-Perform the needed conservation processes depending on the characteristics of the emulsion and the cliche.

CE5.7 according to some technical specifications of a processing cliches given operation, check the quality of color separations in the cliche for printing tampografica, with the following measurements and observations:-search for rays, scratches and other damage in the way printer.

-Appropriate density of the black areas in separations.

-Correct color separation.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 on CE3.4, CE3.5, CE3.6; C4 regarding CE4.4, CE4.5, CE4.6 and CE4.7; C5 concerning CE5.4, CE5.5, CE5.6 and CE5.7.

Other capabilities: recognize the productive process of the organization.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.



Contents: 1. materials raw for the obtaining of forms printers by the method conventional different types of materials raw: color separations, forms printers, emulsions, products of processing and solvents.

Characteristics and types of color separations.

Defects of the color separations.

Elements of setting and registration in the film.

Separations of color on color separations: dither, angle and frequency.

Characteristics and types of forms printers.

Presensibilizadas conventional offset plates.


Types of Photopolymer.

Screens screenprinting: type of tissue, opening of mesh and density.

Tampograficos cliches. Features.

Types of emulsions: photolithograph and screen printing.

Products of processing for different forms printers. Features.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



2 equipment and methods of heatstroke characteristics and operation of the equipment.

Elements of adjustment mechanisms.

Downframes of plates offset.

Downframes of Photopolymer.

Downframes of screen printing.

Downframes of tampograficos cliches.

Sources of light.

Vacuum presses.

Methods of sunstroke: features and techniques.



3 equipment and methods of processing characteristics and operation of the equipment.

Elements of adjustment mechanisms.

Processing of plates offset.

Processing of Photopolymer.

Processing screens in serigraph.

Processing plate-making tampograficos.

Parameters: temperature and speed.

Control and regeneration of liquids.

Processing methods: characteristics and techniques.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.

Printers by conventional method.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1.-domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the obtaining of forms printers for offset, flexo, silkscreen and printing by the method conventional, that is credited by an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



MODULE training 5: obtaining of the form printer for GRAVURE level: 2 code: MF0923_2 associated to the UC: get it form printer for gravure duration: 60 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: prepare cylinders following them procedures established in some specifications technical given.

CE1.1 describe the process of preparation of gravure cylinders.

CE1.2 explain the different systems of cleaning and degreasing of cylinders of gravure printing.

CE1.3 define the principles of electrolysis.

CE1.4 list the different coatings and properties of a gravure cylinder.

CE1.5 describe the characteristics and purpose of different baths electrolytic immersion.

CE1.6 in a practical course of preparation of the cylinder, starting from a given technical specifications make the process of according to the characteristics of the product:-check the received cylinder, determining its suitability for technical specifications.

-Clean cylinder by mechanical means, processes electrolytic or chemical agents.

-Apply different coatings through the corresponding baths.

-Grinding cylinders, eliminating excess material.

-Polishing cylinder mechanically obtaining a surface with required roughness.

-Check the quality of the obtained cylinders, evaluating hardness, roughness, caliber and the absence of defects.

C2: Configure and calibrate devices for creation of cylinders of gravure, according to typology and specifications technical given.

CE2.1 differentiate and describe the characteristics and operation of recording of gravure cylinders and their modes of calibration systems.

CE2.2 differentiate operations of configuration depending on the type of the recording device.

CE2.3 describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of socket, tilt (angle of emptying) and its relationship with the angulatura and screen frequency.

CE2.4 explain the process of calibration of equipment recording cylinders.

CE2.5 engraving, a cylinder units, calibration operations periodically and according to protocols established by the manufacturer.

CE2.6 in a practical course of calibration of equipment involved in a process of recording, from a few instructions:-check the correct reproduction of frequencies, angulaturas and percentages of point via the test standard recommended by manufacturers.

-Detecting possible deviations from percentage of point originated in the recording process.

-Detecting possible deviations arising in the RIP.

-Incorporate the RIP controller reset of the behavior of the bracket curve.

CE2.7 in a practical course of the RIP, on the basis of some technical work instructions settings:-Configure the RIP depending on the type of dither to use.

-Join the RIP information about the type of work performed.

Establish the limitations of the system for rotogravure printing.

C3: Make electronic engraving in a cylinder print of gravure printing by Diamond Head.

CE3.1 describe the characteristics and performance of equipment recorded by Diamond Head.

CE3.2 describe the characteristics and operation of measuring instruments used in the recording of cylinders.

CE3.3 selecting the right cylinder whereas the recording device and the technical characteristics of the work in practical cases properly characterized.

CE3.4 check the correct and proper disposition of elements of registration.

CE3.5 in a practical course of engraving of cylinders and on the basis of a digital archive and given technical specifications:-correctly place the cylinder on the cylinder holder of the recording unit.

-Carry out the engraving of the cylinder.

-To evaluate the quality of the product obtained: percentages point, depth, frequency, angulatura and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-To apply procedures for the conservation of cylinders recorded for subsequent storage.

CE3.6 checking the quality of a color with the observations and measurements following separations:-search hits and other damage in the way.

-Value of the point of the tones and semitones.

-Frequencies and angles.

-Moire.

-Correct color separation.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.6; C2 CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 with respect CE3.5 and CE3.6.

Other capabilities: recognize the productive process of the organization.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Act with speed in situations problematic and not limit it to wait.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. preparation of cylinder preparation process.

Cleaning and degreasing.

Principles of electrolysis. Electrolytic baths. Purpose.

Types of coatings.

Rectification of cylinders.

Mechanical polishing of cylinders. Roughness.

Defects of cylinders: variation of the point, oiled, defects of the engraving, blows and others.

Quality control in the preparation of cylinders.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



2. recording of cylinder features and operating system settings.

Configuration operations.

Types of alveoli. Emptying angle.

Measuring instruments.

Calibration and configuration of cylinder recording equipment.

Calibration protocols.

The driver RIP settings.

Percentage of point. Screen frequency. Angulatura.



3. systems of engraving cylinders procedure and characteristics.

Recording devices.

Registry items.

Drive recorder of cylinders electronic. Types and features instruments of measurement.

Separations of color.

Finished, conservation and storage of cylinders.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1.-domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the obtaining of the form printer for gravure, that is credited by an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.


Annex IX professional qualification: lithography family professional: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG289_2 general competition perform and process different types of lithographic arrays, based on previous sketches themselves or others and doing tests of State to obtain prints in different systems of lithographic printing lithographic, operating in conditions of safety and quality.



Competition UC0687_2 units: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work UC0924_2: make lithographic arrays UC0925_2: stamping in lithography environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the field of lithography in workshops devoted to engraving and lithographic printing and art galleries specializing in printmaking in nature public or private of small entities medium and large and irrespective of their legal form both self-employed and employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector of graphic artistic activities in the sub-sector on the art through lithography and any other sector that has any of these activities constituting its own printing sub-sector or in any productive sector that has this activity.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Stampers lithograph in lithography recorders recorders of lithographic stone operators of lithographic press advisers in lithography training associate (450 hours) training modules MF0687_2: techniques of expression for graphic work (120 hours) MF0924_2: lithographic processing (210 hours) MF0925_2: lithographic printing (120 hours) unit of competition 1: develop and interpret sketches to work graphic level: 2 code: UC0687_2 realizations professionals and implementation criteria : RP 1: select the technical of expression graphic for the realization of studies and sketches choosing them more appropriate to the technical of engraving and stamping.

CR 1.1 them materials, useful and procedures of expression graphic for the realization of sketches is value determining the adequacy of its resources to them own of them technical of engraving and stamping.

1.2 CR materials, useful and procedures of graphic expression are selected according to their nature and qualities which provide as resources.

CR 1.3 them techniques of expression graphic is choose depending on his fitness to them possibilities formal and expressive of them technical of engraving and stamping.

RP 2: develop notes and studies previous to the sketch, following stages successive in the construction of the image to establish the structure compositional basic of the sketch.

CR 2.1 the grade of complexity and development of them sketches is set according to the features of them technical of engraving and stamping chosen.

CR 2.2 the sketches are drawn by pointing them the basic forms collected in lines and general masses.

CR 2.3 format and dimensions of the work are set, taking into account the relationship between footprint and margins of the paper in the picture that completes the process.

CR 2.4 compositional structure is sketched, as the basis for the construction of the image, establishing care centres and lines of force.

CR 2.5 parts or particular aspects of composition studies are performed according to the needs of deeper or detail in the elaboration of the final draft.

3 RP: Perform the final sketch, completing the construction of the image, to make it serve as a model in the realization of matrices and its stamping process.

CR 3.1 the previous stages of the image are collected in the sketch by applying the dimensional and compositional results obtained in the sketches, notes, and previous studies.

CR 3.2 development of the sketch is performed using conventional or using graphical techniques equipment and specific software.

CR 3.3 construction of the image in the sketch is done using the point and the line by applying constructive, descriptive, expressive, gestural abilities or signicas and taking into account the resources of engraving and stamping techniques.

CR 3.4 color is applied in the sketch the relationships required between the chromatic and tonal values in the image according to the techniques of engraving and printing certain resources.

CR 3.5 them different tones of the image is applied in the development of the sketch through frames or by means of spots according to the needs of them technical of engraving and stamping established.

CR 3.6 retrieved sketch is adjusted, where appropriate, by making the required changes arising from the needs of process of engraving and stamping.

4 RP: Determine the Visual characteristics of the own or others sketches for graphic work, valuing its formal characteristics, meaning and style in relation to processes of engraving and stamping.

CR 4.1 are valued, own, preparatory sketches of graphic work, determining their characteristics material and formal and choosing materials, processes and techniques of engraving and printing to use more allied with those characteristics.

CR 4.2, preparatory sketches of graphic work, are analysed by determining the own author's stylistic contribution and/or the derivative of the different artistic styles applied.

CR 4.3 sketches are analyzed considering the grafico-plasticas proposals and significant content (sign, representative, conceptual or symbolic) in relation to the process of engraving and stamping.

CR 4.4 style expressed in the sketches identified evaluating the adequacy to the technique of engraving or stamping which is to be used, respecting it in the subsequent development of the graphic image.

CR 4.5 techniques and engraving and stamping processes determine, establishing the most consistent with the needs identified and defined from the formal assessment, meaning and style on the sketches.

RP 5: Obtain the graphic documents collecting color selection and investment of the original image respecting the formal and expressive features of the sketch.

CR 5.1 inversion of the sketches, in his case, is carried out by applying the required methods, such as photocopies mirror mode, reverse tracing and others, depending on the composition and structure of the graphic characteristics of the images, in relation to the graphic processes.

CR 5.2 the image transfer is done by applying the methods of tracing required, respecting the structure of the composition and formal values, meaning and expressive images.

CR 5.3 image transfer process is controlled by checking that the basic structure and other formal and expressive values of the image comply with the sketch.

CR 5.4 image color selection is done by applying the methods required in accordance with the nature of the images and certain engraving and stamping techniques so that is guaranteed registration of matrices and the printing order.



Professional context: means of production: Media: paper, cardboard and fabrics. Materials, supplies and tools for dry drawing techniques (graffiti, charcoals, pastels, crayons, pencils compounds and fatty); for wet drawing techniques (inks, markers and pens, pens, rods and brushes); for techniques of painting (watercolors, temperas, temples) water; and for strong, oily and mixed media painting techniques (encaustics, oils and acrylics). Equipment and specific software.



Products and results: graphic expression materials: graphite, charcoal, pastels, pencils, inks, watercolors and others, prepared. Notes, sketches, studies, and made sketches. Investment of the sketches. The selection of image color graphic documents.



Used or generated information: technical literature, catalogues and monographs of graphic works, catalogues and samples of graphic and plastic material.



Unit 2 competition: Make parent LITHOGRAPHIC level: 2 code: UC0924_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare the materials, tools and tools for lithographic drawing by selecting the most suitable to lithographic techniques and conducting appropriate tests that ensure its proper State and performance.

1.1 CR materials and helpful employees in obtaining the lithographic image: pencils and lithographic bars, die fat, brushes, tips, feathers, scrapers, sandpaper, emulsions, light sources and others, are prepared by checking their fitness and, where appropriate, making the necessary modifications that have their State for use.


1.2 CR fixed liquids: wetting solution, additives (gum Arabic and others) and acids (phosphoric, nitric and other), used in the processes of fixed images, testing their qualities and adjusting the composition and proportions of their formulas depending on the nature of matrices and the techniques and procedures used in the realization of the images are prepared.

CR 1.3 handling of corrosive chemicals such as: phosphoric, nitric acid and others, is complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

1.4 CR products and useful auxiliaries used in the process of drawing and a set of matrices (Tools, tooling, set liquids, additives, acids and others) are arranged neatly for use under the conditions of security in handling and avoiding the proximity to flammable substances hot spots.

1.5 CR quality and adequacy of the materials used in the process of drawing and a set of lithographic image control, prior to use, on the basis of the results sought, by performing required tests identifying characteristics and adapting them for use in the process.

CR 1.6 for lithographic drawing materials are selected based on the tests, looking for its suitability for the desired results.

2 RP: Select and prepare the lithographic matrices for a correct transfer of the image, using the materials and tools most appropriate to the chosen technique.

CR 2.1 - stones or plates - lithographic matrices are selected according to the nature of the material, hardness, consistency, porosity, type of emulsion, size, thickness and defects and imperfections, according to characteristics required for lithographic drawing and the expected circulation techniques.

CR 2.2 matrices showing images of previous prints are cleaned by removing drawings by physical or chemical means.

CR 2.3 lithographic stone is polished leveling the top surface with base and looking for a uniform thickness, using specific tools in your case: compass of thicknesses, rule and other elements, checking the regularity of its thickness.

CR 2.4 lithographic stone knurling using abrasive of all sizes, from most to least, creating a surface that presents an optimum and homogeneous graining suitable to the technique chosen for the image.

2.5 CR angles and edges of the upper face of the lithographic stone are rounded with lima avoiding its sunk into the bracket.

CR 2.6 them plates metal is despreparan eliminating the oxide, the dirt and the fat, to get a surface that favors a correct humidification.

CR 2.7 it matrix-stone or iron-is covers with a movie fine of gum Arabic preserving it of them spots of fat and dirt.

CR 2.8 lithographic matrices are prepared to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Make and fix the editor applying different resources and techniques of drawing or lithographic report considering the formal and expressive parameters indicated for the matrix.

CR 3.1 the tracing of the sketches or other images are done on arrays prepared by applying the required registration methods, taking into account the characteristics and the nature of the graphic composition.

CR 3.2 the drawing lithographic is carried out directly on the matrix, in your case, using the technical and them resources materials specific and developing them processes graphics required.

CR 3.3 transfer of images on the matrix prepared to the effect is performed by applying the techniques of reporting and controlling the correct transfer of the graphic composition.

CR 3.4 touch-ups, changes and corrections on the image plotted on the matrix are carried out using the useful materials: stone pumice, scrapers, arrowheads and others, and other resources, in accordance with the characteristics of the image.

CR 3.5 emulsified matrix insall and reveals respecting the tonal values of the image and ensuring its correct set.

CR 3.6 the surface of the matrix is acidula, applying a specific solution increasing capacity to receive ink worked with pencils and other means fatty areas, as well as the ability to collect moisture in the reserved areas allowing the fixing of the image.

CR 3.7 set of image process is checked different intermediate testing and checking the correspondence between established formal values and obtained composition.

CR 3.8 quality follow-up occurs above all the process with attention to the correct choice and use of the techniques and tools in accordance with formal and expressive purposes.



Professional context: means of production: lithographic stone or metal (zinc, aluminium) arrays. Compass of thicknesses, rules, calibre and other tools for measuring thicknesses. Linen testers and magnifying glasses. Levigadores, stone pumice, abrasive of different thicknesses (arenas, carborundum and others). Files and rasps. Graphic materials: pencils and lithographic bars, inks fats, brushes, pens, scrapers, sandpaper, and other. Emulsions and light sources. Wetting solutions, gum Arabic, acids (phosphoric, nitric and other), solvents and additives. Resin and talcum powder. Personal protective equipment. Supplies and cleaning products. Waste bins.



Products and results: report of images. Lithographic matrices: stones, boards and others. Prepared materials. Quality testing.



Used or generated information: technical literature, catalogues and monographs of lithography. Sketches. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 3 competition: Stamping in LITHOGRAPHY level: 2 code: UC0925_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: prepare the paper or other media, inks, tools, materials and other supplies needed for stamping, arranging them neatly and taking into account the conditions of security in handling.

CR 1.1 the paper or other media are chosen, according to the characteristics of the image popular or established in the sketches and the chosen printing system (direct or indirect), order it in enough to Chuck.

CR 1.2 the paper is formatted tearing or cutting it according to instructions on the dimension and width of margins for the circulation of the stamps.

CR 1.3 paper is moistened using humidifiers such as vaporizers, sponges and others, according to the needs of the print-run and according to the characteristics of this: composition and weight.

CR 1.4 preparation of other media: fabric, metallic, acrylics and others is carried out taking into account their dimensional variations, textures and other factors that could influence the final result.

CR 1.5 the inks are chosen or prepare, in sufficient quantity, by adjusting its properties: tyre, viscosity, and others, getting tones and the qualities of consistency appropriate to conditions of stamping of the matrix, the type of support and the characteristics of the image.

CR 1.6 rollers are prepared provided them for use in form and place suitable according to their use, keeping them in good condition of cleaning and degreasing during Chuck, and if this is long, projecting its replacement.

CR 1.7 the sponges, scrapers, spatulas and other useful of humidification and inked is have for its use, preserved in good conditions during the stamping.

RP 2: prepare the press of pressure direct or indirect, having it for the stamping, placing in she the matrix and adjusting the pressure.

CR 2.1 it matrix is placed in the press of pressure direct, coining it on the truck or riding it on the deck, avoiding any inequality or body strange that you affect to the make pressure on she and delimiting the career of the truck avoiding that the rake or blade exceed them measures of it stone.

CR 2.2 the rake or blade, in the press of pressure direct, is selected considering them measures of the stone, ensuring the correct state of the leather that it covers.

CR 2.3 the pressure adjustment is made according to the needs of support to printing inks and the nature of the work that will be stamped and in accordance with the characteristics of the printing system used.

CR 2.4 the tympanum of the press is lubricated by applying grease by means of the spatula and providing these materials for their use and application in stamping.

CR 2.5 greasing of the press and the cleaning of the elements in contact with the matrix or the paper are carried out using the elements of machine safety.

CR 2.6 mantle of the print cylinder cleaned with the solvent, making sure it is in proper condition for stamping.

CR 2.7 felts used in direct printing press are chosen according to their type, thickness, number or other characteristics, featuring them in order for your use.

CR 2.8 all operations are performed to comply with the applicable rules of work labor and environmental risk prevention.

3 RP: Prepare arrays print arranging them for his inking and stamping, making registration necessary, respecting the formal and expressive values of the image.


CR 3.1 required registration system applies establishing, where appropriate, the order of stamping arrays depending on the searched result (transparency, opacity, overlay or other) and taking into account the nature and characteristics of the inks.

CR 3.2 clamps that hold the paper and adjustment devices for the same marking is performed according to the correct registration of the stamp.

CR 3.3 matrix is cleaned using a suitable solvent and gets wet with water to remove pigment and clean the surface by placing it to be ink.

CR 3.4 matrix is moistened with the sponge and inks with roller, evenly and without pressure, until the parts corresponding to the image receive ink necessary, taking care to keep the reserved surface moisture.

CR 3.5 the formal and expressive values of the image are reviewed by taking into account the indications of the author and/or the details collected in the sketches.

4 RP: Testing printing prior to the print run to find the inking and the pressure required, taking into account the criteria and indications of the author and/or those included in the sketches.

CR 4.1 equipment pressure adjustments are carried out making prints with different maculaturas and making arrangements appropriate to the pressure required to obtain the stamp model.

CR 4.2 the waste in number of leaves, thickness and hardness is adjusted based on support, inks, and nature of the work performed.

CR 4.3 progressive inking of the matrix occurs in consecutive tests, raising the image to achieve the proper intonation of ink.

CR 4.4 it test of stamping prior to it pulled is made verifying that collects them results in accordance with them indications of the author and/or them details collected in them sketches so serve as model in it rear pulled CR 4.5 them operations for the stamping of them tests is made fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labour and environmental.

5 RP: Make the Chuck to get prints looking for homogeneity among them, correct handling of the paper and equipment in accordance with the quality requirements.

CR 5.1 the matrix previously moistened is inks evenly through the roll, making movements uniform to fill the image.

CR 5.2 the imposition of the paper is done adjusting it with them brands established and according to the system of record chosen.

CR 5.3 the printing is carried out applying the pressure directly on the eardrum that covers the role and the stone, or well form indirect by interposition of the cylinder printer, according to the type of press used.

CR 5.4 marking and the withdrawal of the tender is making a clean paper handling avoiding mancas, scratches and repaints.

CR 5.5 Chuck process is done by avoiding significant variations that appear in a remarkable lack of homogeneity of the prints.

CR 5.6 for obtaining prints operations comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

6 RP: Carry out the drying and pressing of prints using the required equipment to ensure its conservation.

CR 6.1 the means and equipment for drying and pressing are used following the instructions for use, avoiding the loss of ink of the stamp and glazing of white on the margins of the same.

CR 6.2 handling of paper during the drying and pressing processes is carried out according to the conditions of cleaning and proper conservation of the lithographic image.

CR 6.3-means that guarantee the correct conservation of prints: drying, permanent papers and other elements of drying are used to save the lithographic prints, getting the desired effect, taking into account the environmental conditions.

CR 6.4 prints drying is carried out using the methods of drying rack, pressed in vertical baler in wet, pressed dry vertical baler, and others, to achieve the degree of moisture required for their preservation.

CR 6.5 means to guarantee a correct conservation of prints are used to complying with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks and the instructions for use.



Context professional: means of production: stands of stamping: papers, fabrics, metals, acrylics and others. Inks and its components. Lithographic matrices. Materials, tools and equipment from inking: spatulas, rollers and others. Humidification kits: vaporizers, sponges, and others. Printing equipment: direct and indirect, stamping brochure adapted lithographic presses. Equipment, systems and means of drying and pressing. Personal protective equipment.



Products and results: papers, inks, rollers and other stands and prepared materials. Prepared stamping presses. Stamped Chuck preflight testing. Printed lithographic prints. Presses: direct or indirect preparations.



Used or generated information: sketches and/or indications of the author. Bibliography technical, catalogues and monographs of lithography, catalogues of roles and of inks. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



TRAINING module 1: techniques of expression for work graphic level: 2 code: MF0687_2 associated with UC: develop and interpret sketches for graphic work duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: recognize graphic expression techniques, selecting the most suitable for engraving and stamping techniques.

CE1.1 recognize and describe the main materials, tools and procedures of graphic expression.

CE1.2 explain the fundamental resources that provide graphic expression techniques.

CE1.3 relate the resources that provide the techniques of graphic expression with a specific technique of engraving or stamping.

CE1.4 in a practical course characterised by a technique of engraving or stamping set:-select the most appropriate graphic expression techniques: water, strong, oily and mixed u other.

-Determine the materials to use according to the technique of graphic expression selected: pigments, binders and solvents.

C2: Analyze the basic structure of proposed images, recognizing the fundamental elements that compose them and the relations established between them.

CE2.1 describe the basic elements of visual language and rating them as foundations of the construction of the image.

CE2.2 distinguish, viewing and linking, the basic compositional principles of different prints given identifying the main lines of force and care centres.

CE2.3 recognize and describe the main compositional structures in various proposed images of prints and engravings.

CE2.4 compare chromatic and luminous values of different proposed images of prints and engravings by valuing the importance of those in the construction of the image.

C3: Make notes, studies and sketches for graphic art graphic expression techniques and using the basic elements of visual language and compositional principles.

CE3.1 assess the use of sketches, notes, studies and sketches as successive phases in the process of construction of images.

CE3.2 apply techniques of graphic expression, in different practical assumptions, making sketches and notes that collect the basic forms of a composition into lines, frames and/or stains relationally established with certain tonal and color values.

CE3.3 in a practical course of elaboration of sketches and notes and previous studies:-carry out studies of parts or particular aspects that contribute to the development of the sketch.

-Get the final sketches so pick up the work done in notes and previous studies, by setting the tonal and color values in them.

CE3.4 rating the realization of the sketch as medium of expression personal and social, integrating it as a phase in the process of obtaining of recorded and prints.

C4: recognize and rating in different proposed Visual, those aspects technical and aesthetic collected in the images or sketches.

CE4.1 differentiate from a given so-called technical and aesthetic aspects of different images or sketches.

CE4.2 describe the main formal features of a given image.

CE4.3 from different images identify the highlights of each significant content.

CE4.4 rating features formal, significant or different proposals given visual style.

C5: Make the investment of the graphic image on the tracing guide taking into account its characteristics from a series of given sketches.

CE5.1 describe the main methods of inversion of images.

CE5.2 recognize the characteristics of a given matrix related to investment and transfer methods most suitable to them.

CE5.3 rating the features of different images to invest on a tracing guide whereas the process of transfer.

CE5.4 in different practical cases properly characterized by different images:-apply color selections to given images taking into account the order and registration of the matrices.

-Perform the transfer of those different types of images on matrices.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:


C1 on CE1.4; C3 on CE3.3; C5 CE5.3 and CE5.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Use time and effort in expanding knowledge and information complementary.



Contents: 1. materials, techniques and stands of expression graphic for the realization of sketches useful of expression graphic.

Pigments, binders and solvents.

Technical dry and wet of drawing.

Techniques to the water, solid, oily and mixed media in painting.

Supports.



2. analysis of the structure of the image elements basic of the language grafico-plastico.

Visual field (ratio figure).

Organization of the elements in the two-dimensional space.

Lines of force and care centres.

Basic compositional structures.



3. the line as Configurator of image building, descriptive and expressive values in the line.

The line according to the different techniques of engraving and stamping.

The line positive negative.



4. the stain and the values tonal in the image graphic texture and values tonal in the elaboration of images.

Xylographic tonal techniques.

Tonal printmaking techniques.

Tonal lithographic techniques.

Technical tonal screenprinting.

Techniques tonal for other systems for obtaining of graphic works.



5. the color in the graphic image building, descriptive and expressive values of the color.

Juxtaposition and overlapping in the color image.

Planning of the image in color printing processes.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the development and interpretation of sketches for graphic work, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 2: LITHOGRAPHIC processing level: 2 code: MF0924_2 associated with UC: make lithographic matrices duration: 210 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: determine tools, supplies, and materials to be used in obtaining the image, depending on the type of lithographic matrix.

CE1.1 identify the materials used in the process of obtaining the image in lithographic matrix.

CE1.2 testing with pencils, lithographic bars, fat inks, brushes, tips, pens, scrapers, sandpaper, emulsions and light sources, checking their quality, status and correct operation.

CE1.3 properly prepare the wetting solution, the additives: Gum Arabic and others, and the acid: phosphoric, nitric and others, adapting its choice to the nature of rocks or planks.

CE1.4 in a so-called practical preparation of materials characterized by a quality result:-testing of use and response of materials: paper, inks and others, that allow the control and knowledge of their specific characteristics, by checking their quality, status and correct operation.

-Provide all supplies and materials to employ facilitating their location and respecting the optimal conditions of security.

-Perform all operations in meeting the applicable standards on labor and environmental risk prevention.

C2: Prepare various lithographic matrices according to its nature and composition.

CE2.1 identify lithographic arrays according to the nature of the material: stone, metal, emulsified and emulsify.

CE2.2 recognize types and qualities of a given metal plates.

CE2.3 explain the techniques used in the preparation of lithographic matrices.

CE2.4 in a practical course characterised by different matrixes lithographic, make a choice attending a: - the nature of the material: stone, metal, emulsified or without emulsifying.

-The qualities of the stone: hardness, consistency, porosity, thickness, and physical and chemical qualities.

-The types and qualities of metal grids.

-Different emulsions of matrices.

CE2.5 in a practical course of preparation of lithographic plates or stones, and on the basis of different arrays with previous images:-delete images or drawings present in the matrix, using physical or chemical means.

-Polishing the surface of the matrix of lithographic printing, homogenizing it and looking for the correct level as well as the parallel between their faces.

-Carry out measurements using the most appropriate tools: compass, ruler, caliper and others.

-Degrease the matrix, in his case, getting a surface free from grease and impurities, favoring the wettability and inking.

C3: Apply techniques of drawing or lithographic report that enable to create and set the image in the matrix, valuing formal and expressive aspects that characterize the image.

CE3.1 recognize the nature of graphic compositions given, establishing the differences between them and specifying the materials used.

CE3.2 identify technical differences in transfer of image on the lithographic matrices.

CE3.3 in a practical course of preparation of lithographic matrices using lithographic report, and on the basis of a sketch:-relate the structure and other characteristics of the matrix with the sketch, choosing the most appropriate.

-Book margins and gum Arabic white areas to avoid grease them in the process of drawing.

-Report the image, from the given sketch, on the prepared surface of the matrix, facilitating their visualization.

-Process matrix with the appropriate to its nature - stone, metal, or other - mordant, ensuring the stability of the image and its ability to flood, as well as the hydrophilic ability to white areas.

CE3.4 in a practical course of lithographic preparation of arrays using techniques of drawing, from a given sketch:-analyze the expressive values sought by the artist or established in the sketches.

-Draw the matrix applying the procedures of creation of image more suitable to the character of the work.

-Apply the resources own of these technical taking in has them effects graphic wanted.

-Perform skillfully the corrections necessary using the tools own of correction: stone pumice, scrapers, tips and other tools.

-Process the matrix with the mordant right, ensuring the stability of the image and its capacity of inked, as well as the capacity hydrophilic of them areas of white.

CE3.5 etch and reveal a matrix emulsified, respecting the values tonal of the image and ensuring the correct set of the Photolithography.

CE3.6 in a so-called practical characterized by a cromolitografía and starting from the matrices corresponding:-identify the stones corresponding to each color.

-Check the validity and adequacy of the plates or stones.

-Check and adjust the registration system by adapting it to the nature of the plates or stones and the nature of the graphic composition.

CE3.7 perform all operations in accordance with applicable standards of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C4: Rating media and safety equipment in the lithographic process in relation to the applicable standards on labor and environmental risk prevention.

CE4.1 recognize the ideal lighting conditions for the process of drawing in the lithographic matrix.

CE4.2 identify necessary security conditions on the use of drawing, processed, emulsified, sunstroke and revealed array tools.

Given CE4.3 a situation of work type rating ergonomic conditions necessary to achieve good posture during the work, and analyze if the tables, chairs and boards are adapted to ergonomic conditions.

CE4.4 in different practical cases of assessment of media and safety equipment and given a plan of prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection:-identify the risk and level of danger posed by the manipulation of the mordant, solvents and other chemicals used in lithographic printing.

-Manipulate the mordant, solvents and other chemicals, using the personal protective equipment that must be used.

-Use of personal protective equipment according to the standards of performance in the handling and storage of mordants, solvents and other chemicals used in lithographic printing.


Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 CE2.4 and CE2.5; C3 on CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.6; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and use effectively the training using the knowledge acquired.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.



Contents: 1. principles fundamental from the lithograph the workshop of lithography. Organization and maintenance.

Materials, tools and machinery for lithography.

Basics of lithography.

The matrices.

Principles of lithographic printing.

Direct printing.

Indirect printing.

Graphic effects.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2. preparation of lithographic matrix materials and tools.

Differences fundamental between those different types of arrays.

Grained stone (stack of graining, abrasives, and others).

Friable chemical and mechanical of the matrices of metal.

Presensibilizadas, positive and negative plates.



3 lithography on stone materials and tools.

Creation of the image on the matrix.

Processing of stone.

The taking of evidence.



4 lithograph on metal materials and tools.

Creation of the image on the matrix.

Processed on the plate.

The taking of evidence.



5. the Photolithography materials and tools.

Fundamentals of Photolithography.

Fotolitográficos procedures.

The taking of evidence.



6. the chromolithography in lithography techniques and records.

Methods for the application of colour in lithography.

Decomposition of the image.

Transparencies.

Fondinos.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of lithographic arrays, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 3: LITHOGRAPHIC printing level: 2 code: MF0925_2 associated with UC: stamping in lithography duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: rating materials and tools used in lithographic printing processes, by performing the checks and regulation operations required.

CE1.1 identify the useful and most common tools, used in lithographic printing processes.

CE1.2 prepare different stamping tooling: spatulas, rollers and others, having them properly for easy identification and use in printing processes.

CE1.3 format different supports adapted to the features of a particular Edition.

CE1.4 in a practical course of preparation of materials for printing:-choose the papers or other type media valuing its adaptation to the type of stamping to perform.

-Assess the status of the inks used in Chuck checking its ability to film-forming, its hue and intensity.

-Determine most appropriate roller for stamping valuing nature, hardness and size.

C2: Perform start-up operations to lithographic presses, both direct pressure and indirectly, arranging them for stamping.

CE2.1 identify the mechanisms of adjustment on lithographic presses.

CE2.2 establish the order of cleaning of the area in which the matrices are placed keeping it smooth, without any kind of inequality that may affect the application of pressure.

CE2.3 testing of pressure, both in direct printing and indirectly, adjusting pressure to apply adapting it to support printing, the inks used and the type of stamping to perform.

CE2.4 from a print model regulation of the press's printing operations: pressure, type and number of felts, mantilla, waste or other materials needed for dampening the pressure between the matrix and the machine.

CE2.5 choose the type, thickness, characteristics and number of Wicks to be used in a direct-stamping press.

CE2.6 choose more appropriate in a direct lithographic press stamping the type of blade and the thickness of the waste.

CE2.7 in a practical case of indirect printing in offset sacapruebas:-check the proper cleaning of the mantle of the print cylinder.

-Place the matrix on the stand prepared to this end, ensuring the correct set of the same.

-Maintain correct greasing of the eardrum and the press, as well as cleaning complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

C3: Check the lithographic prints looking for greater suitability with respect to support, the number of inks to print and the technique to be used.

CE3.1 determine the order of stamping, if using more than one matrix in function of inks and the result of quality given: transparency, opacity and superposition.

CE3.2 Select registration system of dies suitable for the different stamping systems that you can use.

CE3.3 in a practical course of lithographic printing, starting from a given matrix:-conditioned matrices for print, making proper cleaning by applying the appropriate solvent and the subsequent washing.

-Maintain the level of humidity of a matrix, allowing the correct application of the ink and keeping areas of no image without fat.

-Establish the order of stamping, in the case of using more than one matrix, depending on inks and the desired outcome: transparency, opacity and superposition.

CE3.4 in a practical course of registration for the stamping, based on different matrixes and a print model:-select the registration required for the stamping system looking for accuracy and homogeneity in the prints.

-Apply the registration chosen in a direct printing system.

-Apply the registration chosen in an indirect printing system or interrelated model between both and the result is in accordance with the stamp.

C4: Prepare brackets stamp guaranteeing its degree of moisture, porosity, flexibility and others.

CE4.1 cleaning conditions required to attach the brackets to determine who will receive the impression that guarantee its perfect state during stamping.

CE4.2 moisturize different stands, forcing dilatation, getting to open the pores, thus facilitating the entrance of ink.

CE4.3 set to the control that should be kept in an edition type, on different elements of the environment: the atmosphere, humidity and luminosity of the workshop to avoid both dimensional and other alterations.

CE4.4 replaced properly supports already printed, always avoiding any risk of contamination by fungi and other bacteria, capable of altering its correct conservation.

C5: Use matrices lithographic ink techniques, applying ink or other system of incorporation of color on the matrix taking into account its nature and structure.

CE5.1 establish the correct disposal of inks or other color application systems as well as the necessary supplies, in the table of inking.

CE5.2 in a practical course of inking, starting from a given matrix:-check the viscosity, transparency and other characteristics of the ink, taking into account the type of inking.

-Use other color application systems: chinecollee, fondino and others, adjusting them to the job requirements.

-Run the inking taking into account the degree of humidity of the matrix.

-Testing of stamping according to the uniform application of the ink, depending on the nature of the matrix and engraving.

-Check the correct fixing of the inks on the support that will receive the printing tests.

CE5.3 in a so-called practical trials of inking, from a print model:-apply techniques of ink according to the characteristics of the lithograph.

-Use any other system of incorporation of color, to faithfully reflect the image on the stand.

CE5.4 from the print model, make the correct application of the color matrix.

C6: Make lithographic prints, controlling the correct homogeneity between the prints, within the required quality, and by applying the applicable standards on labor and environmental risk prevention.


CE6.1 identify the operations to be carried out in the process of lithography stamping: inking of matrices, imposition of support and others.

CE6.2 in a practical course of preparation of stamping, starting from a given lithographic arrays:-make correct enforcement of support, taking into account the marks and registration requirements.

-Adjust or modify systems of pressure, both in direct system as indirect presses, getting a correct impression.

-Check the correct registry on each stamp and color parameters, strictly keeping the BAT reference

CE6.3 in a practical course properly characterized, from a print model:-make the correct stamping maintaining uniformity, regularity.

-Check the quality required in the Edition.

-Perform all operations, complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CE6.4 in a practical course and prints packaging from printed media:-select the drying systems required for each stamp.

-Use paper drying, permanent, and others to protect the stamps already printed.

-Apply the systems of pressed should be required.

C7: recognize and analyze prints and techniques of stamping used, according to its characteristics technical and graphic.

CE7.1 identify more stamping techniques.

CE7.2 recognize in the stamping them characteristics techniques of the lithograph.

CE7.3 recognize in different prints them characteristics techniques of the Photolithography.

CE7.4 in a so-called practical of assessment of technical of stamping and starting from a series of prints:-analyze the features and conditions of the support on which is has performed the stamping.

-Identify the properties and characteristics of the inks used in printing.

-Rating the printing techniques used in the different prints.

-Identify methods for the achievement of chromolithography in the prints.

-Analyze the graphic style of the picture in relation to the sketches or preflight testing (BAT).

-To establish the possible correction, if necessary, of the technical resolution of the scanned picture.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.7; C3 on CE3.3 and CE3.4, C5 regarding CE5.2 and CE5.3; SG6 CE6.2, CE6.3 and CE6.4; C7 concerning CE7.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.



Contents: 1. Printing lithographic direct the press lithographic.

The etching press.

Regulation of the press: pressures, felts, mantilla and waste.

Registration in the direct printing systems.

Stamping tools: spatulas, rollers and others.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2 lithographic indirect sacapruebas of offset press stamping.

The lithographic plate fixation systems.

Regulation of pressure in the press sacapruebas.

Registration on indirect printing systems.

Stamping tools: scrapers, rollers and others.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3 brackets used for lithographic printing papers: types, characteristics and properties.

Polyester: properties.

Fabrics: types and features.

Formatted and conditioning of the brackets for the stamping.



4. stamping of chromolithographs inking techniques.

Characteristics of inks: viscosity, transparency, and others.

Characteristics of color printing.

Methods and systems for the application of color: chinecollee, fondino and others.

Methods of registration. Registration marks.

Evidence of stamping.

Control in the application of color.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to printing on lithography, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex X qualification professional: operations in trains of sewn family professional: Arts graphic level: 2 code: ARG290_2 competition general make them works of preparation of materials and control of them machines running the loin / sewn with wire and the elevation / sewn with thread plant e intervening in the process graphic according to the safety, quality and productivity and established.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0691_2: prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for the UC0926_2 binding: adjust parameters, synchronize computers and perform bookbinding staple UC0927_2: adjust parameters, level elements and perform the elevation and sewn with vegetable thread environment professional scope professional develops its activity focuses on Department of bookbinding in operations of sausage/sewn with wire and flat/sewing yarn plant within the family of graphic arts, publishing, newspapers, advertising and packaging. In entities of nature, public or private, large, medium and small size irrespective of their legal form, usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector of graphic industries and is a subsector of industrial binding with the process of binding sausage/stitched with wire and flat/sewn with vegetable thread products publishing, newspapers, magazines, advertising, and other, and any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Binding drivers with staple collators Machinists and sewing thread plant drivers of machines with vegetable thread sewing machine operators sewing machine operators spreads collators associated formation (480 hours) training modules MF0200_2: processes in graphic arts (120 hours) MF0691_2: materials and products for binding (90 hours) MF0926_2: binding staples (120 hours) MF0927_2 : Flat and sewn with vegetable thread (150 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process chart in conditions of security, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: determine the characteristics of the graphics products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the items available and the applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 graphics products are identified from data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to stated technical specifications.

CR 1.2 the graphics to carry out product specifications are valued by identifying its typology and its communicative and functional characteristics - use of the product and applicable regulations.

CR 1.3 graphic to make product functional and technological relations are established according to its component elements: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

1.4 CR phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: prepress, printing bookbinding and finishing, are established from your specifications, by entering data in the workflow.

2 PR: Make the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphic product, in accordance with established specifications.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.


2.3 CR parameters and elements of manufacture of the graphic product in different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 production environment in each of the phases of the graphics processing is determined by the established specifications.

CR 2.5 graphic process monitoring is performed using workflows facilitating planning, automation, procedures and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following the established procedures to take corrective and preventive measures.

3 RP: Verify the parameters of quality in the process through specific equipment to obtain the product with established standards.

CR 3.1 characteristics of quality most significant in each of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and set attributes.

CR 3.2 the graphic product in process checks, verifying that it meets the fundamental concepts of quality in all the phases of manufacture according to the norms and standards.

CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 them results and incidents of the control of quality of the product graphic is recorded through the leaves of control corresponding introducing them in the flow of work.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Digital printer. Communication standards. Workflows. Standard light mixer. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Recorded incidences of quality control. Completed control leaves. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Quality parameters identified in the entire graphic.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical documentation of equipment and pre-press, printing and postpress machines. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and standards of quality to apply in the process chart. Chips techniques of equipment. Maintenance manuals. The company's quality control plans.



2 competition unit: Prepare the materials premiums and LOS products auxiliary for the binding level: 2 code: UC0691_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the technical data on the raw materials of bookbinding from production orders to start the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

CR 1.1 the order of production is revises checking that contains all the information technical and of quality relative to the materials raw and products auxiliary: papers, cartons, tails, wire of steel, thread, skins, fabrics and others, that is van to use in the process of binding.

CR 1.2 the information relative to them equipment auxiliary to use: tools, useful, trucks, binding, seal, pallets, boxes and others is obtained of them orders of production, establishing its use in relation to each an of them materials raw that is used.

1.3 CR model, test or any other product that serves as a model, contrasts with the indications of the work order by checking that both coincide to avoid errors in the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products.

CR 1.4 from preparation of raw materials operations by applying the quality criteria set out by the company.

2 RP: Check printed sheets following the established methods to ensure their quality in the binding process.

CR 2.1 the printed sheets are checked by verifying its quality in terms of the foliation, paths, specific measures and possibilities of scratches, repaint, stiffness, resistance to the bending, meaning of fiber breakage in folding and others, in accordance with work order and/or according to model or test.

CR 2.2 possible defects of the printed sheets relating to the: thickness, weight, resistance to the double sheets, ripped, repainted, shine and others that may have occurred in the printing phase are identified taking the corrective measures.

CR 2.3 elements of registration of specifications such as record of height and side position are checked, ensuring that its positioning and entrance into machine match the specifications of bookbinding machines: collators, folders Guillotines and others, according to the work order.

CR 2.4 observed sheets that do not comply with the company's quality standards are removed by applying the corrective measures.

RP 3: prepare the materials raw and them products auxiliary, applying them methods of work established so is ensure the continuity in the Chuck.

CR 3.1 the quantity and quality of them materials raw and them products auxiliary is checked, ensuring their conformity with the order of production.

CR 3.2 them materials raw is stacked of form ranked in the environment of the machine ensuring the continuity of the production without interruptions, fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

CR 3.3 them materials raw and them products auxiliary is prepared according to the methods of work established ensuring its entry and step by them different machines that configured them processes of binding.

CR 3.4 the measurement of parameters of them products auxiliary: viscosity, temperature, mixtures, is done checking your fitness to them specifications of quality required.

CR 3.5 conservation and storage of auxiliary products is done in an orderly manner, facilitating their location.



Professional context: means of production: materials for bookbinding: papers, cartons, fabrics, leathers, threads, wire, glues and others. Auxiliary equipment of binding: pallets, binding, bindings, boxes and others. Printed sheets. Humidity of the paper, brackets and flexometers drivers. Auxiliary equipment.



Products and results: Quality Control of raw materials, ancillary products and printed sheets. Papers, fabrics, furs, cartons, cardboard and others stacked ready for binding. Auxiliary products: glues, wire, steel wire, prepared for binding.



Used or generated information: work order. Technical documentation of raw materials. Models. Model tests. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards of quality. Technical equipment instructions.



Unit 3 competition: Adjust parameters, synchronize computers and perform the binding with staple level: 2 code: UC0926_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the data for the preparation of the sewn with staple binding / wire from orders production to start the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

CR 1.1 the model or model that accompanies to the order of work is checks before start the preparation of the machine of binding of sewn with wire contrasting it with them data of the order of work, checking number of spreads, signatures, meetings, denials and others.

CR 1.2 them controls of quality defined in the order of work is identified, interpreting the characteristics of them themselves.

CR 1.3 them instructions technical that appear in the order of work is identified validating them to start the preparation of the machine.

CR 1.4 technical instructions concerning types of stacks, finished and tagged are reviewed by checking which appear in the work order.

2 RP: Adjust and synchronize the mechanisms of the machine and ancillary equipment from sewing with wire to put it up according to the technical characteristics of the work and the materials that are to be used.

CR 2.1 the supplied specifications are checked visually observing presenting no anomalies that hinder their subsequent production process, such as: repaint, cracks in bending and stiffness by placing them in elevation for its power stations.

CR 2.2 fixed stations are prepared by placing the brackets, specifications, optical receiving controls suction cups and drop sheets, annulling the bodies that are not going to use.

CR 2.3 paper feeding stations are prepared noting the coincidence of the foot or the head of each of the sheets and cover the sausage, ensuring the proper disposal of them.

CR 2.4 the number of Staples, the placement of them and pressure exerted heads can, as well as the type of wire that feeds them, conform to the technical characteristics of the work to perform.


CR 2.5 it preparation of the guillotine trilateral is performed according to them measures of the product, adjusting them guides depending on the format and of the product to cut and leveling the Rammer according to the support that is going to cut, changing the blade if is observed deficiencies such as nicks, Burr and others.

2.6 CR elements and mechanisms of the system stack and output fit checking its correct operation, doing according to the work in progress.

CR 2.7 them operations of adjustment is made fulfilling the regulations applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

3 RP: Make Chuck to obtain the product staple, according to instructions of the work order, getting the optimum performance of the machines and performing quality controls established.

CR 3.1 sausage/sewn with wire machine gets underway by checking synchronization elements of registration, guides, probes, Staples controls, controls of alignments and others, ensuring proper operation.

3.2 CR collection and the supply of necessary materials for production, such as sheets, wire, strip and others, is done so as to prevent unnecessary stops.

CR 3.3 quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company, guaranteeing the uniformity of results throughout the print run, especially noting possible scratches and marks of drag during the production process.

CR 3.4 copies that are subject to control are stored according to the instructions of the company or the guidelines of the work order control.

CR 3.5 quality data are recorded according to the instructions provided by the company for its contrast with the standard values.

CR 3.6 optimal machine sewn with wire speed is maintained throughout the print run, recording and reporting of incidents detected during it.

3.7 CR data relating to production are identified and are recorded in the document approved by the company in order to contribute to the schemes of production and cost control.

CR 3.8 staple sewing machine handling is performed by complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

4 RP: Strap and/or place products stapled in boxes or pallets for transportation, ensuring their integrity and exposing clearly the information by means of plates.

CR 4.1 necessary tags for the identification of products and pallets are obtained by generating computer systems or provided by those responsible.

4.2 CR stapled products is Packeting, packaging and/or put in boxes, as shown in the work order, using auxiliary machines according to established procedures.

CR 4.3 them products stapled is placed in pallets, following the indications of the order of work, avoiding that in the rear handling and transport of them same is deteriorating the product stapling.

CR 4.4 them products packaged is identified with plates or tags indicating the model and number of copies that contains, as well as the information necessary for its identification.

CR 4.5 the plates or tags are attached boxes and/or pallets according to the instructions of the work order, facilitating the control of the production and helping its easy subsequent identification.

CR 4.6 them strapping and equipment auxiliary is handled fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental.

RP 5: make the maintenance of first level in the machines of sewn with wire / stapling checking them systems of security to keep the machines of stapling point-to-point according to them procedures established.

CR 5.1 the oiled newspaper is performed according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine of sewn with wire.

CR 5.2 operation of the circuits, heads for stapling and air filters is verified according to maintenance standards.

5.3 CR components with wire stitching machines / stapling as well as auxiliary tools, are maintained at the levels of cleaning required according to the regulations and maintenance procedures.

CR 5.4 first level maintenance is carried out according to the plans and registering the data required pursuant to the established procedure.

CR 5.5 security systems are checked to maintain sewing machines with wire in optimal conditions of security according to established procedures.



Professional context: means of production: Embuchadoras-cosedoras of wire, trilateral guillotine. Auxiliary equipment: stacker, strapping-binding. Spreads. Wire. Iron straps. Cartouches. Pallets. Computer means.



Products and results: finished stapled pamphlets or magazines. Magazines or brochures for further productive process. Copies finished for direct delivery to the customer. Products specifications. Sheets sewn with wire. Setting and synchronization of machines and auxiliary equipment. Strapping products and pallets. Quality control of the product. First level maintenance.



Used or generated information: parts of the work. Manual of the manufacturer of the machine. Work orders. Models. Ferros. Prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection plan. Technical details of the ancillary products and maintenance tabs. Standards of quality.



Unit 4 competition: Adjust parameters, level elements and make the lump sum and STITCHED with thread plant level: 2 code: UC0927_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: obtain the data for the preparation of the operations of fixed and sewn with vegetable thread starting from orders production to start the process in accordance with the technical requirements and quality.

1.1 CR model or model that accompanies the work order is checked before starting the preparation of fixed machines and sewn with yarn plant, contrasting it with the work order data, checking: number of sheets, document pagination and others.

CR 1.2 quality controls defined in the work order are identified by interpreting the characteristics of the same.

CR 1.3 identifies technical instructions that appear in the work order validating them to start the preparation of fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread.

CR 1.4 technical instructions concerning types of stacks, finished and tagged with checks that they appear in the work order.

RP 2: Prepare the Collator machine and perform the Chuck for the flat-rate product, according to the instructions of the work order, making the quality controls established.

CR 2.1 paper feeding stations are prepared by noting the coincidence of the foot or head of the elevation of each of the sheets ensuring proper disposal thereof, annulling the bodies that are not going to use.

CR 2.2 sheets collect walk from machine placing them as close as possible from the station corresponding to your document and are checked visually observing presenting no anomalies that hinder their subsequent production.

CR 2.3 of the sheets at each station is powered continuously, avoiding unnecessary stops.

CR 2.4 the elevation is performed keeping the speed optimal of the machine, checking that each station makes it fall of specification of one in one in each last.

CR 2.5 the control of quality is performed according to the frequency established by the company or according to them instructions of the order of work, guaranteeing the uniformity of them results along it pulled.

CR 2.6 them exemplary that are object of the control is saved following the instructions of each company or them guidelines of control of the order of work, registering them data for its contrast with them values standard.

CR 2.7 them spreads elevations is prepare differentiating them between itself through the identification visual by cartouches for the process of stitched with thread plant.

CR 2.8 the handling of the machine is performed fulfilling the normative applicable of prevention of risks labor and protection environmental.

3 RP: Regular and adjust the mechanisms of machine sewn with vegetable thread to put it up, in accordance with the technical characteristics of the work and the materials that are to be used.

CR 3.1 them raised of spreads or blocks supplied is checked visually observing that are all them signatures without anteposiciones and that not present anomalies that hinder their later process of production.

CR 3.2 them possible differences between the product to sewing and the model is checked previously, performing a sample of the product and comparing it with the model or model.

CR 3.3 them parameters of the work for the sewn of them spreads is introduced in the computer or panel of control of the machine, adjusting them according to them measures of booklet, number of sheets, number of pages of each specification, type of opening of the booklet, number of pages of the book and others.

CR 3.4 the brackets of the machine cross stitch with thread vegetable is in accordance, introducing them measures in the station of power of them spreads.

3.5 CR fit for transportation and opening of the sheets is performed by adjusting the suction of the cups or the length of the pusher or clamp.

3.6 CR Ridge, needles, punches and hooks are adjusted taking into account the characteristics of the paper is going to sew.


CR 3.7 the parameters relative to the number of seams, position and pressure exerted Stitchers heads, the type of thread and others, are introduced into the control panel of the machine, adjusting them to the specifications of the order of the work and/or the work that is to be performed.

3.8 CR elements and mechanisms of the system stack and output are adjusted depending on the process requirements, checking its correct operation.

4 PR: Make Chuck for the sewn product, according to the instructions of the work order, getting the optimum performance of the machines and the quality specified in the work order.

CR 4.1 machine sewn with vegetable thread becomes brand checking synchronization log, guides, coils and alignment controls elements, and others and ensuring their correct operation.

CR 4.2 the gathering and the power of them materials needed for the production, such as spreads e thread, is performed so that is avoid stops unnecessary.

CR 4.3 the control of quality of it cross stitch is performs following the instructions of the order of work, guaranteeing the uniformity of them results along it pulled.

CR 4.4 copies that are subject to control are stored according to the instructions of the company or the guidelines of the work order control.

CR 4.5 them data relating to it quality is recorded by applying the procedures established for its contrast with them values standard.

CR 4.6 the speed optimal of the machine of stitched with thread vegetable is maintains along it pulled, registering e reporting of them incidents detected during it pulled.

CR 4.7 them data relating to the production is recorded in the document enabled by the company in order contribute to the control of them plans of production and of costs, identifying all the data required.

CR 4.8 management of vegetable yarn sewing machine is complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

RP 5: Place the items sewn on pallets for internal transport, ensuring their integrity and exposing clear information content by gussets.

CR 5.1 sewn products are placed on pallets, following the indications of the work order, avoiding that in the subsequent handling and transport them to deteriorate.

CR 5.2 the cartouches are chosen according to the standards of size, color, and fields to fill.

CR 5.3 the plates are filled with clearly identifying content and amount of boxes or pallets.

CR 5.4 the plates are attached to the pallets according to the instructions of the work order facilitating the control of the production and helping their subsequent identification.

5.5 CR sheets excess stacks, is identified and stored, facilitating their recovery during the consecutive processes.

6 RP: The maintenance of first level in with vegetable thread sewing machines and check safety systems to maintain fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread to point according to established procedures.

CR 6.1 periodic greasing is done according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CR 6.2 the operation of the circuits, heads of sewn and filters of air is verifies according to the standards of maintenance established.

CR 6.3 components sewn with vegetable thread as well as auxiliary tools machines, are kept in the cleanup levels established in the rules of maintenance.

CR 6.4 first level maintenance is carried out according to the plans and registering the data required in the procedures.

CR 6.5 machines and auxiliary equipment are kept in conditions of security, regularly testing security systems.



Professional context: means of production: collators, sewing with vegetable thread. Auxiliary equipment: stackers. Computer means. Spreads. Vegetable thread. Cartouches. Pallets.



Products and results: tuning the gatherer and the cross stitch. Elevations spreads. Spreads with vegetable thread-sewn. Blocks of books, magazines or brochures prepared for their subsequent binding. Stacked and identified by means of plates products. Quality control of the product. Maintenance of first level.



Used or generated information: parts of the work. Manual of the manufacturer of the machine. Work orders. Models. Quality procedures. Plans and standards of labor and environmental risk prevention. Technical details of the ancillary equipment and maintenance tabs. Applicable quality standards.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in an environment of production defined, describe through flows of work the sequence of tasks or operations for the obtaining of the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Dithering.

-Profile of those characters.

-Footprint or embossed on the support.

-Defects in the print.

-Number of past in machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finished, describing and relating their main phases with the machines, equipment, materials raw and products used.

CE1.7 describe the systems electronic from print more significant.

CE1.8 describe and recognize them features of the process of postpress to the elaboration of a product graphic type according to the process defined and the materials used.

C2: classify the products graphics according to their composition and their features functional: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the functional characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify the structural characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 from samples of graphics products:-recognize its physico-chemical composition and identify their functional capacity.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent the colorimetric values in the chromatic spaces.

-To assess the differences in color and the possibility of playing in the graphics system.

-Measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating readings on a template.

C4: Relate the applicable standards on prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing with operations carried out in each of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the graphics processing.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.


CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometers, colorimeters, strips from control and control on production line equipment, identifying its application in different phases of the graphic process.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the features of quality more significant of them products of:-binding and manipulated: valuation subjective, marks of court, footprints, signals of record, glued.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Resistance to the rub.

-Printing: density, ' trapping', gain of stamping, balance of color, pasting, sliding, register.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Maintaining an assertive attitude, empathic and conciliatory with others showing cordiality and kindness in the deal.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of graphics products.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Prepress systems. Original classes. Latent image, development process. Adaptation to the environment of flow of work digital.

Peripheral of entry, peripheral of output, software and hardware specific, processing and systems of testing.

Layout and Assembly. Elements of the Assembly. Software specific.

Systems of printing. Equipment, benefits, comparison of the different systems.

Types of inks and stands for each system of printing.

Binding and processed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and its measuring nature of the light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of the vision.

Space chromatic.

Factors that affect to the perception of the color.

Theory of the color. Synthesis additive and subtractive of the color.

Systems of representation of the color: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3. rules of prevention of risks labor and environmental applicable in processes of Arts graphic plans and standards of safety.

Standards in force.

Signals and alarms.

Regulatory environment.



4. quality in the processes of Arts graphic trials, instruments and measurements more features.

Quality in prepress: gain of point, balance of gray and density.

Variables of printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, gain of stamping, balance of color and of gray).

Areas of control in the printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of quality.



5 quality control in graphic arts quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control phases: reception of materials, processes and products.

Norms and standards related to the graphic process.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: materials and products for binding level: 2 code: MF0691_2 associated with UC: prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for bookbinding duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: interpret the working procedures in the preparation of raw materials in processes of binding from production orders.

CE1.1 be a sequencing of the binding process by means of the interpretation of a work order type, identifying the materials used in each case.

CE1.2 contrast indications of different work orders with a model type with binding instructions.

CE1.3 in a practical course of data extraction of raw materials for binding, from a mock-up model:-check that in the model are all data relating to the binding to perform.

-Identify those papers, cartons, threads and other materials required according to the model.

-Assess the established quality criteria.

CE1.4 in a practical course of identification of raw materials, from a production type order:-interpret the work order relating information technical and production with the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary equipment to be used such as wheelbarrows, binding, seal, pallets, boxes, spreads to bind and others.

-Recognize the raw materials for binding different trains.

-Identify the auxiliary elements of the machines.

C2: Analyze the printed sheets regarding its quality in the binding process.

CE2.1 measurements of printed sheets handling the corresponding measuring instruments assessing the following properties:-squaring of the specifications.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Moisture in paper.

CE2.2 in a practical case of checking the quality, from actual printed sheets check the quality in the following aspects:-the foliation.

-Paths.

-Registry.

-Specific measures.

-Repaints.

-Stiffness.

-Resistance to the bending.

-Sense of fiber.

-Break into the fold.

CE2.3 detect, in actual printed samples, defects in printing, using a Chuck with defective specifications.

C3: apply the methods of preparation of them materials raw and them products auxiliary for a process of binding, in accordance with the requirements of production.

CE3.1 interpret methods of work, taken from the reality of a company, on handling of materials raw and products auxiliary of binding.

The CE3.2 is analyzing the characteristic of binding companies storage process.

CE3.3 relate the materials with the procedures and conditions requiring its storage.

CE3.4 in a practical course of preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products in accordance with an order of real work:-check the quantity and quality of raw materials and auxiliary products.

-Piled raw materials and auxiliary products and handle them according to the established work methods to ensure your entry and passage through the various machines which configured binding processes.

-Identify the established safety standards for stacking the raw materials and auxiliary equipment.

C4: To evaluate the characteristics of the variables of quality of raw materials, using appropriate instruments.


CE4.1 relate the durability and performance of the various media used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: moisture and temperature, the storage, the direction of the fiber.

CE4.2 relate the durability and performance of various chemicals used in the binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: temperature, humidity, composition, oxidation and light.

CE4.3 differentiate the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for the control of quality of raw materials.

CE4.4 in a so-called practical of an essay of materials for binding, starting from some equipment of measurement:-handle them useful and instruments of measurement: hygrometer, thermometer, balance of precision, viscometer, microscope.

-Obtain the values of humidity, pressure, density, dimension of media, materials and raw materials variations.

-Express correctly the results of the measures.

CE4.5 check that the properties of the different raw materials used in bookbinding processes are in line with the characteristics of the materials to be bound and to the final result for which they are intended.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 regarding CE2.2; C3 on CE3.4; C4 on CE4.4.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Get used to the pace of work of the company.

Learn new concepts or procedures and to effectively leverage the training using the knowledge acquired.

Convey information with clarity, in an orderly manner, structured, clear and precise respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.



Contents: 1. materials premiums in binding paths: classes and features.

Standard sizes of sheets.

Printed binding specifications: inpainting and stiffness.

Resistance to bending.

Sense of fiber.

Break in the fold.

Tails. Types. Features.

And varnishes. Types. Features.

Wire. Types. Features.

Threads. Types. Features.



2. packing and storage in bookbinding storage conditions. Temperature and humidity.

Automatic storage systems.

Stack. Cartouches.

Binding: operation and management.

Seal: types and placement.

Pallets: placement and management.

Boxes: types, use depending on the material.

Shrinkwrapper: management and use.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. ancillary elements of bookbinding machines. Benefits.

Types of machines for the binding process.

Components of the machines.

Auxiliary equipment of the machines.

Guillotines.



4 quality control of raw materials of bookbinding quality of print.

Control of viscosity.

Drying times.

Resistance to rubbing and scratching of varnishes and glues.

Most characteristic measurements and trials.

Measuring devices: gyrometer, measuring tape, gauges, micrometer, thermometer and viscometer.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and auxiliary products for the binding, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 3: binding with staple level: 2 code: MF0926_2 associated with UC: adjust parameters, synchronize computers and make the binder clip duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: carrying out preparation and adjustment in elevation and machines staple/wire thread binding, synchronizing mechanisms of implementation underway, according to requirements of the job.

CE1.1 identify the mechanisms of preparation in the staple/wire for wire binding machines on-site or through catalogues and machines planes.

CE1.2 recognize the elevation stations, identifying its components: brackets, suction cups and others.

CE1.3 in a practical course, preparation of fixed machines and bookbinding with thread wire, from a given work order:-check that the supplied binding specifications not anomalies that hinder their subsequent production.

-Prepare fixed stations, by placing brackets, suction cups, optical controls changed specification and spreads drop tray.

-Prepare the paper feed stations, loading them properly, noting the coincidence of the foot or the head of each of the sheets and cover the sausage.

-Control those elements of record, guides, transducers, controls of staples and controls of power, so its operation is safe and constant.

-Adjust the position and pressure of them heads can and have the type of wire appropriate to the specifications of the work indicated in the order of work.

-Prepare the guillotine trilateral, adjusting the guides depending on the format and of the product to cut, as well as the leveling of the Rammer according to the support to cut for its correct operation.

-Check the quality of the cut of the blades and, in case of Nick or burrs, change them of form secure and correct.

CE1.4 adjust them elements and mechanisms of the system of stack and output of a machine of stitched with thread of wire given, checking its correct operation to avoid jams and products defective.

C2: Carry out the operations of bound with thread wire from some job specifications, performing quality control and compliance with required safety standards.

CE2.1 recognize thread wire binding machines, describing its components and operations of each one of them: power, elevation, sausage and others.

CE2.2 interpret the instructions necessary for the staple/wire thread bound specified in a work order.

CE2.3 in a practical course of bound with wire from a given work order thread:-regulating mechanisms of tender sausage feeding stations.

-Heads of stapling.

-Trilateral.

-Output and stack.

CE2.4 operate with main machines of staple-bound to make Chuck and get the required quality.

CE2.5 properly dispose materials into machines, in order to get the results and required times.

CE2.6 in a practical course of bound staple, from materials to bind:-set the appropriate speed of the machine in relation to the materials to be bound.

-Relate the causes and effects of the reset of the binding parameters.

-Get bound copies of the forms with the required quality.

CE2.7 describe the method and frequency of bound sampling, during a specific circulation, according to the requirements of a quality system established.

CE2.8 in a practical course for the evaluation of the safety in the process and given a plan of environmental protection and occupational health protection:-identify the risk and level of danger involved in the handling of materials, products and equipment used in the staple binding.

-Identify and describe the mechanisms of various machinery safety of staple-bound: buttons stop, protections, housings, as well as the personal protective equipment that must be used.

-Recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of waste produced in the workplace.

C3: Carry out operations of packaging and placement of products bound with staple/wire in boxes or pallets.

CE3.1 identify signs and identification systems normally used in staple binding processes.

CE3.2 filling plates for identification of contents of boxes and pallets of various assumptions of work, in accordance with the methods outlined in a company model.

CE3.3 in a practical case of strapping, from exemplary sausage/sewn with wire thread:-carry out the strapping of copies elevations/sewn with wire thread.

-Pack them in boxes, looking for the perfect fit that would prevent further deterioration.

-Place on pallets the exemplary sausage/sewn with wire its subsequent binding thread.


CE3.4 given a bound copy with staple products, place them in boxes or pallets, attaching the plates in accordance with the indications of an established order of work.

C4: Apply first level maintenance on machines that are involved in the process of with staple binding.

CE4.1 identify, in a binding machine given staple, willing greasing points, following the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.

CE4.2 interpret maintenance of staple binding machines.

CE4.3 in a given staple binding machine, and following the established maintenance standards, make the lubrication of the greasing points provided and test circuits and air filters.

CE4.4 cleaning of the elements set out in the standards of maintenance.

Skills whose acquisition should be completed in an environment real of work: C1 respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.3, CE2.6 and CE2.8; C3 on CE3.3.

Other capabilities: participate and collaborate actively in the team's work.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.

Get used to the pace of work of the organization.

Responsibility are of the work that develops.



Contents: 1. procedures of staple/wire process thread binding's bound with Staples. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Machines of bound with Staples.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



2. preparation of binding machines with staple/wire handler thread. Preparation and calibration.

Electromechanical elements.

Settings and synchronization.

Preparation of sausage stations.

Preparation of can heads.

Preparation of the trilateral guillotine.

Registry items.

Elements of stack and output.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. operation and management of binding machines with staple/wire operation of machine elements bind.

Mechanisms of the binding machines.

Quality control in the process.

Defects themselves from the system.

Maintenance of first level.

Standards of safety related with the operation of the machine.

Personal protective equipment.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of parameters, timing equipment and perform the binding Staples, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



MODULE training 4: elevation and SEWN with thread vegetable level: 2 code: MF0927_2 associated to the UC: adjust parameters, level elements and perform the elevation and sewn with thread vegetable duration: 150 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: make operations of regulation in mechanisms of maneuver and service of them machines for perform the elevation and sewn with thread vegetable in conditions of quality.

CE1.1 identify and explain the use of them handlers that allow calibrate and prepare them elements that form the equipment of bookbinding with thread vegetable.

CE1.2 in a practical course of adjustment of machines, from a conveniently characterized work order and attached a model or model:-check that the work order data correspond exactly with the model or model, identifying all the data contained therein.

-Correctly interpret technical instructions listed in the work order.

-Identify in the work order number of sheets, paging, and other data.

-Identify the quality controls required in the order of work and its practical application.

CE1.3 enter data preparation of fixed machine and sewn with vegetable thread in the same control panel.

C2: Make adjustments in the mechanisms for the implementation underway fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread, adapted to the type of work and materials used.

CE2.1 identify mechanisms of implementation underway in fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread.

CE2.2 recognize elements of adjustment in the stations of sewing such as needles, awls, and others.

CE2.3 in a so-called practical of regulation of mechanisms of elevation and sewn with thread vegetable, starting from ones spreads and an order of work given:-prepare them stations of power of paper of the machine Collator, loading them correctly and checking it coincidence of the foot or of the head of the elevation of each one of them spreads and of the cover.

-Adjust, in machine sewn with vegetable thread, the number of seams, the position and pressure of Stitchers heads.

-Have the type of thread suitable to the needs of the work specified in the work order.

-Check and adjust, machine sewn with vegetable thread, the separation distance between books for correct differentiation of each unit.

-Adjust the suction of the cups, the length of the pusher and control and adjust the stand, needles, punches and hooks in relation to the role that will be sewing.

-Control record elements and controls power of machines, so that its operation is safe and steady.

CE2.4 adjust the elements and mechanisms of the system of stacked, separation and output of a given machine, checking its correct operation to avoid traffic jams and defective products.

C3: Carry out operations of fixed and sewn with vegetable thread, adjusting to the requirements of the job carrying out quality control and compliance with required safety standards.

CE3.1 interpret the instructions necessary for the elevation and sewn with vegetable thread specified in a given work order.

CE3.2 describe the method and frequency of obtaining samples sewn for a specific circulation, according to the requirements of the established quality system.

CE3.3 linking machines and materials to bind sewn with vegetable thread with appropriate speed.

CE3.4 in a practical course of flat/sewn with vegetable thread, from a few sheets and a work order given:-have spreads in the machines properly, in order to get the results and required times.

-Make Chuck and get the required quality to operate with fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread.

-Obtain copies sewn with the required quality.

CE3.5 relate the causes and the most common effects on adjustment of the parameters of the bound sewn with vegetable thread.

CE3.6 identify and describe the security mechanisms of different bound with vegetable thread sewing machines: stop buttons, protections and housing.

CE3.7 in a so-called practical of operations of elevation and sewn and given a plan of prevention of risks labor and proteccionambiental:-identify them risks and level of endangerment that assumes the manipulation of them materials, products and equipment employees in it binding stitched with thread vegetable.

-Identify the standards of performance that appear the plan related with them operations of elevation and stitched as well as them teams of protection individual that must use is.

-Recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced in the since of work.

C4: perform operations of strapping and placement of them products sewn with thread plant in boxes or pallets, identifying those products by plates.

CE4.1 identify them systems of signaling and identification employees normally in the processes of stitched with thread plant.

CE4.2 filling plates for identification of contents of boxes and pallets of various assumptions of work, in accordance with the methods outlined in a company model.

CE4.3 in a so-called practical of strapping starting from exemplary elevations / sewn with thread plant:-make the strapping of them exemplary elevations / sewn with yarn plant.

-Pack them in boxes, looking for the perfect fit that would prevent further deterioration.

-Place in pallets them exemplary elevations / sewn with thread plant for their subsequent binding.

CE4.4 given some products sewn with thread vegetable, place them in boxes and pallets attaching them plates according to the indications of an order of work.

C5: apply the operations of maintenance of first level in the machines that involved in the process of elevation and sewn with thread plant.

CE5.1 identify them points of lubrication willing according to in them machines of elevation and stitched with thread vegetable according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the machine.


CE5.2 perform the greasing greasing points provided for in rules of maintenance of fixed machines and sewn.

CE5.3 check the circuits and filters of air according to the standards of maintenance established.

CE5.4 make the cleaning of the elements established in the standards of maintenance.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.2; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 on CE3.4 and CE3.7; C4 on CE4.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Communicate is effectively with them people right in each moment, respecting them channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.



Contents: 1. procedures of binding with vegetable thread sewn with vegetable thread process. Technological principles.

Operations. Parameters of control.

Fixed machines and sewn with vegetable thread.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



2. preparation and commissioning of elevation adjustment of parameters of production machines.

Preparation of mechanisms of control and service.

Electromechanical elements.

Preparation of feeding stations.

Regulation of fixed units.

Preparation of units of output.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



3. preparation and commissioning of machine sewn with vegetable thread adjustment of production parameters.

Preparation of mechanisms of control and service.

Electromechanical elements.

Preparation of feeding stations.

Output systems.

Regulation of units Stitchers with vegetable thread sewing machines.

Preparation of units of output.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



4 operation and management of elevation elevation machines performance machines.

During the elevation tool settings.

Quality control in the elevation.

Driving, stack and output systems.

Cleaning and maintenance of first level.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



5. operation and management of machine sewn with vegetable thread sewing machines performance.

Operation of those elements of the machine's sewing with thread vegetable.

Adjustment on the machine during the sewn with yarn plant.

Configurations of the machines for every type of work.

Cleaning and maintenance of first level.

Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.

Personal protective equipment.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of parameters, leveling elements and realization of the elevation and sewn with vegetable thread, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.

Annex XI professional qualification: Treatment and layout of elements prepress family professional graphics: graphic arts level: 2 code: ARG291_2 general digitizing and competition treat texts and images, integrating them using the DTP or DTP, guaranteeing correct reproduction in the medium and support established, by intervening in the graphic process according to certain quality and productivity.



Units of competence UC0200_2: operate on the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity UC0928_2: scan and imaging software applications UC0929_2 treatment: digitize and treat texts using computer applications UC0930_2: perform layout or layout of graphics products environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in prepress in graphic companies dedicated to the treatment of images and texts and layout thereof. In entities of nature, public or private, small, medium and large size and irrespective of their legal form, usually works employed and depending, where applicable, functional and/or hierarchical from a superior. You may occasionally have people in charge and/or be team leader. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, publishing, manipulated and transformed businesses that deal with images and texts incorporating them through the layout in other products, advertising, periodical publications, packaging and packaging and others and any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Preparers of texts keyboard players layout prepress technicians / sorters preparers images preparers sorters digital files in digital scanning/specialists color testing integrators of photographic retouchers prepress operators training associate (600 hours) training modules MF0200_2: processes in graphic arts (120 hours) MF0928_2: Digital Imaging (210 hours) MF0929_2: treatment of texts for the layout (90 hours) MF0930_2 : Layout and DTP of graphics products (180 hours) unit of competition 1: operate in the process chart in conditions of security, quality and productivity level: 2 code: UC0200_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: determine the characteristics of the graphics products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the items available and the applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 graphics products are identified from data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to stated technical specifications.

CR 1.2 the graphics to carry out product specifications are valued by identifying its typology and its communicative and functional characteristics - use of the product and applicable regulations.

CR 1.3 graphic to make product functional and technological relations are established according to its component elements: stationery, jewellery boxes, editing, advertising, and others.

1.4 CR phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: prepress, printing bookbinding and finishing, are established from your specifications, by entering data in the workflow.

2 PR: Make the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphic product, in accordance with established specifications.

CR 2.1 stages of production in the graphics processing are determined by specifying each one of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, type of product, and others.

CR 2.2 the production parameters are standardized in the workflow depending on the type of graphic product: packaging, editorial product, posters and others, following the established procedures.

2.3 CR parameters and elements of manufacture of the graphic product in different phases of the process: prepress, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 production environment in each of the phases of the graphics processing is determined by the established specifications.

CR 2.5 graphic process monitoring is performed using workflows facilitating planning, automation, procedures and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 them incidents that arise in the process is recorded in the flow of work following the procedures established to take them measures corrective and preventive necessary.

3 RP: Verify the parameters of quality in the process through specific equipment to obtain the product with established standards.

CR 3.1 characteristics of quality most significant in each of the phases of the process are identified according to variables and set attributes.

CR 3.2 the graphic product in process checks, verifying that it meets the fundamental concepts of quality in all the phases of manufacture according to the norms and standards.


CR 3.3 quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product methodically apply according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measuring equipment.

CR 3.4 control frequencies are applied according to the type of features to control and the number of units of product to obtain, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 results and incidents of graphic product quality control are registered by the leaves of control corresponding to inserting them in the workflow.

CR 3.6 verification of the quality of the graphics processing is done to comply with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: equipment and specific software. Digital printer. Communication standards. Workflows. Standard light mixer. Equipment and tools for measurement and control: spectrophotometer, densitometer, linen testers, colorimeter and tipometro.



Products and results: production parameters introduced in the workflow. Incidences in the control of quality registered. Leaves of control completed. Anomalies or defects reported processes. Parameters of quality identified in all the process chart.



Information used or generated: order of production. Documentation technique of equipment and machines of prepress, printing and postpress. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Standards and quality in the graphics processing standards. Technical specifications of equipment. Maintenance manuals. The company's quality control plans.



Unit 2 competition: DIGITIZE and make the treatment of images through applications computer level: 2 code: UC0928_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: check the original of images, classifying them and adapting them for their treatment, taking into account the established process of production and its technical characteristics.

1.1 CR originals received are reviewed by checking technical specifications, the needs of the production process, or the technical characteristics of the model.

1.2 CR transparencies, opaque and received printed originals are checked according to the characteristics of the support, the good condition of the originals and assessing the feasibility of reproduction.

Technical characteristics of digital originals 1.3 CR: mode of color, depth of color, size, and others they occur, modifying them in function of the production process, the corresponding profiles of the equipment tests and print corresponding machines and the final support, following the indications of work order.

1.4 CR originals are classified according to the type of support and the various processes to be carried out in the defined workflow.

2 RP: Maintenance of colour management digitizers devices and monitors to maintain consistency in the process of obtaining and processing of images, according to the technical instructions.

CR 2.1 monitor calibration is performed following the guidelines established in the technical procedure, by means of specific application, determining the characteristics of luminance and its tolerance in the device, adjusting brightness and contrast, and by prefixing the color temperature and range through observation under standard conditions.

CR 2.2 monitor characterization is done following the guidelines established in the technical procedure, using the specific application module and appropriate measurement instrumentation (colorimeter of screen or spectrophotometer), storing the result of color profile in the operating system and keeping it active for the computer applications that are used.

2.3 CR digitizers devices calibration is performed following the guidelines established in the technical procedure, through the procedures established by the manufacturer through patterns or own Cot and acting on the software options that control them.

CR 2.4 the digitizer device characterization is done following the guidelines laid down in the technical procedure, through the use of specific applications and scanning, under default conditions, a color chart or developed standard pattern.

3 RP: Perform the digitization of the images for their treatment, according to the technical specifications of the product and the defined quality standards.

CR 3.1 the original images are cleaned by removing specks, dust or other that can alter the reproduction.

CR 3.2 originals are prepared for their scanning by checking the settings, cuts, factor zoom and other indications, taking into account the characteristics of the same, those of the capture team and the technical characteristics of the product.

CR 3.3 preparation of the digitizing device is adjusting and setting up all the necessary parameters for scanning.

CR 3.4 images color profiles are selected depending on the device of digitalization, the support of the images and the color space specified, according to the needs of the production process.

CR 3.5 control the color of images applies certain color spaces, characteristic of the digitizing device response and treatment with respect to support of the image and the color of the original.

CR 3.6 device settings are configured by setting the settings, scaled and resolutions according to leaf production specifications and the needs of the production process.

CR 3.7 the digital reproduction of the original fits the technical specifications of production through the use of tools and specific computer applications.

CR 3.8 scanned images are checked on screen, assessing their quality, detecting possible deviations of color, errors in lights and shadows and other defects, valuing its composition and verifying that the retrieved digital original conforms to the specifications of the work.

4 RP: Perform digital processing of images, using computer applications, to adapt them to the needs of the final product, conforming to the technical specifications of the production process.

CR 4.1 preparation of the necessary equipment in the treatment of images is done checking calibration and active color monitor profile.

CR 4.2 configuration of the color management in software applications of image processing is done considering the recommendations of the manufacturers and standards organizations, as well as the color set in the production process flow.

CR 4.3 color transformations are performed applying the color control standards established for production flow.

CR 4.4 with respect to the original color corrections, are adapting the quality according to the requirements of the final product.

CR 4.5 them defects, impurities and elements not desired are removed using tools of retouching, improving the quality of the product end.

CR 4.6 them images definitive is adapted to the features technical of the medium or support established: paper, web, multimedia u others stands, and to the needs of the process productive.

CR 4.7 it correction of them files digital of them images is performed considering the indications made in them tests printed through them applications computer appropriate.

CR 4.8 the possible incidents of control of quality is recorded in the corresponding sheets of control.

RP 5: perform Photomontages of images through programs computer specific, to adapt them to the needs of the product end, adjusting is to the model and/or them specifications technical.

CR 5.1 them images necessary to perform the photomontage is classified according to its features digital, the space of color, the resolution and others.

5.2 CR images that make up the collage are measured technically and are specifically adapted to the required technical characteristics.

CR 5.3 are assembled with images that keep these qualities appropriate harmony, naturalness and color balance.

CR 5.4 masks and necessary paths are made by applying technical criteria in accordance with the needs of fusion.

CR 5.5 fusion of photomontage is smooth and undetectable to eliminating the pronounced stepping.

CR 5.6 photomontage file is stored using the format picture appropriate to the needs of the production process.

6 RP: Perform and treat vector graphic elements using computer applications to integrate them into the production process, adapting them to technical specifications.

CR 6.1 preparation of the necessary equipment in the vector drawing is done checking calibration, and active color monitor profile.

CR 6.2 configuration of the color management in software applications of vector drawing is done considering the recommendations of manufacturers and standardization organizations and the flow control of the color set in the production process.

CR 6.3 values obtained in the color management settings are set as of the application preferences with which we are working.


CR 6.4 them graphic vector is created through them applications computer specific getting it optimization proper for its reproduction, checking its quality through tests of printing intermediate.

CR 6.5 them colors defined in them graphics vector is checked by adjusting them according to the flow of color established and the limitations of the device of reproduction end.

CR 6.6 the transformations of color of them graphic vector is made adapting them to the specifications of color established for the flow of production.

CR 6.7 vector graphics functionality is assessed by verifying the existence and accuracy of all the elements, as well as the availability of used fonts.

CR 6.8 vector graphics are stored in the appropriate file format for the flow of production, verifying that they meet established quality standards and that the format is appropriate to the flow of production.

7 RP: Obtain intermediate tests and final for the assessment of the color and quality of images, depending on the production process, by applying established technical and quality specifications and verifying its proper performance.

CR 7.1 preparation of the testing device is performed according to the procedures established in the company, compliance with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

CR 7.2 testing devices conform configuration and calibration of the same in accordance with the established quality standards.

CR 7.3 choosing raw materials, media and inks to obtain the evidence is carried out according to the type, quality and device.

CR 7.4 tests are obtained by launching the digital archive with printing parameters appropriate to the output device depending on the type, quality and objective of the test, in accordance with the technical specifications and requirements of the final product.

7.5 CR control and stability of the process of printed proofs, as well as its end result is done through quality procedures established by the company.

CR 7.6 the evidence obtained are verified by checking that they lack technical anomalies of the printing process and which contain all the elements necessary to assess the colour and quality of the image control and registration.



Context professional: means of production: equipment computer. Digitizers devices. Testing equipment. Measurement and control of color devices: densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Monitors. Scanning, image and vector drawing software. Workflows, color control and check-up programs software. Banks of images and vector graphics. Materials bonuses for test systems. Console light standard and Assembly table. Tools and measuring instruments: rules, tipometro, linen testers.



Products and results: scanned images. Framed images. Images corrected. Photomontages in support digital made. Graphics, logos and vector products in digital format made. Color proofing, correction tests and evidence of contract.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical specifications sheet. Information on the process of production of the product. Established workflow and quality control. Check and control sheets. Information provided by the customer: sketches and mock-ups of the graphic product. Specific color libraries. Catalogues of paper or other media. Catalogues of images and vector graphics. Procedure technical of characterization and calibration. Technical documentation of equipment, applications and prepress workflows. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 3 competition: DIGITIZE and treat texts through applications computer level: 2 code: UC0929_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: rating received texts to determine their method of reproduction, according to technical specifications and/or the model.

CR 1.1 texts are identified through checking the technical specifications and instructions provided by the customer.

CR 1.2 the accuracy of the received texts and the character set is checked in accordance with the technical specifications of the product and provided originals.

CR 1.3 format and encoding of text files received in digital format is checked taking into account the particularities of the computer application of DTP or DTP.

CR 1.4 the readability of texts received on paper is assessed taking into account the specifications of the production sheet and determining your scanning or typing.

RP 2: Perform the digitization of texts for further treatment, using the equipment and software applications suitable for the subsequent production process.

CR 2.1 configuration parameters in the scanning software is attending to the needs of the texts to digitize.

CR 2.2 text be digitised by computers and applications of optical scanning and character recognition according to the criteria laid down in the technical specifications.

CR 2.3 the already digitized text is purged of errors committed by the implementation of character recognition according to the spelling rules.

CR 2.4 text is composed, where applicable, with the type specified in the operating instructions and following the spelling rules.

CR 2.5 text files are stored in files adapt format to the needs of the computer application of DTP or DTP.

3 RP: Carry out treatment of the texts through typographic styles to match technical specifications, using the equipment and software applications adapted to the established workflow.

CR 3.1 digital fonts are selected and loaded into the program of composition of texts according to the operating system being used and the technical specifications.

CR 3.2 used fonts character set conforms to the spelling of the text needs to style or editorial specifications.

CR 3.3 the text is typographically according to the criteria laid down in the technical specifications or book of style or corporate identity provided by the client.

CR 3.4 color application to texts is performed using standard color libraries or other colors customized in accordance with the technical specifications.

CR 3.5 typographical styles of texts are generated according to the technical guidelines or model, or import existing digital mock-up.

CR 3.6 text files are stored in files, adapting the format to the needs of the computer DTP or DTP and the defined workflow application.

4 RP: Apply in the digital file, corrections of texts listed in the hard proofs, to adapt it to technical specifications, using the equipment and software applications adapted to the established workflow.

CR 4.1 correction of texts is done by interpreting the signs of correction indicated in the original by the proofreader according to applicable quality standards.

CR 4.2 text corrections are applied according to the standards of composition and typographic, according to the criteria established in the hard proofs.

CR 4.3 the corrected file is stored in the format appropriate to the needs of the computer application of DTP or DTP.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Scanners. Testing equipment. Peripheral printing. Processing of texts, layout and scanning software. Fonts. Tools and measuring instruments: tipometro, linen testers. Letters, ranges and color catalogs.



Products and results: texts received and tested. Digitization of texts carried out. Purified and treated texts. Incidences of quality control. Typographic styles defined. Libraries of colors for selected texts. Texts edited in digital media from the indications of the corrector.



Used or generated information: production order. Technical specifications sheet. Information provided by the customer: sketches of graphic product, the graphic product, sample products mock-ups, book style, and others. Font. Technical documentation of equipment. Proofreading standards. Evidence of correction. Applicable quality standards. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



Unit 4 competition: Make the layout or layout of graphics products level: 2 code: UC0930_2 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: verify digital files needed for the layout or layout of the graphics products by checking the original, technical specifications and/or the model.

CR 1.1 the reception of the text and image files is performed by checking the existence and proper correspondence thereof in relation to the specifications.

CR 1.2 received texts and images are verified by checking that they conform to the technical specifications of the product established and / or with the model.


CR 1.3 format of digital documents (text, image, and others) received is checked and adjusted, if appropriate, taking into account the characteristics of the computer application of DTP or DTP.

1.4 CR digital documents necessary for layout received through Internet or digital media (external hard drives, CD, DVD and others) are sorted and classified according to the Protocol, determined by the company.

2 RP: Perform master pages to get the previous digital models, following technical indications and/or the model model and using the equipment and software required.

CR 2.1 preparation of the equipment used in the layout is done checking calibration and active color monitor profile.

CR 2.2 setting the color in the computer applications of layout management is considering the recommendations of manufacturers and standardization organizations and the flow control of the color set in the production process.

CR 2.3 introducing parameters relating to margins, number of columns and others, adding in the same timely brands of folding, cutting and others depending on the needs of the post production process, master pages are generated.

CR 2.4 common ornamental elements and method of numbering of the pages are applied to placing all of them in their proper position within master pages.

2.5 CR cross-linking and structuring of the product is carried out taking into account the balanced distribution, graphics and contragrafismos and the tonal value of the composition.

2.6 CR prior digital mock-up is done by incorporating the boxes or frames of text and image common to all pages, according to the criteria laid down in the technical specifications or the technical model.

CR 2.7 areas and technical lines of the package or label (expiration date, free of ink, climbing, creasing lines and other areas) are outlined in the model taking into account the die and the book of style of the brand of the product.

CR 2.8 them styles typographical is generate whereas the marked typographic of the original, of the model, from the book of style or of them specifications technical of the product.

CR 2.9 the boxes or frames of elements graphic differential is located and configured by placing them in their corresponding pages, respecting the architecture graphic of the product.

3 RP: Make the layout or layout from the layout model to obtain the final product, using software applications adapted to the process.

CR 3.1 the layout is performed considering them peculiarities of the product: books, magazines, brochures, posters, products of correspondence, advertising, products of remenderia, products destined to jewellery boxes, containers, packing and others products, starting from the model model.

CR 3.2 the dump of the text is performed checking its accuracy and formatting using the leaves of style typographical.

CR 3.3 the layout of the text is performed according to the standards of composition established.

CR 3.4 application of color elements on pages that require it is performed using standard color libraries or other colors customized in accordance with the technical specifications.

CR 3.5 integration of all the compositional elements, texts, images and illustrations, is carried out by applying the set color workflow specifications, ensuring that all parameters are suitable according to the directions set out in the work order.

CR 3.6 structure and distribution of the product layout is corrected according to the indications made in the printed tests.

CR 3.7 texts published correction is interpreting and correctly applying the standard signs of correction and following the rules of composition and typographic according to the criteria established in the evidence of correction.

3.8 CR computer file layout and fixed is stored in the proper format, following the rules of Protocol of stored files from the company.

4 RP: Get intermediate graphic product mock-up tests to check the location of the images and the quality of the product according to the standards of the production process and quality control established.

CR 4.1 preparation of the testing device is performed following the technical instructions, respecting the rules of prevention of occupational hazards and environmental protection.

CR 4.2 machine settings and the configuration of the test device are performed in accordance with established standards of quality and to the needs of the prepress workflow.

CR 4.3 commodities are determined depending on the type and quality of the test, checking the quality according to established standards and procedures.

CR 4.4 them evidence is obtained launching the file digital with them parameters of printing appropriate to the device's output.

CR 4.5 the evidence are reviewed, by checking which contain all the elements of control and registration required and all elements of the layout or layout: bloods, loins, creases, folds and others.

5 RP: Adapt the digital product to the middle and set output support, performing the operations necessary to optimize it depending on the needs of the production process, following established quality control and technical specifications.

CR 5.1 digital product is checked by verifying the existence and accuracy of all the graphic elements used in the: documents published, fonts, images and illustrations.

CR 5.2 images and graphic elements used are adapted to mode adequate in function of the production process and the final support color and resolution.

CR 5.3 computer files that form all the work are generated within the flow of the company, by means of specific software applications.

CR 5.4 final files are generated with applications laid down from the working documents and the necessary specifications depending on the productive system and the final support.



Professional context: means of production: computer equipment. Testing equipment. Peripheral printing. Measurement and control of color devices: densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Processing software texts, image, layout and drawing vector treatment. Workflows, color control and check-up programs software. Banks of images, vector graphics and fonts. Materials bonuses for test systems. Assembly table. Tools and material layout and Assembly. Tools and measuring instruments: tipometro, linen testers. Letters, ranges and color catalogs. Model digital mock-ups. Images, graphics, logos and vector products in digital format.



Products and results: made master pages. Libraries of colors for the layout selected. Models of test, revised models and final models in digital media. Texts published in digital format. Models in digital media of books, magazines, brochures, posters, correspondence, advertising, remenderia products, products intended for jewellery boxes, containers and packaging. Color, position testing-tests.



Used or generated information: production order. Information on the process of production of the product. Information provided by the customer: sketches of graphic product, graphic product models. Letters, ranges and color catalogs. Catalogues of images and vector graphics. Font. Technical documentation of equipment, applications and prepress workflows. Proofreading standards. Applicable quality standards. Regulations applicable in prevention of risks labor and environmental.



TRAINING module 1: processes in graphic arts level: 2 code: MF0200_2 associated with the UC: operate in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity duration: 120 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: analyze the graphic process as a whole and its various phases: prepress, printing bookbinding and processing, whereas the communication among them through standardization models.

CE1.1 explain the features and configuration type of graphic companies according to the phase of production: prepress, printing, binding, processed.

CE1.2 in a production environment defined by workflows describe the sequence of tasks or operations to obtain the product.

CE1.3 analyse, from the point of view of the design, the features of a given graphic product:-measures and formats.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Supports.

-Bookbinding and finishing.

Given CE1.4 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, relate, and sequence the different stages of prepress which have participated in its elaboration:-text: body, family, style, paragraph and line spacing.

-Frames: frequency, form of the point and angle.

-Separation of colors.

-Systems of tracing and layout used.

Given CE1.5 in a so-called practical from a graphic product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:-type of support used.

-Inks: classes and layers.

-Dithering.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or embossed on the support.


-Defects in printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 analyze the different systems of prepress, printing and binding and finishing, describing and linking its main phases with machinery, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 describe the most significant electronic printing systems.

CE1.8 describe and recognize the characteristics of the process of postpress for making a graphic product type according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Sorting the graphics products according to their composition and their functional characteristics: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.1 explain the functional characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.2 identify the structural characteristics of the graphics products: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

CE2.3 from samples of graphics products:-recognize its physico-chemical composition and identify their functional capacity.

-Assess the communicative and functional ability of different graphics products.

-Classify samples of graphics products proposed by its nature and functionality: stationery, folders, jewellery boxes, Edition and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze the parameters and measures of the color used in the graphic arts.

CE3.1 identify the color spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glossmeter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 describe the different sources of lighting, color temperature and conditions of observation to reproduce the color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 in a practical course from different samples of original color and color measurement:-identify the color parameters: brightness, saturation, hue and index of metamery.

-Represent those values colorimetric in those spaces chromatic.

-To assess the differences in color and the possibility of playing in the graphics system.

-Carry out measurements of variables of color with the colorimeter and the electrofotometro on different samples of color indicating the readings in a template.

C4: relate the standards applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental in the process graphic with them operations that is developed in each an of its phases.

CE4.1 recognize the rules applicable of prevention of risks labor and environmental in the process graphic.

CE4.2 identify elements of security that must be installed in the different places and equipment risk of graphic industries.

CE4.3 using practical examples, identify the safety labels appearing on the machines and products used in the graphics processing.

CE4.4 describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks with different phases of the graphic process.

CE4.5 recognize documents and environmental procedures in the graphic process.

C5: Analyze the process of quality control in a process' type' of graphic arts.

CE5.1 identify the phases and fundamental concepts of quality control in manufacture in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 describe in a manner concise process of reception of raw materials control.

CE5.3 describe the instruments used in the control of quality: densitometers, colorimeters, strips of control and devices of control in line of production, identifying its application in the different phases of the process graphic.

CE5.4 perform densitometric measurements and colorimetric from prepress and printing standards for certain test, assessing that the reproduction of the color range fits with the set standards.

CE5.5 in a practical course of quality control in the printing process, from a printed product, and standards:-select the required measuring instrument.

-Carry out the calibration of the measuring instrument.

-Measuring densitometric, colorimetric, of the 'trapping', sliding and gray balance.

-Establish the chromatic space.

-Carry out different control measures on the Strip.

-Check the fit with the established standards.

CE5.6 in a practical course of quality control in process of transformed, from a graphics product that must be bound or manipulate, identify and assess all defects in:-format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log signals.

-Signatures.

-Sense of fiber.

-Repainted.

-Dies.

CE5.7 describe the most significant quality characteristics of products:-binding and manipulated: subjective evaluation, cutting marks, footprints, registration, glue-down signals.

-Resistance to bending.

-Rub resistance.

-Print: density, 'trapping', stamping, color, with balance, gain, sliding.

-Prepress: tests, standards.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 on CE3.4; C5 CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other skills: be responsible for the work that develops.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the company.

Maintaining an assertive attitude, empathic and conciliatory with others showing cordiality and kindness in the deal.

Recognize the process productive of the organization.

Participate and collaborate actively in the team's work.



Contents: 1. process graphic types of graphics products.

Types of businesses: Organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Prepress systems. Original classes. Latent image, development process. Adaptation to the environment of digital workflow.

Input devices, peripheral output, specific hardware, processors, software and test systems.

Layout and Assembly. Mount items. Specific software.

Printing systems. Equipment, benefits, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each printing system.

Binding and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Handling of paper and cardboard. Handling of other materials.



2. color and nature of light measurement.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic space.

Factors that affect the perception of color.

Color theory. Additive and subtractive color synthesis.

Colour representation systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: brillometros, densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers. Evaluation of the color.



3 prevention regulations applicable labor and environmental risks in processes of graphics arts plans and safety standards.

Regulations in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.



4. quality in the processes of graphic arts trials, instruments and most characteristic measurements.

Quality in prepress: dot gain, balance of greys and density.

Variable printing (density of print, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain balance of color and grayscale).

Areas of control in printing. Measurement.

Poligraphic quality.

Visual control of the binding and manipulated.

Checking for defects in the bound and manipulated.

Standardization of quality.



5 quality control in graphic arts quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control phases: reception of materials, processes and products.

Norms and standards related to the graphic process.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphics processing in terms of safety, quality and productivity, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: treatment of images digital level: 2 code: MF0928_2 associated with UC: digitize and treat images using computer applications duration: 210 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria:




C1: Perform copy preparation sorting them and adapting them according to their characteristics, and considering the technical instructions.

CE1.1 recognize the signs and terminology used in a given production order.

CE1.2 starting from a given production order recognize print, the system for obtaining form system printer and workflow.

CE1.3 in a case study of classification of originals, from a production and a few originals given order:-check the condition of the originals.

-Assess the feasibility of reproduction or digital processing.

-Classify the originals as supported: transparencies, opaque and printed originals.

Dice a few original digital CE1.4 and given instructions in relation to the productive process, test equipment and corresponding profiles, adapt the following features: mode color, resolution, depth of color, extension - tiff, jpg, raw and others - and dimensions of the digital image.

C2: Operate with the equipment and applications in processes of digitization and digital processing of images.

CE2.1 link and sequence the various phases of the processes of scanning and imaging in certain graphic projects.

CE2.2 recognize and describe the characteristics and functioning of the different teams of digitization and image processing.

CE2.3 identify and describe the features and benefits of the different applications of digitization and image processing.

CE2.4 determine necessary, from a given technical specifications the equipment and applications of digitization and image processing.

CE2.5 in a case study of operations with equipments of digitalization, from given instructions:-recognize the options and parameters of digitization programs.

-Operate the equipment for scanning and processing of images with skill and ability.

-Manage software applications of digitization and imaging with adequacy and agility.

C3: Implement maintenance procedures and assurance of the color management in digitization and image processing programs, simulating different productive environments.

CE3.1 describe the basics of color and perception and the limitations on physical devices of capture, display and reproduction.

CE3.2 recognize the recommendations of quality with respect to the reproduction of the color in the production process.

CE3.3 prepare equipment for scanning and processing of images, leading them to the optimal conditions of operation in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and a technical procedure of given color on devices management.

CE3.4 perform instrumental measurements of control using colorimeters and spectrophotometers in equipment and materials provided and following a given procedure instructions.

CE3.5 in a case study of color management and by following a procedure instructions:-calibrate and characterize devices scan and display of images using the available objective methods, by means of appropriate instruments.

-Profiling of devices using the appropriate applications.

-Configure software applications to properly manage profiles for different graphical environments.

CE3.6 configure the color of a few software applications management, taking into account the color flow established in a provided production order.

C4: Scanned images by applying technical criteria depending on the needs of provided products and processes of reproduction thereof.

CE4.1 identify different types of original describing their characteristics.

CE4.2 explain the needs of reproduction of different types of originals: original line, grayscale, color and vector.

CE4.3 describe the characteristics of digital images.

CE4.4 explain the characteristics of the file formats used for export and storage of digital data in the process of digitization and image processing.

CE4.5 recognize and identify defects and anomalies in a few originals provided.

CE4.6 in a practical course of preparation of images for their digitization, technical specifications and a few originals given:-check the quality of the images to scan.

-Identify and separate the original according to the analog support (opaque or transparent) and digital.

-Identify and separate the originals depending on further reproduction, by file format (bitmap or vector) and mode (line, grayscale or color).

-Determine the originals that will require treatment on grounds of quality or the job specifications.

-Specify / identify the originals that will make up the photographic montages.

-To determine the equipment and necessary applications.

CE4.7 in a practical course of digitalization of images, from technical specifications and a few originals given:-clean and have the originals on the digitisation support.

-Calculate the size and resolution of digitization based on reproduction and technologies for obtaining the form printer.

-Set up the parameters of the scanning program, considering the features of the original and the final product that you want to get.

-Select color profiles set out in the technical specifications.

-Make the frame appropriate to the technical specifications.

-Set the parameters for the correction of color in the process of digitizing improving the color of them images original.

-Digitize the images.

-Store the images using the format of file right depending on the medium of output set.

C5: treat digitally the images through applications computer, optimizing them depending on the product end, of the medium or support established and of some instructions of production.

CE5.1 describe the features and limitations of them images provided depending on the characteristics of its format.

CE5.2 in a so-called practical of treatment of images, starting from ones specifications technical and some original digital given:-modify the resolution / size through applications of treatment of images keeping the quality required depending on the product end.

-Perform the settings indicated in the specifications technical through applications of treatment of images.

-Perform the conversion of profiles of them images following the criteria established in the specifications technical.

-Store the images digital in format of file suitable for the process of production.

CE5.3 starting from provided photographic digital originals, detect and specify chromatic errors: dominant, balance of gray or others.

CE5.4 in a practical course of optimization of images starting from technical specifications and a given digital originals, make the color correction of images through image treatment applications:-checking the range of tones.

-Adjusting the values of light and shadow.

-Adjusting the midtones.

-Eliminating dominant color.

-Balancing the colors.

-Focusing on the images to the extent as required.

CE5.5 in a so-called practical retouching of images from digital originals and technical specifications provided, perform retouching of images through image treatment applications:-eliminating the impurities from the scanning process.

-Tweaking the deteriorated parts of images.

-Eliminating the elements indicated in the technical specifications.

-Extending or replacing funds.

C6: Make montages of images using computer applications getting soft and imperceptible mergers.

CE6.1 describe the process of collage applications color settings.

CE6.2 detailed digital images mounting techniques.

CE6.3 in a so-called practical photomontage of images starting from a given images characterized by its balance of color, harmony and naturally and according to some indications and provided previous sketches, assembling the same taking into account the following operations:-select and prepare images by calculating dimensions, resolutions and settings necessary for the photomontage.

-Adjust modes and color profiles of the selected images to the flow of certain color.

-Perform necessary touch-ups in the selected images, whereas the final assembly.

-Make masks and cuts in the selected images, taking into account the final assembly.

-Mount the images in accordance with directions and provided previous sketches.

-Adjustment of lights and shades necessary to obtain an imperceptible fusion.

-Adjust color of images to achieve a uniform chromaticity of photomontage.

-Check it in the format best suited to the characteristics of the work.

CE6.4 starting from a sketch, make the two images overlap/merger, following an order in process:-make the settings necessary to conform to the sketch.

-Adjust the size and resolution of images, adapting them to the final assembly.

-Assess the optimal arrangement of the images to get a smooth and undetectable cast.


-Generate the masks necessary to merge the images.

-Merge images using the right tools to disguise the photomontage.

-Even the lights and shadows of images.

-Adjust the color of the images of members of the Assembly.

C7: Make and modify vector graphics using computer applications, adapting them to the final product and the production process.

CE7.1 describe the features of the graphic vector.

CE7.2 define the characteristics and limitations of the file formats for vector graphics.

CE7.3 perform graphics vector through applications of drawing vector, starting from sketches provided.

CE7.4 play vector graphics using vector drawing applications, starting from bitmap originals.

CE7.5 edit vector graphics, optimizing them for playback depending on specs properly characterized graphic projects.

CE7.6 assess the adequacy of vector graphics, making sure that the definition of colors suits colour specifications defined in the technical specifications provided.

CE7.7 rating vector graphics functionality, checking the existence and accuracy of all the elements, following the technical specifications and sketches provided.

CE7.8 store vector drawings in the format of file suitable for a definite production flow.

C8: Develop intermediate tests and end of images, using the appropriate output devices and verifying its quality and accuracy.

CE8.1 describe them fundamentals of the color and of its perception and the limitations concerning them devices physical of reproduction.

CE8.2 recognize the recommendations of quality of national and international bodies with respect to the reproduction of the color in the production process.

CE8.3 identify the testers calibration process.

CE8.4 detail elements and the necessary instruments for the control of quality of evidence.

CE8.5 calibration generator testers in a way that to achieve stability in the response and ensure the repeatability of the results obtained for each configuration.

CE8.6 carry out the quality control of the testing device using adequate shims (patterns) and the necessary measuring instruments (densitometer or spectrophotometer).

CE8.7 in a practical course of intermediate tests from given instructions:-read production orders identifying the final printing process and its characteristics.

-Perform tests, applying the proper guidelines for emulations most faithful possible to final playback conditions.

-Testing, using the optimal test device depending on the type, quality and objective of the test specified in the given production order.

-Check the digital files with the evidence, assessing their consistency and accuracy.

-Rating them tests checking through them elements of registration and the instrumental of measurement necessary (densitometer or spectrophotometer) that lack of anomalies and that meet the guidelines of quality minimum established for the device.

-Check the features and quality of the materials raw used, valuing its use according to the type of test to obtain.

Skills whose acquisition should be completed in an environment real of work: C1 respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.1 and CE2.5; C3 on CE3.4, CE3.5 and CE3.6; C4 CE4.6 and CE4.7; C5 CE5.2, CE5.4 and CE5.5; C6 CE6.3 and CE6.4; C7 CE7.5 and CE7.6; C8 to CE8.5, CE8.6, CE8.7.

Other capabilities: comply with the rules of proper production.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Demonstrate a good make professional.

Complete the work within the stipulated deadlines.

Participate and collaborate actively in the team's work.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.



Contents: 1. the human visual system colour reproduction. Phenomena of the perception of color.

Color rendition.

Color models and color spaces.

Color management systems: letters and color libraries.

The color reproduction techniques: frequency, angle, point, formation of the dot percentages, dithering techniques.



2. procedures for maintenance of the color temperature of color management.

Color management systems. Operation and components.

Color management in the operating system and various applications.

Workflows for color management.

Calibration and profiling.

Quality measurements of the color values in color management procedures.

Instruments of measurement and quality control: densitometers, colorimeters and spectrophotometers.

Recommendations for the specification and color management. Applicable quality standards.



3. preparation of original types of originals and features.

Libraries of images.

Technical evaluation of the image.

Images marking techniques.

Settings of digital files.



4 digitization of images (photomultiplier, CMOS, CCD) image capture principles.

Types of scanners, and operation.

Image capture features: threshold, optical density, dynamic range, color depth, interpolation.

Resolution. Concept, needs, calculation and application.

Principles, characteristics and applications of digitization management.

The applications of scanning color management settings.

Techniques of correction and adjustment of the image capture and scanning.

The quality of the image: depth of color, white balance, color gamma, contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones.



5. digital image characteristics of digital image processing. Limitations of resolution and interpolation.

Adjustments of contrast, gray balance, balance of color, brightness and saturation.

Filters: destramado, focus / blur.

General, gradients, molten and openworks.

Formats of file of image. Characteristics and application. Principles and algorithms of compression.

Principles, characteristics and management of applications of treatment digital of the image.

Configuration of the administration of the color in applications of treatment digital of the image.

Techniques for selecting and masking.

Techniques and tools of correction of color.

Retouching tools and methods.

Digital images mounting techniques.



6. graphic vector features of the graphic vector.

Curves bezier. Features and behavior.

Procedures for the drawing vector.

Principles, characteristics and handling of applications for drawing vector.

Configuration of the administration of the color in applications for drawing vector.

Formats of file vector. Characteristics and application.



7 tests in pre-press and other types of tests: position, correction, color, imposition.

Test systems. Types and features.

Calibration and profiling test systems.

Tests in prepress quality control: control elements. Strips and patches of control, registry items, scales.

Colorimetric and densitometric measurements.

Rules and recommendations for evidence. Applicable quality standards.

Printing systems.

Dithering features: screen, screen, formation of the plot and percentage point angles.

Dithering techniques: conventional, irrational, stochastic and hybrid.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1.-domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the digitization and realization of the treatment of images through applications computer, that is credited by an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



MODULE training 3: treatment of texts for the layout level: 2 code: MF0929_2 associated to the UC: digitize and treat texts through applications computer duration: 90 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: operate with equipment and applications computer specific in them processes of obtaining, treatment and correction of texts.

CE1.1 describe the equipment more significant used in the treatment of texts.

CE1.2 identify the applications of treatment of text more used.


CE1.3 sequence the various phases of the processes of text-processing: preparation of the original composition, DTP and correction, describing the tasks to perform in each of them.

CE1.4 describe the process to be carried out depending on the type of original: typed text or text in digital format.

CE1.5 in a practical course of operations with equipment of texts from a few instructions:-operate with equipment procurement and treatment of texts with competence, skill and speed.

-Manage software applications for obtaining and processing of texts with adequacy and agility.

-Operate the keyboard quickly, reached 200 beats per minute maintained speed.

C2: Scanning and typing texts, using equipment and applications.

CE2.1 describe the characteristics and the applications of optical reading of characters and text recognition.

CE2.2 Select the process suitable for obtaining the text, assessing the quality of different originals provided.

CE2.3 in a so-called practical of digitization of texts from an original and some specifications given:-choose the program of digitization of text.

-Perform the digitization following the specifications techniques.

-Debug text, according to the spelling rules.

-Store the files of text in the format appropriate according to the needs of the application of layout.

CE2.4 starting from a certain original:-choose the program of treatment of texts suitable for typing the text.

-Type the text, using the keyboard with skill and speed.

-Debug text, according to the spelling rules and established indications.

-Store the text files in the format appropriate to the needs of the application's layout.

C3: Treated texts using the equipment and software applications, and optimizing them to the layout.

CE3.1 define the process of necessary treatment of texts according to the layout process.

CE3.2 identifying the different file formats for import / export text, taking into account the degree of compatibility and the possibilities of composition.

CE3.3 apply the rules of spelling and composition in different texts.

CE3.4 recognize the signs of a correction, explaining their transcription.

CE3.5 identify the rules applicable to the correction of texts.

CE3.6 create or import typographic styles according to the technical guidelines and the model.

CE3.7 format the text by applying styles typographical following the instructions provided.

C4: Correct errors orthotypographic simple on-screen or printed texts, applying the rules of composition and conventional signs.

CE4.1 recognize norms of correction used typography and signs and calls.

CE4.2 from text tests printed and corrected to interpret the corrections indicated by the corrector.

CE4.3 from a text tests printed and corrected to interpret the corrections indicated by the corrector.

CE4.4 in a practical course of application of corrections of texts from a given original:-detect defects and anomalies that are marked in the text on screen: errors of spelling, repetitions, mixing and transposition of characters and disregard of rules of composition.

-Implement appropriate corrective measures, depending on the indications and of the aesthetic criteria.

-Correct texts using appropriate software applications.

-Check the correct typography of the corrected texts composition.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.4; C4 on CE4.4.

Other capabilities: comply with the rules of proper production.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Demonstrate a good make professional.

Complete the work within the stipulated deadlines.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.



Contents: 1. equipment and applications of digitization and word-processing equipment digitization of texts. Types and features.

Applications of optical reading of characters. Characteristics and performance.

Text-processing applications. Characteristics and performance.

Operation of keyboards.



2 Anatomy of type font. Parts and terminology.

Typology of the letter: series, varieties or kinds.

Classifications of types.

Digital typography: types and features.

Tipometria. Systems of measurement of the type.

Typographic aesthetic.



3. rules of composition structure of the graphic message.

Tonal value of the composition.

Legibility and communication.

Graphics: letters or characters, figures and other signs.

Contragrafismos or white. Classes: kerning, white between words, interlining, white between columns, margins.

The text layout: alignment, justification, columns, type of paragraph, earrings.



4 proofreading in prepress correction processes typography. Stages of correction.

Symbology. Rules grammar.

Signs of correction.

Policy of quality applicable to them signs of correction.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Profile professional of the trainer or forming: 1.-domain of them knowledge and them technical related with the scanning and treatment of texts by applications computer, that is be credited through an of them two forms following:-training academic of level 1 (frame Spanish of qualifications for it education top) or of others of upper level related with the field professional.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 4: layout and graphics products level layout: 2 code: MF0930_2 associated with UC: make the layout or layout of graphics products duration: 180 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: operate with equipment and applications processes specific layout and DTP.

CE1.1 describe the most significant equipment used in the DTP or DTP.

CE1.2 identify the most commonly used layout applications.

CE1.3 sequence the different phases of the layout process: preparation of the original composition, layout, DTP and correction, describing the tasks to perform in each.

CE1.4 describe the layout process to obtain so-called projects depending on the final product.

CE1.5 in a practical course of operations with layout programs starting from given instructions, - operate the equipment layout with competence and skill programs.

-Manage software applications of layout with proficiency and skill.

-Operate with the keyboard with speed and dexterity.

C2: Carry out the master pages of digital models using computer applications, from the demo model.

CE2.1 describe the applications of layout color setup process.

CE2.2 describe techniques for page layout and grids to elaborate systems of teachers pages.

CE2.3 select the application of more suitable layout for various practical cases of development of master page.

CE2.4 configure layout applications to properly manage the profiles and the flow of digital color for different graphical environments.

CE2.5 make pages masterpieces to type pages and pages differential applying aesthetic criteria of readability.

CE2.6 distribution of whites and stains in a balanced way, maintaining the tonal value of the composition.

CE2.7 in a so-called practical of elaboration of a page master starting from some instructions and a model model given:-adjust them pages master of them models previous to them needs of the later process productive: cutting, folding, binding and others.

-Generate them styles for them fonts applying those criteria typographical and tipometricos established in the model and in the specifications technical provided.

-Incorporate in them pages master them boxes or frames of text e image common to all the product, applying them criteria established in the model model and attending to the particularities of them same and of its content.

-Incorporate in them pages master of the mock-ups prior them headers, feet of page, foliation, fillets, funds and other elements common to all the document.

CE2.8 in a practical course of verification of a graphic product slicing, from given instructions and a mock-up model:-rating model readability and aesthetic criteria.

-Check the existence and accuracy of typographic styles.


-Check boxes or text and image frames to meet indications for the demo model.

-Check headers, footers, numbering and other elements to meet the directions.

C3: Make the layout and pagination of graphics products starting from models models.

CE3.1 identify the different file formats for import / export text and images, assessing the degree of compatibility.

CE3.2 recognize the terminology used in layout and DTP.

CE3.3 identify the files needed to make the layout/layout of a graphic product type.

CE3.4 in a so-called practical of layout of a product graphic starting from some instructions given:-make the dump of texts in models previously defined, applying leaves of styles typographical, the standards of composition and considering them indications of them specifications technical.

-Check the compatibility of the formats of the images to include in the layout.

-Framing and cropping images for integration into the page.

-Integrate them images and them illustrations in the layout of the product, with the dimensions and the framing accurate and respecting the flow of color established, according to the model model.

-Combine them different pages that make up the product graphic, retaining the architecture graphic of the page.

-Contrasting them pages pairs and odd, facing them for rating the aesthetics of the product.

CE3.5 in a practical case of a layout adjustment starting from a given printed tests:-correct distribution and structuring of the mockup product, following the directions made in printed proofs.

-Correct texts interpreting correctly reflected on tests correction signs, according to the standards of composition and spelling.

-Storing computer files published following the established rules of storage Protocol.

C4: Obtain evidence following production process and quality control standards.

CE4.1 identify devices used for layout tests.

CE4.2 describe the formatting features that are found in tests: bloods, loins, creases, folds and others.

CE4.3 in a practical course of evidence of layout from a few instructions:-check the calibration of the generators testers.

-Testing in accordance with specified technical specifications.

-Check the digital files with the evidence, assessing their consistency and accuracy.

-Check that the tests lack of anomalies and that meet the guidelines of quality minimum established for the device.

-Check that the tests reflect all elements of layout: bloods, loins, creases, folds and others.

C5: Adapt digital graphics products to medium and support laid down in the technical specifications provided.

CE5.1 check completed layout files, verifying the existence and accuracy of all the graphic elements (fonts, images and illustrations) used therein, in previously defined graphic projects.

CE5.2 check images and illustrations from the duly specified graphics products, checking the color mode and resolution in function of the production process and the final support.

CE5.3 process through appropriate software applications files, generating final files according to the established production process: book, web, multimedia, printers, digital imposition and other forms.

CE5.4 rating files, verifying the adequacy of the features and resolutions depending on the production process and final stand established in duly characterized production orders.

CE5.5 check the functionality of the files in the middle of final broadcast: Web server, tablets, and others.

CE5.6 rating the optimization of graphic resources generated to the distribution medium chosen.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 CE2.7 and CE2.8; C3 on CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 on CE4.3.

Other capabilities: comply with the rules of proper production.

Show some autonomy in the resolution of small contingencies related to its activity.

Demonstrate a good make professional.

Complete the work within the stipulated deadlines.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Interpret and execute instructions from work.

Recognize the productive process of the organization.



Contents: 1. equipment and applications for the computer equipment of layout layout.

Layout computer applications. Characteristics and performance.

Applications of integration of texts and images.

The management of color in layout programs.

Font management software applications.



2. basic principles for the interpretation of the model model layout.

Standards in the implementation of guidelines.

Preparation and marking techniques.

Layout techniques: distribution of spaces and proportions.

Grid systems.

Layout styles.

Architecture and aesthetics of the page.

The graphic message, structuring and readability.

Typography and tipometria.

Graphics and contragrafismos. Tonal value of the composition.

In the composition applicable quality standards.

Layout rules.



3. layout concepts and techniques of electronic pagination and layout techniques.

Creation of typographic styles.

Creation of previous models (master pages).

Working with text flows.

Import of images and illustrations.

Formats of file. Characteristics and application.



4. layout of elements graphics in prepress settings of the administration of the color in applications of layout in prepress.

Layout of illustrations and images.

Configuration of the partition of words.

Configuration of the control of lines widows and orphans.

Typology of them printed: print publishing, paraeditoriales and commercial.

The book: parts external and internal.

Preparation of the layout for your broadcast Web, tablets and others.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the layout or layout of graphic products, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic training level 1 (Spanish higher education qualifications framework) or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.

Annex XII professional qualification: development of multimedia publishing products family professional: level graphic arts: 3 code: ARG293_3 general competence to develop projects for the realization of multimedia publishing products, determining the aspects of functionality, interaction and usability, defining its architecture, making the design of graphics and multimedia elements necessary to obtain and publish the product, managing and controlling the quality of multimedia publishing product.



Units of competence UC0935_3: determine the specifications of multimedia publishing projects UC0936_3: design the multimedia publishing product UC0937_3: generating and publishing multimedia publishing products UC0938_3: manage and control the quality of multimedia publishing product environment professional scope professional develops his professional activity in the Department of digital publication of multimedia Edition of editorial products companies; books, magazines, Web pages, periodic press, education and training companies, media, institutions of public or proprietary of small, medium and large, irrespective of its legal form. You can work or self-employed, depending on, where appropriate, functional or hierarchically by a superior. You may have staff occasionally, seasonally or stable. In the development of the professional activity apply the principles of universal accessibility in accordance with the applicable legislation.



Sectors production is located in the productive sector publishing, graphic and advertising published in Web environment products publishing or graphics, and any other industry that has any of these activities.



Occupations and jobs relevant terms from the following list of occupations and jobs are used with generic and all-inclusive nature of women and men.

Technical technical multimedia technical multimedia publishing projects in multimedia production design


Designers of multimedia publishing products attending the consultant in multimedia publishing model makers of multimedia projects training associate (570 hours) training modules MF0935_3: multimedia publishing products (120 hours) MF0936_3 projects: design of multimedia publishing products (150 hours) MF0937_3: implementation and publication of multimedia publishing products (210 hours) MF0938_3: quality management of multimedia publishing products (90 hours) unit of competition 1 : Determine the level editorial MULTIMEDIA project specifications: 3 code: UC0935_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: develop the specification document to describe the characteristics of multimedia publishing product, in accordance with the requirements established by the company or the client in the project descriptions.

CR 1.1 the aspect global and those aspects functional of the product is described starting from the specifications or descriptions received, identifying the product publishing digital concrete: book electronic, publication on Internet and others.

CR 1.2 working platform, including the operating system and the platform of product development are determined from the indications given in the request.

1.3 CR technology pages and screens, the type of support, static or dynamic, and aspects relating to the accommodation of pages, in the case of multimedia products to Internet, are specified in the specification document.

CR 1.4 graphical aspects are described in the document, to differentiate all its elements, based on the book of style and making it where there.

CR 1.5 features, the tree of content and navigation are described in the document according to the explanations or descriptions received multimedia product specifications.

CR 1.6 treatment of translations and the use of different languages, if any, are detailed in the document according to the specifications of the custom multimedia product specifications.

1.7 CR accessibility, usability conventions and other standardizations: standards and other applicable quality, determined in the multimedia product specifications document according to the rules and standards set by the publishing company.

CR 1.8 multimedia elements that are part of the editorial product is defined in the specification document establishing the origin and conditions of use which specify the branches of banks of images and multimedia pointing out, where it exists, the legal or technical limitations.

RP 2: Adapt, in collaboration with the person in charge of design, the book of style of the company to the needs of integration of graphics and multimedia elements in the responsible product.

2.1 CR the graphic elements of the custom: fonts, color palettes and other specifications that are subtracted from the order of the customer are structurally collected in the adaptation of the book of style.

2.2 CR multimedia design elements and other functional elements: palettes of colors, templates, collections of icons, symbols and buttons, logos, dynamic elements, and tables and lists of codes of interactivity, are forming with the rules of production which governed the development of the product according to the norms of the company.

CR 2.3 common conventions and the standards on texts, images, drawings, sounds, voice-overs, videos and other items are applied in the adaptation of the book of style following the editorial line.

CR 2.4 notes on the dynamics of navigation are collected in the style the specifications document.

CR 2.5 the adaptation of them rules of style is develop looking for that are sufficiently flexible and that allow the integration simple and reasonable of possible extensions or modifications of the product publishing multimedia.

CR 2.6 them elements graphics are collected from form structured in the adaptation of the book of style.

3 RP: Specify the standards of quality that must meet the final multimedia publishing product to ensure its functionality, accessibility and usability in accordance with the initial specifications and its style book.

CR 3.1 them requirements of the product publishing multimedia is identified, considering them in the definition of the standards of quality and in them criteria of presentation, functionality and usability.

CR 3.2 them standards relating to the presentation on screen is selected in accordance with the specifications of the commissioned and the book of style.

CR 3.3 them standards of functionality is determined considering the specifications of the custom and of the behavior dynamic expected.

CR 3.4 usability for digital product standards are specified including those relating to ergonomics, accessibility and internationalization and documented them accordingly, taking into account environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

RP 4: Establish the distribution of human and technological resources in collaboration with the Team Edition, for the realization of the multimedia publishing product, taking into account the established quality standards and proposing improvements.

CR 4.1 distribution of human resources planning is assessed by measuring effectiveness with respect to the intended product parameters according it with the graphic designer and the head of programming.

CR 4.2 distribution of technological resources is estimated in collaboration with the head of programming, in accordance with the quality standards set out in the order of the product.

CR 4.3 distribution and allocation of human resources is valued through a clear and concrete proposal to improve the assigned in the specification document.

CR 4.4 distribution proposal is optimizing technology resources and improving the process, taking into account environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

CR 4.5 the definitive estimation of distribution of human and technological resources is transacted to the responsible corresponding, adjusting to the indications received in the final organization.

RP 5: determine, in collaboration with the team of Edition, the viability of the project, estimating the costs of the product publishing multimedia and taking in has them standards of quality established.

CR 5.1 the costs and times that are derived from the client's specifications are identified, along with Team Edition, valuing their impact on the total cost of the project.

5.2 CR image banks information and multimedia elements costs are estimated, assessing their feasibility.

CR 5.3 the intervention of national and international actors in the development of the project is valued, estimating the cost in the feasibility study.

CR 5.4 estimations about the resources needed to realize the product described picking up a clear and complete in the preparation of the general budget.

CR 5.5 economic feasibility study is included in the documentation of the project for the development of the multimedia publishing product.



Professional context: means of production: computers and mobile devices with different configurations and operating systems. Shared storage devices. Connection to the Internet. Software: Word processing. Software for planning and monitoring of projects. Budgeting software quality control software.



Products and results: elaborate specifications document. Adapted style book. Feasibility study. Specifications for the control of quality, functionality, accessibility and usability, specified. Organization of human and technological resources carried out. Economic estimation of multimedia publishing product.



Used or generated information: information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Technical data sheets. Study of offers. Rates. Catalogues of banks of images and of elements multimedia. Directory of agencies national and international of management of rights. Specifications for the control of quality. Models. Book of style. Manual of identity corporate. Quality of the company or manual procedure manual. Technical documentation. Programs computer's control of quality. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



UNIT of competition 2: design the product publishing MULTIMEDIA level: 3 code: UC0936_3 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: establish the architecture more adequate to develop the product publishing multimedia, in accordance with the specifications, proposing alternative if is necessary.

CR 1.1 them ratings on them architectures of software, of hardware and of network necessary for the development of the product publishing multimedia is defined, justifying its adequacy in accordance with the specifications given.

CR 1.2 the decisions about the architecture chosen for the development of the product is reason and is justified in a document of reference.

CR 1.3 them demands of the product in relation to the architecture of information is analyzed, collecting them by written of form consistent with the specifications.


CR 1.4 them alternative proposed in the document of reference for the development of the product is reviewed checking that are viable, meet satisfactorily them specifications of the commissioned and show clearly the differences to to select an of them.

RP 2: create and select elements graphics to incorporate them to the product publishing multimedia, taking in has the principles of the theory of the design.

CR 2.1 multimedia publishing product graphic elements are selected considering the types of product - website, e-book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles and others - and the principles of the theory of graphic design - proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, stress and rhythm-.

CR 2.2 texts which are integrated into the screens are selected considering: sources or typefaces, styles, proportions, bodies, auctions, grids, readability, kern, track, alignment, line spacing, groupings, paragraphs, orphans, widows and others.

CR 2.3 the creative development of the graphic elements is carried out by applying the requirements of visual perception and readability - dimensions, body text, color contrasts, reading habits, and others.

CR 2.4 the creative development of the graphic elements conforms to the requirements of the multimedia product, through the application of the principles of psychological Association by proximity, similarity, continuity and symmetry material and cultural, and others.

CR 2.5 multimedia products intended for mobile devices are developed by applying the 'liquid' format characteristics of their screens for the choice of bodies of text, fonts and graphic elements.

CR 2.6 created graphic elements conform or comply with the specifications of the custom of the multimedia publishing project.

3 RP: Design sketches of the multimedia publishing product, to visualize the structure of the product by means of screens from the document specifications and/or its style book.

CR 3.1 previous sketches of navigation of multimedia publishing product are determined by considering the specification document or book of style.

CR 3.2 previous sketches of navigation are designing the different screens that form the multimedia publishing product, using the resources of production appropriate to the product.

CR 3.3 them recommendations of the book of style and them specifications is considered in the elaboration of them sketches previous of presentation of the information, applying the standards of quality timely.

CR 3.4 artistic, communication and corporate identity requirements apply in the sketches of the editorial product, successfully solving the problems posed in the assignment of the product.

CR 3.5 graphic elements created or pre-existing are integrated on the screens of the sketches to conform to established specifications.

CR 3.6 navigation, interaction and functionality elements are determined in the draft using traits without giving details from the technical specifications.

CR 3.7 sketches alternative, duly differentiated among themselves are presented to the customer enabling selection and possible acceptance of some of the proposals by the same.

CR 3.8 design works are complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

4 RP: Determine the multimedia elements necessary to obtain the publishing product, taking into account the elaborate sketches and conforming to the established specifications.

CR 4.1 multimedia items required for publishing product identified from the sketches prior to considering the determination of multimedia elements and the specifications of the custom.

CR 4.2 texts, photographs, drawings, sounds, voice-overs, videos, animations, among others, are determined based on the specifications and the specific type of digital publishing product concerned: electronic book or publication on Internet.

CR 4.3 needed multimedia elements are selected from digital files and databases while keeping them available for use and taking into account the legal aspects of its use.

CR 4.4 multimedia elements that are not available are included in an alternative proposal contemplating replacement or your order.



Professional context: means of production: computers with different configurations and operating systems. Shared storage devices. Connection to Internet. Access to banks of data. Software: Treatment of texts, images and layout. Software creation graphic. Software for planning and monitoring of projects. Production software. Quality control software.



Products and results: software and hardware architectures that are established for the development of the product. Graphic elements designed and selected for the multimedia product. Sketches of the multimedia publishing product made. Selected media items. Technical documentation of the rights of use of the elements.



Used or generated information: digital files of multimedia objects. Specification document. Book of style. Specifications for quality control. Information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Specifications of reservation of rights and rates for use of multimedia and functional elements. Specifications for quality control. Corporate identity manual. Quality of the company or manual procedure manual. Technical documentation. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



UNIT of competency 3: Generating and publishing MULTIMEDIA publishing products level: 3 code: UC0937_3 realizations professionals and completion criteria: RP 1: develop prototypes, in collaboration with the editing equipment, to materialize the editorial multimedia project using brands, scripts and languages of presentation or authoring tools that are suitable in accordance with the specifications.

CR 1.1 phases of development of the prototype are established according to the type of product, the delivery time, according to the departments of design and the software developers.

CR 1.2 develop the prototype starts considering sketches of screens, interactions and functionality specification and style book.

CR 1.3 required assembly tools are selected according to the indications of the Commission and taking into account the type of product.

CR 1.4 all optimized multimedia elements are assembled in the prototype, properly simulating functionality across different devices.

CR 1.5 the spatial and temporal integration of multimedia components is carried out in accordance with the specifications and with the expected dynamic behavior.

1.6 CR multimedia product type: web pages, e-book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles and the characteristics thereof, is determined, considering their specific features in the development of the prototype for its correct implementation in accordance with the technical specifications.

CR 1.7 programming solutions developed for the preparation of the prototype are adjusted to the specifications of the custom and the characteristics of reading devices and the requirements of interaction using the tools required.

CR 1.8 development of prototypes is carried out in collaboration with the team of Edition.

2 RP: Implement, in collaboration with the Team Edition, the set of bindings, parameterizations and control elements necessary to achieve the functionality provided by the multimedia product, taking into account the indications of document specifications on functional aspects and interaction.

CR 2.1 phases of development of the functionality of the product are established according to the type of product, delivery time and in accordance with the graphic designer and the head of programming.

CR 2.2 navigation, interaction, and the functional aspects are defined specifying them from sketches of screens and amendments set out in the development of the prototype.

CR 2.3 integration of navigation elements, interaction and functional within the graphical layout of screens is performed in accordance with the general aesthetics of the screen and keeping harmony with the rest of elements.

CR 2.4 links and control elements are implemented according to specified functionality, interaction and navigation.

2.5 CR parameterization of the distractors, supports, the exception handling and error messages are checked to verify that they are consistent with the specified navigation.

CR 2.6 planned functionality of screens is checked by checking it with the designed schemes.

CR 2.7 implementation is carried out in collaboration with the team of Edition.

3 RP: Publish the final multimedia product adapted to the defined distribution platform: web pages, e-book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles, and others, in accordance with the required functionality, usability, and accessibility.


CR 3.1 stages of publication of the final multimedia product are set depending on the type of product, delivery time and in accordance with the departments of Edition.

CR 3.2 multimedia product is mounted using screens and generated elements.

CR 3.3 multimedia product is implemented according to specifications using computer applications appropriate, specified distribution platforms, delivering for their evaluation to the editing Department.

CR 3.4 corrections arising from planned check-ups are incorporated into the product constituting the final multimedia publishing product.

CR 3.5 final multimedia product is published on the platforms of distribution or formats defined by performing the relevant backups.

CR 3.6 updates of digital products, such as certain sections of magazines online, digital publications, catalogues of products and other supplements, are performed using the most appropriate publication tools, making the final product indicated in the specifications.

CR 3.7 final multimedia product is checked, valuing that conforms to standards designated by the customer in the order and also complies with the conventions and standards of the sector to which it is addressed: accessibility for the disabled WAI-W3C, usability, among others.

CR 3.8 publication works are complying with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.



Professional context: means of production: computers with different configurations and operating systems. Shared storage devices. Connection to the Internet. Access to data banks. Software: Tools for generation of multimedia products. Tools for creating Web documents. Utilities and specific programming software. Software for planning and monitoring of projects. Programs computer's control of quality. Database legislation.



Products and results: prototypes developed multimedia publishing products. Implementation of control elements, parameterizations and links made. Published final multimedia product: eBook. Interactive digital resource and others. Web pages. Encyclopedias and dictionaries online and interactive support and others. Publication of multimedia publishing product.



Information used or generated: files digital of objects multimedia. Sketches digital. Information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Technical data sheets. Manual of identity corporate. Quality of the company or manual procedure manual. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Regulations applicable in database.



UNIT of competition 4: manage and control the quality of the product publishing MULTIMEDIA level: 3 code: UC0938_3 realizations professional and criteria of realization: RP 1: get tests of operation and of ' usability ' on the prototype of the product publishing multimedia, to ensure its adequacy to them specifications performing a document of control of quality.

CR 1.1 them tests to perform is determined valuing them features of the prototype considering your suitability for the analysis of them different aspects functional, interactive and of design present in the project.

1.2 CR criteria of performance and usability of the prototype is checked observed that correspond to those provided for in document multimedia product specifications and functional tests to perform.

CR 1.3 evaluation and internal testing of the prototypes are checking them in accordance with the planning established in the specifications document: technical specifications for performance and quality standards.

CR 1.4 functional and usability aspects are subjected to the tests laid down in the Protocol of quality control picking in a quality control document whether they have passed or not testing and specifying, where appropriate, localized failures.

CR 1.5 prototypes which have not passed the tests are sent to the area of production, indicating failures for its adjustment pursuant to the company's quality manual.

RP 2: Evaluate the final multimedia publishing product and its suitability for the platform defined distribution, Web pages, e-book, interactive digital resource and application for mobile devices, consoles and others from the prototype.

CR 2.1 tests for the evaluation of the final multimedia publishing product are performed, by selecting the required about compatibility with the browsers, operating systems and others.

CR 2.2 the incorporation of the corrections in the prototype and its functionality are checked according to the company's quality assurance system.

CR 2.3 the evaluation on the appearance and the operation of the product multimedia published is ago following criteria clear and measurable according to them indicators defined in the specifications.

CR 2.4 evaluation of the multimedia product user experience is performed by applying the thinking and the mechanics of the gameplay (gamification).

CR 2.5 corrections in the prototype and its functionality is checked by applying the company's quality assurance system.

CR 2.6 evaluation document is done by incorporating the description of all the problems found in the final product in the defined distribution platform.

3 RP: Prepare the documentation necessary to ensure the correct use of the final product taking into account applications and formats used in the Assembly, as well as the technical manuals and maintenance.

CR 3.1 formats technical documentation, technical manuals and maintenance, and user, and distribution of human and material resources are established by considering the type of product, time of delivery, and in accordance with the graphic designer and responsible for programming.

CR 3.2 technical characteristics, the format of the elements created and used and the legal terms of use is collected in the technical documentation of the product for internal use, thus facilitating its handling, describing them in a way clear and concrete.

CR 3.3 applications and new architectures developed especially for the product are incorporated into the technical documentation of the product, indicating the architectures of hardware, software and network, and the supported platforms.

CR 3.4 the different aspects of the project are collected in the technical manuals and maintenance, describing them in accordance with the scale of the project and the breadth or detail necessary.

3.5 CR guidelines and the help system for the user are collected in a user manual, a clear and didactic, facilitating the learning and use of the product.

4 RP: Establish monitoring of the distribution and use of multimedia publishing product plan to elaborate proposals for improvement and future developments.

CR 4.1 the strategy defined for the data distribution and use is established according to the procedures of the company.

CR 4.2 the monitoring of the distribution plan is set reflecting the relevant data: user profiles, channels of distribution, temporal and spatial, consumption and claims and problems detected in relation to the objectives and following the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.3 the plan for monitoring of the use of the product is established reflecting the relevant data: user profiles, indicators of use of utilities and product applications, complaints and proposals for improvement, in relation to the goals of the product and following the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.4 treatment of users data is defined in a transparent manner and respecting user privacy and respect for the rules of data protection.

CR 4.5 improvements and possible developments of multimedia product are documented in a reasoned report, establishing clearly the technical feasibility, the investment required and the estimated return.



Context professional: means of production: equipment computer with different configurations and systems operating. Printers laser. Shared storage devices. Connection to the Internet. Software: Word processing. Software for planning and monitoring of projects.



Products and results: document of the results of check of quality. Tests of operation and of usability made. Evaluation of the product publishing multimedia made. Document's publication of the product media. Reports of distribution. Reports of assessment of the use of the applications. Plan of monitoring of follow-up of the distribution and of the use of the product carried out.



Used or generated information:




Report of the quality control process. Digital files of multimedia objects. Digital prototyping. Final multimedia product. Information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Technical data sheets. Specifications for quality control. Models. Book of style. Corporate identity manual. Quality of the company or manual procedure manual. Quality control software. Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation. Legal, technical and maintenance of the product documentation. Specifications of usability and accessibility. Evaluation of the experience of user. Theory of the gamification. Regulations applicable in database.



MODULE training 1: projects of products publishing MULTIMEDIA level: 3 code: MF0935_3 associated to the UC: determine them specifications of projects publishing multimedia duration: 120 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: determine them features them functions and them processes involved in the development of a product publishing multimedia according to the typology of the same.

CE1.1 identify those products publishing multimedia common, book electronic, periodic digital, advertising digital, web pages and others, describing its features main.

CE1.2 describe the process of developing a multimedia publishing product and enumerating the agents involved.

CE1.3 from a series of dice multimedia products:-perform a functional analysis of human resources involved in the process, according to the characteristics of each product.

-Identify the sources of resources for each of the products, as well as their legal use features and techniques.

-Identify working platform for each of them.

CE1.4 explain what are the aspects that should pick up the document of a publishing product specifications such as: overall appearance, working platform, and others.

CE1.5 explain what types of requirements should be included in a document of a publishing product specifications: functionality of the product, and other languages.

CE1.6 identify a whole stable, flexible, full and non-ambiguous requirements of an editorial product.

CE1.7 in a practical course of determining the characteristics of a multimedia publishing product, starting from a given custom:-describe each of the multimedia according to their degree of compliance publishing product requirements.

-Categorize the set of requirements for the assignment of multimedia publishing product in accordance with its nature.

-Identify relationships and dependencies between requirements of the custom of multimedia publishing product.

-Develop product diagrams that exemplify the navigation and appearance of the final product.

C2: Prepare the document of specifications of a publishing multimedia product collecting graphics, functional aspects and quality of the product.

CE2.1 explain what are related to the type of product and functional aspects that must collect a publishing product specifications document.

CE2.2 explain what types of technological requirements should be included in a document of a publishing product specifications.

CE2.3 identify a whole stable, flexible, full and non-ambiguous requirements of an editorial product.

CE2.4 Select from a style book, the graphic aspects of a multimedia product.

CE2.5 describe the specifications that identify the different multimedia elements.

CE2.6 develop product diagrams that exemplify the navigation and appearance of the final product.

CE2.7 categorize a set of requirements of an assignment for multimedia publishing product in accordance with its nature.

CE2.8 describe each of a multimedia according to their degree of compliance publishing product requirements.

CE2.9 identify relationships and dependencies between requirements of a given set of an assignment for multimedia publishing product.

C3: Developing the book of style of a multimedia publishing product from a custom multimedia publishing product.

CE3.1 define what is a book of style and what is the scope of application of the same.

CE3.2 characterize each of the aspects of design of a multimedia publishing product in accordance with the usual conventions of the organization requesting the assignment.

CE3.3 explain the main features of the multimedia elements and functional elements.

CE3.4 specify the navigation restrictions governing the behaviour of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.5 in a practical course for the determination of rules of style for a multimedia publishing product from a given specifications:-determine the design aspects that govern the development of the multimedia publishing product.

-Rating the formal conventions that develop businesses.

-To develop the style book containing the general specifications of the product and the obligations of the corporate identity manual.

C4: Set the quality standards of a multimedia publishing product according to initial specifications.

CE4.1 explain what a quality standard and what can be applied to the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE4.2 relate aspects that make up the document of quality of a product publishing multimedia.

CE4.3 identify the parameters that is can use to define the quality of a product publishing multimedia.

CE4.4 compare the parameters of quality, in terms of usability and utility, that must comply with a product publishing multimedia.

CE4.5 establish the metric appropriate for a set of parameters of usability and utility in accordance with the specifications initial.

CE4.6 in a so-called practical of definition of standards of quality for a product publishing multimedia, starting from some parameters standard:-identify the parameters of quality that you affect to the product.

-Define the evidence of acceptance end of the product.

-Elaborate the document of quality in accordance with the parameters of quality identified and the metric established of the product publishing multimedia.

C5: planning the different processes involved in the realization of a product publishing multimedia.

CE5.1 identify those indicators that allow measure the effectiveness of a plan of work defined for the creation of products multimedia.

CE5.2 analysis on different documents specifications corresponding to different projects of creation of multimedia products proposed resource allocation, evaluating the assigned distribution and quality specifications defined.

CE5.3 in a practical course of optimization of resources for the development of a multimedia publishing product from a given project:-identify the technical resources to be able to develop the product of agreement with some initial specifications, as well as the established quality standards.

-Prepare a proposal of optimisation of technological resources that imply an improvement in the process and to encourage compliance with the applicable rules of labor and environmental risk prevention.

-Determine the necessary human resources to achieve the goals envisaged regarding the product defined in the project.

-Describe the technological resources as well as its correct distribution.

-Check that each technological resource necessary for the development of the multimedia publishing product carries partners correct and clear recommendations regarding its use.

-Planned duration of the project and the use of resources identified during the implementation of the same.

CE5.4 develop the outline for a multimedia product, drafted the specifications document, and indicating the phases that should appear in the scheme:-product design with the presentation to the client, validation and possible corrections.

-Layout and definition of styles.

-Creation of prototypes and templates.

C6: Assess the economic viability of a multimedia publishing project, valuing the graphic and functional aspects of initial specifications, as well as a certain quality standards.

CE6.1 explain what a study of economic feasibility of a multimedia product and what are the parameters that define it.

CE6.2 identify the types of risks that may occur during the execution of a multimedia publishing product development and how it must develop a contingency plan for those risks.

CE6.3 noted the consequences of the implementation of management systems of quality, health and environmental protection in the feasibility study.

CE6.4 quantify the cost of resources, including multimedia elements, which are planned as necessary for the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.5 identify the potential risks that may occur during the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.6 in a practical course of feasibility study of a multimedia publishing product, starting from a given multimedia publishing project:-determine the cost of the graphic elements that are to be used.

-To determine the cost of functional elements.

-Carry out the feasibility study to considering both costs.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with regard to CE1.3 and CE1.7; C2 CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 on CE3.5; C4 on CE4.6; C5 regarding CE5.3; C6 with respect to CE6.6.

Other capabilities:


Responsible for the work developed and objectives.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Adapt to new contexts or situations.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Get used to the pace of work of the organization.

Demonstrate interest in the knowledge of the Organization and its processes.



Contents: 1. multimedia publishing projects type of multimedia publishing projects.

Requirements of multimedia publishing products.

Stages of development of a project publishing multimedia.

Developed multimedia products: web pages, DVDs, eBooks, digital magazines, digital newspapers, training courses online, digital resources, mobile applications, widgets and other.

Adaptation of products. Creation of multimedia publishing products from other existing.

Types (functional, of data, of usability, of users and of environment) and relationships of requirements.

Requirements of the project's products publishing multimedia.

Development of schemes for multimedia publishing products.

The planning process.

Resources used in the development of multimedia products.

Planning of technical and human resources of a multimedia publishing product.

Tools for planning.

Applicable legal regulations in the multimedia framework.



2. standards of quality in multimedia publishing products definition and description of quality standards.

National and international standards of quality.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.

Definition and objectives of the usability.

Standards of usability.

Principles of usability.

Accessibility of multimedia products.



3. planning of resources in multimedia publishing projects the planning process. Efficiency and effectiveness. Measurement parameters.

Technical resources used in the development of multimedia products (e-book, website, interactive DVD, digital educational resource, and others).

Adequacy of the technological resources; permissions to access the information.

Systems of communication between the teams.

Evaluation of human resources.

Tools for planning.

Techniques for resource planning.

Monitoring and maintenance of the work plan.



4. feasibility of product publishing multimedia analysis of the viability of a product multimedia.

Relationship cost/benefit and opportunity to the multimedia product.

Human resources costs.

Costs of technical resources. Cost factors.

Costs of multimedia elements.

Estimation of costs and times.

Preparation of budgets.

Control of a static budget.

Tools for planning and implementation of budgets.



5 books of style of definition of style multimedia publishing products: functionality and objectives.

Books of style templates.

The graphics: color, semiotics, sizes and others.

Bitmaps and vectors. Specifications.

Specifications of color on-screen work.

Recommendations on media elements. Visual and audio.

Dynamic elements of multimedia product. Specifications.

The navigation and interaction. Tables and code lists.

Images. Recommendations for use.

Texts: fonts, color and sizes. Conventions and rules of use.

Preparation of a book of style.

Design and approval of the Handbook of corporate image.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the determination of the specifications of multimedia publishing projects, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.



TRAINING module 2: design of products publishers MULTIMEDIA level: 3 code: MF0936_3 associated with UC: design the multimedia publishing product duration: 150 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: defining the most appropriate architecture to implement in the development of multimedia publishing product from its specification document.

CE1.1 explain what a multimedia publishing product architecture and elements: hardware, network, software and information.

CE1.2 choose the most suitable architecture of a multimedia publishing product from among several proposals according to the specification document.

CE1.3 to determine whether the settings set in the architecture of a multimedia publishing product is viable.

C2: Define the graphical structure of the screens of a multimedia publishing product in accordance with a previous sketch and its specification document.

CE2.1 operate with tools of graphic design that allows the appearance of multimedia publishing product design.

CE2.2 explain what are the basics of graphic communication and why it stands out on this.

CE2.3 define a screen of a multimedia publishing product graphic spaces taking into account visual impact, graphic presentation, readability, color and aesthetic principles, and others.

CE2.4 describe what a graphic element and features from the technical point of view (vector or bitmap) and of perception, such as the golden rule of perception and others.

CE2.5 describe the factors and phenomena of harmony, contrast and others, that influence the perception of a graphic element.

CE2.6 create a textual content and graphic elements, according to the previous sketches, distributing them harmoniously in spaces of a screen of a multimedia publishing product, taking into account the principles of psychological Association.

CE2.7 operate with an editing tool of fonts that allows the graphic design of the multimedia publishing product.

CE2.8 identify different fonts and features that have from the technical point of view: vector or bitmap, and readability: fonts or styles.

CE2.9 in a practical course of definition of the graphical structure from a given sketch, from the book of style and conventions established for the product:-apply the fonts appropriate to the multimedia publishing product based on his book of style and conventions established for it.

-Apply the criteria of readability of the image and the text on the display.

-Check the screens that make up to meet the product specifications, quality criteria as well as the book's style and its conventions.

C3: Develop sketches of a multimedia publishing product from its specification document.

CE3.1 explain what are the parts that make up the design of a multimedia publishing product document.

CE3.2 operate with definition of schemas, using workflows, tools to specify the structure and navigation of multimedia publishing product.

CE3.3 define the structure diagram of a multimedia publishing product from its specification document.

CE3.4 in a practical course of development of sketches from the media for publishing product specifications:-develop the sketch of the multimedia publishing product, picking up the global navigation of the product, in accordance with the specifications and making use of screens that comprise it.

-Define the structure diagram and navigation between screens using schemas from its specification document.

-Check that the given specifications, recommendations of the book's style and quality standards as well as standards are met.

C4: Integrate multimedia elements on the screens of a multimedia publishing product according to the requirements of the process.

CE4.1 explain what types of multimedia elements and what are the main characteristics of each of these types.

CE4.2 identify the multimedia elements necessary for the development of a multimedia publishing product from this document specifications and their sketches.

CE4.3 identify potential sources in which media can be located and what are their usage rights.

CE4.4 in a practical course of integration of multimedia elements into screens, starting from a given multimedia publishing product specifications:-recover the multimedia elements located in a file of objects according to the specifications of the multimedia publishing product.

-Incorporate the multimedia elements on each of the screens that make up the multimedia publishing product.


-Check that the integration of those elements multimedia in them screens that make up the product publishing multimedia is in accordance with its standards of quality and its document of specifications.

C5: Defining the functional aspects of a multimedia publishing product, including interactivity, from a document of specifications and screens that comprise it.

CE5.1 determine what interactivity and what are the main characteristics that define the process of interaction.

CE5.2 describe the interaction that a user can perform with a multimedia publishing product from your document specifications and screens that comprise it.

CE5.3 in a practical course of definition of functional aspects in a multimedia publishing product from a previous sketches and specifications document:-define the functions that should be developed.

-Prepare the document of functionality of the multimedia publishing product from your document specification and a set of sketches of departure.

-Include interaction with each of the screens that comprise it.

C6: Rating the legal aspects on the conditions of use of the multimedia elements that are incorporated into a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.1 explain what types of legal rights of use there may be for a media element.

CE6.2 explain how certain rights of use of a media element can be obtained.

CE6.3 the legal rights of use of each media item that is included in a multimedia publishing product type as well as the origin of the same document.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.1 and CE2.9; C3 on CE3.4; C4 on CE4.4; C5 regarding CE5.3; C6 concerning CE6.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work developed and objectives.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Demonstrate interest in the knowledge of the Organization and its processes.

Adapt it to the Organization, to their changes organizational and technological as well as to situations or contexts new.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand those changes.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.



Contents: 1. architectures of products publishing multimedia definition of architecture of a product publishing multimedia.

Structure of data and information to be treated.

Structure and selection of software to use.

Typology and description of the equipment of production and user.

Classification of the product by its technological environment of use and consumption.

Architecture standards.

Network architectures.

Software architectures.

Hardware architecture.

Information architectures.

Platforms: compatibility and interoperability.

Format of files and storage.



2. multimedia publishing multimedia publishing product design: what is and how it develops.

Specifications concerning multimedia publishing products. Types and platforms.

Basic principles and creative graphic design basics.

Sketches of multimedia publishing products.

Navigation in multimedia publishing products.

Using schema definition tools.

Standards of quality.

Environmental and occupational risk prevention legislation.



3. screens fundamentals of graphic design graphic design.

Principles of psychological Association.

The image as a communication element.

The color. Symbolism associated with colors.

Basics of graphic design: perception and technology.

Use of tools of graphic design.

The text and its codification.

The typography. Styles and characteristics.

Technical and readability of the fonts features.

Use of computer tools for the edition of fonts.

Application of graphic design in the development of screens.



4 multimedia publishing products multimedia content types: texts, images, sounds, videos and animations 2D and 3D interactive elements and others.

Features of the multimedia contents: texts, images, sounds, videos and animations 2D and 3D, interactive elements and others, including formats, sizes and spatial and temporal dimensions.

Location of archives of multimedia objects.

Retrieval of multimedia objects in repository objects.

Communication from the editorial team with the development of multimedia content team.

Integration of multimedia elements in sketches of multimedia publishing products.



5. functional description of a multimedia publishing product definition of a functional description.

Interaction design.

Design of a multimedia publishing product functionalities.

Communication of the team publishing with the team of programming.

Integration of features in those products publishing multimedia.



6. rights legal's use of contained multimedia standards applicable on property intellectual.

Definition of those rights legal for use.

Types of rights legal for use.

The rights of use of contents multimedia.

Management of those rights legal's use of contents multimedia.

Documentation of the rights of use of contents multimedia.

Communication of the team publishing with the team of management of contents multimedia.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the design of the multimedia publishing product, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.



MODULE training 3: implementation and publication of products publishing MULTIMEDIA level: 3 code: MF0937_3 associated to the UC: generate and publish products publishing multimedia duration: 210 hours capabilities and criteria of evaluation: C1: determine them aspects functional, including the interactivity, in products publishing multimedia starting of the definition of a design prior.

CE1.1 identify the aspects functional of a product publishing multimedia from a design previous in that are defined.

CE1.2 recognize, in a product publishing multimedia, the interactivity existing within those aspects functional of the same.

CE1.3 starting from a document of a given multimedia publishing product functionality, determine the functions that should be developed, including interaction with each of the screens that make up.

C2: Apply scripts and presentation markup languages in the development of prototypes of multimedia publishing products from a design and functionality specifications.

CE2.1 explain what are the types of markup, presentation and script languages, and what currently exist.

CE2.2 skillfully operate with web development tools to produce a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.3 identify different products given, the main elements needed to generate the basic prototypes that describe enough operation.

CE2.4 determined from the definition of the project of a multimedia publishing product given, elements that will make up the prototype: sketches of screens, audio and video, as well as the interactions and functionality.

CE2.5 set the stages of development and the composition and functions of the development of a prototype of a multimedia publishing product team.

CE2.6 analyze the degree of detail with which is will develop the prototype, to describe adequately the operation desired of the product according to the definition of the project.

CE2.7 in a so-called practical duly characterized and starting from a design, of some specifications and of a set of elements multimedia given:-develop a document web making use of a language of brands and of all them elements given.

-Modify a style of presentation or a script of interaction to meet the design and the specifications given.

-Apply a style of presentation specific to a document web given.

-Incorporate scripts of interaction in a document web given that meets a certain specifications.

-Generate web pages dynamic starting from queries in a database.

C3: Developing multimedia publishing products of functionality defined by the use of languages for markup, presentation and functionality specifications given scripts.

CE3.1 set the stages of development and the composition and functions of the multimedia publishing product development team.


CE3.2 rating capabilities that can be deployed in a multimedia product from the languages of markup and presentation of existing scripts.

CE3.3 starting from a set of sequenced sketches, decide which languages markup, presentation or scripts are able to implement the intended functionality.

CE3.4 set the plan of checking of the functionality with regard to the schemes of a product muiltimedia publishing given.

CE3.5 starting from some sketches / prototypes given and of them specifications functional corresponding to a project defined:-implement the features making use of languages of marked, of presentation or of scripts.

-To develop, where appropriate, the interactions defined in the project.

-Implement them elements interactive, the aid, the treatment of the exceptions and them messages of error of form coherent with the navigation specified.

C4: Publish multimedia publishing products on websites or in digital media.

CE4.1 explain what are the different alternative to make the publication publishing multimedia and why is characterized and when must use is each an of them.

CE4.2 structure information of a multimedia publishing product for publication according to given specifications.

CE4.3 in a practical course of publication of multimedia publishing products, from work instructions:-skillfully operate with transfer of information tools.

-Post it on a web site by using tools of information transfer.

-Check that the published multimedia publishing product has the same appearance and behavior as unpublished.

-Identify the publication factors influencing the safety and environmental protection in the process.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.5 and CE2.7; C3 on CE3.5; C4 on CE4.3.

Other skills: be responsible for the work developed and objectives.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.

Sharing information with the team.

Adapt it to the Organization, to their changes organizational and technological as well as to situations or contexts new.

Act with speed in situations problematic and not limit it to wait.



Contents: 1. development of prototype analysis of relevant aspects in finished prototypes.

Criteria of selection of a fragment representative of the project fully functional.

Selection of elements that make up the prototype.

Determination of the necessary tools to develop the prototype.

Analysis of the prior design and multimedia product specifications.

Assembly of the prototype.

Mounting of multimedia elements in a prototype.

Evaluation of prototypes.



2 programming language definition of markup, presentation and script languages.

Types of languages of presentation.

Types of markup languages.

Types of languages of scripts.

Types of languages of owners.

Types of languages combined.

Hardware/software requirements.

Taxonomy of markup, presentation and script languages.

Integration of databases in web pages.



3 languages for prototyping definition of markup, presentation and script languages.

Types of languages of presentation.

Types of markup languages.

Types of languages of scripts.

Types of languages of owners.

Types of languages combined.

Hardware/software requirements.

Taxonomy of markup, presentation and script languages.

Integration of databases in web pages.

Development of a multimedia publishing product on web using existing tools.



4. development of interactivity in multimedia products using different tools of markup, presentation or existing scripts.

Hardware/software requirements.

Players and updates.

Content publishing and compatibility.

Target platforms and devices.



5 tools presentation styles.

Definition of presentation.

Features of style sheets.

Use of CSS style sheets.

Transformation of documents.

Definition of transformation.

Types of transformations.

Use of XSLT transformations.

Languages of scripts for interaction.

Definition of interactive scripting.

The JavaScript language.

Use of JavaScript to generate scripts.

Collections of JavaScript codes.

Modelling of objects (dynamic html).

Languages of graphical interaction with server.

Flash and actionscript.

Interpreted languages of server (PHP, ASP, and others).

Trends in programming languages scripts, graphical interaction and server.



6 multimedia publishing product product Assembly Assembly.

Assembly of multimedia elements.

Integration of icons, menus and graphic design elements.

Implementation of the interactivity that is described in the script.

Implementation of the functionality.



7. publication of multimedia publishing multimedia on Web Fundamentals of the editorial publishing on web.

Tools used for publishing on web.

Development of multimedia publishing web publishing.

Design, prototype and style book.

Monitoring of production planning.

WWAI-W3C accessibility.

Usability.

Applicable quality standards.

Legislation on the use of databases.

Technical documentation.

Possibilities of update in different publications.

Tools used for the updating of the publications.



Parameters of context of it training: spaces and facilities: them spaces e facilities will give response, in form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop of practices, laboratory or space singular, to them needs training, in accordance with the context professional established in the unit of competition associated, taking in has the normative applicable of the sector productive, prevention of risks, health labor, accessibility universal and protection environmental.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the generation and publication of multimedia publishing products, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of minimum 3 years in the field of skills related to this training module.

2.-competition pedagogical accredited in accordance with which to establish the administrations competent.



TRAINING module 4: management of the quality of MULTIMEDIA publishing products level: 3 code: MF0938_3 associated with UC: manage and control the quality of the multimedia publishing product duration: 90 hours capabilities and evaluation criteria: C1: check that a multimedia publishing product meet the functional requirements and the suitability of your particular distribution platform.

CE1.1 identify the test that a multimedia publishing product must overcome to ensure compliance with all of the functional requirements.

CE1.2 check that each of the test cases for a multimedia publishing product is successfully met.

CE1.3 in a practical course of verification of publishing multimedia product with a given platform test cases:-study the results of use of the selected platform to check its suitability.

-Assess the requirements of usability of the prototype and its correspondence with those indicated on the document of the multimedia product specifications.

-Identify and collect the test results exceeded the corresponding quality control document.

-Identify and collect the failures of tests never bettered in the quality control document, facilitating its subsequent adjustment.

CE1.4 starting from a prototype of publishing product, testing of evaluation and check-up, taking into account the quality standards, in accordance with a given operating specifications.

C2: Develop a multimedia publishing product user manual and technical documents.

CE2.1 explain what are the types of documents associated with a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.2 relate documents associated with a multimedia publishing product with people involved in the development of the same.

CE2.3 operate with systems of help authoring tools to create an interactive documentation.

CE2.4 structure a multimedia publishing product according to a default publishing style documentation.

CE2.5 develop a multimedia publishing product according to a default publishing style user manual.

C3: Evaluate a multimedia publishing product, checking that it meets the requirements of usability.

CE3.1 explain what are the stages to be performed to carry out the evaluation of the usability of a multimedia publishing product.

The CE3.2 is select the most suitable technique for the evaluation of a multimedia publishing product in accordance with the stage of development and the resources available.


CE3.3 planning the process of evaluation of a multimedia publishing product, as well as the type of information that you want to collect, taking into account the requirements, quality standards and the standards of safety, health and environmental protection.

CE3.4 explain what are the mechanisms for collecting information in an evaluation process and what conditions would be used every one of them.

CE3.5 explain the methods of statistical analysis that can be applied to the information in an evaluation process.

CE3.6 recognize the peculiarities of physical distribution platforms: CD, DVD, e-book, and others.

CE3.7 in a practical course of evaluation of a multimedia publishing product, from planning and given objectives:-analyze the results obtained during the evaluation process, contrasting them with the requirements and standards of quality.

-Identify the characteristics of the different distribution platforms of multimedia publishing product.

-Differentiate hardware and operating system platforms used in the distribution of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.8 evaluate a given multimedia publishing product, taking into account their adaptation to the environment, both physically as hardware and operating system.

C4: Define plans of improvement and development of multimedia publishing products from monitoring of distribution and publishing multimedia user experience.

CE4.1 define relevant data to establish a plan for the distribution of a multimedia publishing product monitoring.

CE4.2 indicate legal requirements in the treatment of the personal data obtained on plans track the distribution and use in multimedia publishing products.

CE4.3 in a practical course of preparation of a document of identification of users, starting from a given multimedia publishing product:-determine the profile of the user.

-Rating indicators to use.

-Establish the treatment of user data.

Skills whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment: C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 CE2.3 and CE2.5; C3 on CE3.3, CE3.6, CE3.7; C4 on CE4.3.

Other capabilities: responsibility is of the work that develops and of the fulfillment of objectives.

Participate and collaborate actively in the task force.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just waiting.

Adapt to new contexts or situations.

Promote the personal and professional development in the team respect the procedures and internal rules of the organization.



Contents: 1. Control of quality of the products publishing multimedia regulations applicable of quality.

Structure of the system of management of the quality.

Quality factors.

Parameters functional.

Parameters of navigation.

Parameters aesthetic.

Interaction parameters.



2. tests for multimedia publishing products performance tests.

Usability testing.

Accessibility tests.

Analysis of behaviour with respect to the specifications.

Testing of graphical interfaces.

AIDS testing.

Evidence of behavior in time real.

Evaluation and internal checks of the product.



3. usability of products publishing multimedia definition and objectives of the usability.

Principles of usability.

Definition and objectives of the evaluation of usability.

Principles of usability: Jakob Nielsen.

Definition and objectives of the evaluation of usability.

Methods and experimental evaluation techniques.

The process of evaluation of usability.

The process plan.

Stages of the evaluation.

Evaluation techniques.

Methods of statistical analysis.

Development of practical examples of evaluation of a product.



4. distribution of the multimedia publishing product distribution of multimedia publishing products.

Characteristics of the different channels of distribution.

Techniques for evaluation of the distribution.

Definition of user experience.

Characteristics of the user experience.

Theory of the gamification.

Tools for obtaining data from the user experience.

Applicable data protection regulations.



Parameters of the training context: spaces and facilities: the spaces and facilities will answer, in the form of classroom, classroom workshop, workshop practice, laboratory, or space, to training needs, in accordance with the professional context established in the competition unit associated, taking into account the applicable regulations of the productive sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.



Professional profile of the trainer or trainer: 1. domain of knowledge and techniques related to the management and control of the quality of the multimedia publishing product, which will be using one of the following ways:-academic education of level 2 (Spanish framework for higher education qualifications), engineering, technical architecture, diploma or other upper level related to the professional field.

-Experience professional of a minimum of 3 years in the field of the competencies related with this module training.

2. accredited educational competition in accordance with it to establish the competent administrations.